Furuno CA 400

OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Clinical Chemistry Analyzer
CA-400
Original issue : Mar / 2008

4th edition : Aug / 2009
Public ation No. O M- E 7219- 1D

W A R R A N T Y
The term of warranty of this analyzer is one year from the date of purchase.
Our company shall not be responsible for the following failures and damages for
the warranty period.
(1) Failure/damage caused by the result of misuse.

(2) Failure/damage caused by repair or alteration performed by any company
other than our company.
(3) Failure/damage caused by the phenomenon which is due to other than our
product.
(4) Failure/damage caused by the condition beyond the normal operating
condition of this analyzer such as the power supply, the installation
environment.
(5) Failure/damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood damage or other natural
disaster.
(6) Failure/damage caused by shift or transportation performed by other than our
company after our installation.
Technical
TRADEMARKS
W ind o ws XP is a r egister ed tr ad emark o f Micro so ft Co rp o ratio n.
FFFT P is fr eewar e, and its co p yr ight b elo ngs to Mr. So ta.
COPYRIGHT OF THIS MANUAL

Co p yright o f this d o cument b elo ngs to FURUNO ELECT RIC CO., LT D. No p art o f this
d o cument shall b e r ep r o d uced , tr ansmitted , transcrib ed , sto red in any retrieval system, o r
translated into any language b y any means, electro nic o r mechanical, includ ing p ho to co p ying
and reco rd ing, fo r any p ur p o se o ther than the p urchaser's p erso nal use witho ut the exp ress
written p er missio n o f FURUNO ELECT RIC CO., LT D.
Warranty / Trademark / Copyright of This Manual

REVISION RECORD
T he latest ed itio n sup er sed es any p reced ing o nes. If yo u have o ld ed itio ns, d iscard them to
avo id p o ssib le co nfusio n.
REV DATE REVISION HIGHLIGHT

1A March 2008 Published as first version.
1B July 2008 [0.7 Component List] :
Modified Component List and Standard Accessories List.
[0.2 Precautions for Use] and [0.8 Software Operating Environment] :
Added notifications for external devices.
[Overall] :
Corrected minor errors.
1C Dec. 2008 [Forward] :
Modified [5. Technical Specifications].
[1.1 General] and [1.2 Built-in Unit]:
Added comments that “RCU Barcode is optional”.
[1.4 Operation Basics] :
Modified [1.4.5 Menu Structure].
[2.2 Reagent Registration] :
Modified overall.
[2.4 Placement for Reagent Bottles] :
Modified bottles types.
[2.7 Test Selection Setting] :
Modified [2.7.1.5 Multi Standard Sample].
Modified [2.7.1.8 Control Sample].
Modified [2.7.2.2 Multi Standard Sample].
Modified [2.7.2.3 Control Sample].
[3.1 Run Menu] :
Modified [3.1.5 Reagent Remaining Volume].
[3.5 System Menu] :
Modified [3.5.1 System Settings].
Modified [3.5.2 Reagent Registration].
Modified [3.5.5 Technical Range and the Registration for Patient Generation].
[Chapter 4 Alarm] :
Added Alarm Messages for SPT
1D Aug. 2009 Modified [Foreword].
REVISION RECORD
T HIS P AGE IS
INT ENT IONALLY
LEFT B LANK.
REVISION RECORD
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Forwards
1. Safety Precautions ..........................................................................0-2
2. Precautions for Use ........................................................................0-4
3. Installation Environment................................................................0-9
4. Warning Labels ..............................................................................0-12
5. Technical Specification ..................................................................0-14
6. System Configuration ....................................................................0-20
7. Component List...............................................................................0-21
8. Software Operating Environment ...................................................0-23
9. Handling of barcode reader ............................................................0-24
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 General ............................................................................................1-1
1.2 Built-in Unit ....................................................................................1-4
1.3 Measurement Flow .........................................................................1-9
1.3.1 Normal Measurement............................................................................ 1-9
1.3.2 Sample Dilution .................................................................................... 1-11
1.3.3 Reagent Blank Measurement ................................................................ 1-11
1.3.4 Water Blank Measurement .................................................................... 1-11
1.3.5 ISE Measurement .................................................................................. 1-11
1.4 Operation Basics .............................................................................1-12
1.4.1 Analysis Specifications ......................................................................... 1-12
1.4.2 Sample Identification Code................................................................... 1-13
1.4.3 Barcode Label Specifications for both Sample and Reagent ................ 1-14
1.4.4 Keyboard ............................................................................................... 1-15
1.4.5 Menu Structure...................................................................................... 1-16
1.4.6 Control Screen Layout .......................................................................... 1-19
Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 Measurement Procedures

2.1 Prior Checking and Power On ....................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Checking Prior to Work ........................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 External Tank Rack (Optional) ............................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 Power ON.............................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.4 Power OFF ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.2 Reagent Registration ................................................................... 2-9
2.2.1 Addition ................................................................................................ 2-10
2.2.2 Editing ................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.3 Delete .................................................................................................... 2-12
2.3 Settings for Chemistry Parameters .............................................. 2-13
2.3.1 Setting for Chemistry Parameters (1) .................................................... 2-14
2.3.2 Setting for Chemistry Parameters (2) .................................................... 2-21
2.3.3 Setting for ISE Parameters .................................................................... 2-25
2.3.4 Setting for Serum Information (SI) Parameters .................................... 2-29
2.3.5 Definition of Method to Method Calculation ........................................ 2-32
2.3.6 Definition of Profile .............................................................................. 2-32
2.3.7 Setting for Measurement Orders ........................................................... 2-32
2.3.8 Definition of Nozzle Wash Program ..................................................... 2-32
2.4 Placement for Reagent Bottles (RCU) ......................................... 2-33

2.4.1 Sequence Procedures for Bottles ........................................................... 2-33
2.5 Calibration Setting ....................................................................... 2-34
2.5.1 Calibration Curve Type ......................................................................... 2-34
2.5.2 Calibration Registration/Setting ............................................................ 2-35
2.5.3 Serial Dilution Setting ........................................................................... 2-40
2.5.4 Multi Standard Setting........................................................................... 2-40
2.5.5 Confirmation of ISE Calibration ........................................................... 2-40
2.6 Confirmation of System Parameters ............................................ 2-41
Table of Contents
2
Table of Contents
2.7 Test Selection Setting ....................................................................2-42

2.7.1 Normal Test Selection: [Run (F5)] – [Selection] ...................................... 2-43
2.7.1.1 Normal Sample (Normal)........................................................................ 2-44
2.7.1.2 Emergency Sample (STAT) ..................................................................... 2-49
2.7.1.3 Replicate Sample (Replicate) .................................................................. 2-50
2.7.1.4 Standard Sample (Standard) .................................................................... 2-52
2.7.1.5 Multi Standard Sample (Multi Standard) ................................................ 2-53
2.7.1.6 Dilution Standard Sample (Serial Dilution) ............................................ 2-54
2.7.1.7 Blank Sample (Blank) ............................................................................. 2-55
2.7.1.8 Control Sample (Control)........................................................................ 2-56
2.7.1.9 Mask Setting (Mask) ............................................................................... 2-57
2.7.1.10 Orderless Sample (Orderless) ................................................................. 2-58
2.7.1.11 Online Sample (Online) .......................................................................... 2-59
2.7.1.12 ISE Calibration ........................................................................................ 2-63
2.7.1.13 ISE Cleaning ......................................................................................... 2-64
2.7.1.14 SPT Wash ................................................................................................ 2-65
2.7.2 Special Test Selection: [Run (F5)] – [Std QC] ......................................... 2-66
2.7.2.1 Standard Sample (Standard) .................................................................... 2-66
2.7.2.2 Multi Standard Sample (Multi Standard) ................................................ 2-68
2.7.2.3 Dilution Standard Sample (Serial Dilution) ............................................ 2-69
2.7.2.4 Control Sample (Control)........................................................................ 2-70
2.7.2.5 Blank Sample (Blank) ............................................................................. 2-71
2.7.2.6 ISE Cleaning ........................................................................................... 2-72
2.7.2.7 SPT Wash ................................................................................................ 2-73
2.8 Sample placement (ASP) ..............................................................2-74

2.8.1 Placement to Tube Tray ............................................................................. 2-75
2.8.2 Placement to Sample Cup Tray (Innermost slot of ASP) .......................... 2-76
2.9 Confirmation of Reagent Remaining Volume...............................2-77
2.10 Measurement Start and Monitor ...................................................2-78
2.10.1 Measurement Start ................................................................................ 2-78
2.10.2 Measurement Status Monitor (Run Monitor)........................................ 2-79
2.10.3 Measurement Process Monitor (Round Monitor) ................................. 2-80
Table of Contents
3
Table of Contents
2.11 Sample Addition ........................................................................... 2-81

2.11.1 Emergency Sample Addition ................................................................. 2-81
2.11.2 Normal Sample Addition ....................................................................... 2-83
Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus

3.1 Run (F5) ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Monitor..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Round (Error Flags) ................................................................................. 3-5
3.1.3 Selection ................................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.4 Result ....................................................................................................... 3-15
3.1.4.1 Measurement Result ........................................................................ 3-15
3.1.4.2 Testing Count ................................................................................... 3-19
3.1.5 Inventory .................................................................................................. 3-20
3.1.6 Sleep Scheme ........................................................................................... 3-23
3.1.7 Std QC ...................................................................................................... 3-25
3.1.8 Patient....................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2 Parameter (F6)............................................................................... 3-29
3.2.1 Normal ..................................................................................................... 3-29
3.2.2 Normal 2 .................................................................................................. 3-34
3.2.3 ISE ............................................................................................................ 3-38
3.2.4 SI .............................................................................................................. 3-40
3.2.5 Calc .......................................................................................................... 3-42
3.2.6 Profile ....................................................................................................... 3-44
3.2.7 Order ........................................................................................................ 3-45
3.2.8 Wash ......................................................................................................... 3-46
3.3 Calibration (F7) ............................................................................. 3-49
3.3.1 Reg Calib.................................................................................................. 3-49
3.3.2 Serial Dilut ............................................................................................... 3-53
3.3.3 Multi-Std .................................................................................................. 3-55
3.3.4 ISE ............................................................................................................ 3-56
Table of Contents
4
Table of Contents
3.4 QC (F8) ..........................................................................................3-57

3.4.1 Graph ....................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.2 Details ...................................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.3 Daily ........................................................................................................ 3-63
3.4.4 Cumulative............................................................................................... 3-66
3.4.5 Settings .................................................................................................... 3-68
3.4.6 Registration .............................................................................................. 3-72
3.5 System (F9) ....................................................................................3-74
3.5.1 Setup ........................................................................................................ 3-74
3.5.2 Reagent .................................................................................................... 3-80
3.5.3 Login ........................................................................................................ 3-82
3.5.4 Backup ..................................................................................................... 3-84
3.5.5 Setup2 ...................................................................................................... 3-87
3.5.6 Define ...................................................................................................... 3-88
3.5.7 Range ....................................................................................................... 3-90
3.6 Mainte (F10) ..................................................................................3-91
3.6.1 W Blank ................................................................................................... 3-91
3.6.2 Work Hour ............................................................................................... 3-92
3.6.3 Sequence .................................................................................................. 3-94
3.6.4 Sensor ...................................................................................................... 3-98
3.6.5 Perform .................................................................................................... 3-104
3.6.6 Adjust....................................................................................................... 3-106
3.6.7 DTR Pos .................................................................................................. 3-107
3.6.8 Password .................................................................................................. 3-108
3.6.9 Operational Logs ..................................................................................... 3-111
3.7 Printout ...........................................................................................3-113
3.7.1 Live Print Out .......................................................................................... 3-113
3.7.2 Print of the Setting Items ......................................................................... 3-116
Table of Contents
5
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.1 Alarm Overview ............................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Alarm Type............................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Alarm Output Destination ........................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Alarm Code Numbering System .............................................................. 4-2
4.2 User Interface Alarm ..................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Unit Alarm..................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Reagent Pipette 1 (RPT1) .................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2 Reagent Pipette 2 (RPT2) .................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.3 Sample Pipette（SPT） ..................................................................................... 4-14
4.3.4 Mixer Unit 1 (MIX-1) .............................................................................. 4-20
4.3.5 Mixer Unit 2 (MIX-2) .............................................................................. 4-22
4.3.6 Wash Unit (WU) .................................................................................................. 4-24
4.3.7 Incubation Reaction Unit (IRU) ....................................................................... 4-28
4.3.8 Reagent Container Unit (RCU)......................................................................... 4-30
4.3.9 Detector Unit (DTR) ........................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.10 Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) .................................................................................. 4-31
4.3.11 Ion Selectable Electrode Unit (ISE) ................................................................. 4-32
4.3.12 Tank .......................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.13 Sensor Status ......................................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.14 Temperature .......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.15 Others ..................................................................................................................... 4-37
Table of Contents
6
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Actions to be Taken at Trouble ......................................................5-1
5.1.1 Details When You Contact Our Servicing ............................................... 5-1
5.2 Abnormality of Power On..............................................................5-2
5.3 Abnormality of Measurement Results ...........................................5-3
5.3.1 Preparation check of Reagent, Standard Sample and QC sample ........... 5-3
5.3.2 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Higher for All Samples
............................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Lower for All Samples
............................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.4 Wrong Measurement Results Come Out at Random ............................... 5-4
5.3.5 Measurement results of One Sample Show Abnormal Value for All Methods
............................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.6 Multiple Abnormal Measurement Results ............................................. 5-5
5.4 Malfunction of Analyzer............................................................5-6
5.4.1 Detection of Mechanical Problem ........................................................... 5-6
5.4.2 Error Message of Each Unit .................................................................... 5-6
Table of Contents
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Cleaning and Decontamination ..................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 External Tank ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Piping and Internal Tank ....................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Pipettes (for RPT1/RPT2/SPT) ............................................................. 6-9
6.1.4 WU Nozzles .......................................................................................... 6-10
6.1.5 Stirrers (for MIX1/MIX2) ..................................................................... 6-10
6.1.6 Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)...................................................................... 6-11
6.1.7 Reagent Container Unit (RCU) ............................................................. 6-12
6.1.8 Worktable .............................................................................................. 6-13
6.2 Part Replacement .......................................................................... 6-14
6.2.1 Syringe Tips (for SPP/RPP/WPP) ................................................................. 6-15
6.2.2 Wipe Tip (in WU) .................................................................................. 6-18
6.2.3 Pipette (for SPT/RPT) ..................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.4 Halogen Lamp ................................................................................................. 6-23
6.2.5 Cuvettes (in IRU) .................................................................................. 6-25
6.2.6 Mesh Filter (or Inline Filter) ................................................................. 6-26
6.2.7 Dust Filter .............................................................................................. 6-27
6.2.8 Electrode (in ISE) ............................................................................................. 6-28
6.2.9 Pump Cassette (for ISE) .................................................................................. 6-30
6.2.10 CAL-A bag (in ISE) ......................................................................................... 6-32
Table of Contents
8
FOREWORDS
FOREWORDS
This operation manual is the one to use the Fully Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer safely and correctly. Before
you operate this Analyzer, please read this manual carefully and understand the contents enough.
This analyzer is designed to measure the human specimen (Serum, Plasma, Urine and so on) and is used with
Windows PC, and the measurement result can be printed out.
[Precaution]
1 The contents of this manual are described for the clinical laboratory technologists who operate this analyzer.
2.The contents of this manual may be changed without a previous notice in the future.
This analyzer belongs to “In vitro diagnostic (IVD) medical device”, and complies with IVD Directive (98/79/EC)
and EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) or EU Directive.
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
9-52, Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya-City, 662-8580 Japan
EMERGO EUROPE
Molenstraat 15 2513 BH, The Hague The Netherlands

Tel: +31-70-345-8570
Fax: +31-70-346-7299
0-1
FOREWORDS
<Precaution for Use and Installation Environment>

This section explains points to note when using the analyzer, the installation environment required for normal
operation, standard accessory and warning labels. Before using the analyzer, please read this manual. If the
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection may be impaired.
1. Safety Precautions
Prevention of damage and ignition
Please observe the following precautions to prevent damage and ignition of the analyzer.
· Install the analyzer according to the installation environment and the installation requirements specified
in this manual.
· Contact our servicing or sales division when you need to move the analyzer to other location.
Prevention of electric shock

Please observe the following precautions to prevent electric shock caused by the use of the analyzer.
· Whenever the analyzer is operating, do not remove the covers (front cover, rear cover, side cover, etc.)
that are installed by using screws.
· If liquid falls into the analyzer or liquid spills inside the analyzer, contact our servicing division. In this
case, careless action may cause electric shock.
Prevention of injury
Please observe the following precautions to prevent injury due to the use of the analyzer.
· Whenever the analyzer is operating, never touch the moving parts including sample probes, reagent
probes, stirrer, etc. Also do not put your fingers or hand into the openings.
· As for replacing lamps, turn the power off and wait for the lamp to get cold (over 30 minutes), then
replace the lamp. Direct contact with the heated lamp may cause burn injury.
· For safety reasons, follow the instructions written on the labels attached to the analyzer and the
instructions of this manual.
· As for personal computers and printers, refer to each operating manual.
Protection of eyes
Please observe the following precautions to protect eyes.
· Do not look directly at the lighted lamps of the analyzer or laser beam used in the bar code reader, as
they may cause eye injury.
0-2
FOREWORDS
To ensure the accuracy of measurement data
· Whenever the analyzer is operating, do not open the covers including top cover, rear cover, side covers
(left cover and right cover).
· Whenever the analyzer is operating, do not open the Reagent Container Unit (RCU) cover (lid) and
Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) cover (lid).
If the lid for ASP or RCU is removed, then the measurement is aborted.
· For use of the analyzer, conduct accuracy control so that the analyzer functions correctly.
· As for maintenance or components needing periodic replacement for the analyzer, follow the
instructions in this manual.
· As for reagents, accuracy control substances and standard substances, follow the instructions of their
manufacturers and suppliers.
Disposal of wastewater
Special attention is required for disposal of some wastewater or residual samples. This analyzer
discharges high concentrated wastewater and low concentrated wastewater separately. Please observe the
following precautions.
Substances regulated by the pollution control laws and wastewater discharge standards are contained in
.
some samples, reagents, accuracy control substances, standard substances, wash solutions (detergents), etc.
used for the analyzer. Please refer the disposal of such substances to the instructions of relevant
manufacturers and suppliers to comply with the facility wastewater standards.
Prevention of infection
It is necessary to correctly handle samples used in the analyzer. Unless the samples are correctly handled, it
may result in infection. Please observe the following precautions to prevent infection.
Do not directly touch samples, reagents, wastewaters, etc. that may cause infection. If there is possibility to
touch them, make sure to wear protective gloves, masks and goggles to prevent infection. In case you
touch them accidentally, follow your company's operating procedure and consult a physician as required. If
they contact the analyzer, immediately wipe away.
Handling of test reagents

Please observe the following precautions to prevent injury.
Some reagents are strong acid or strong alkali. Be careful not to touch them directly with hands or spill
over your clothes. In case where they mistakenly spill over your skin or clothes, immediately wash enough
with water and soap. If they contact eyes, flush thoroughly with plenty of water and consult a physician.
0-3
FOREWORDS
Prevention of affect on other facility/equipment
As for the installment of the analyzer, make appropriate power supply wiring so that failure of the analyzer
should not affect other important facility or equipment (example: power supply unit of surgical equipment,
etc.).
2. Precautions for Use

Please observe strictly the following precautions to ensure safe and efficient use of the analyzer.
General precautions for use of the analyzer
1. Use of samples
(1) This analyzer is designed to analyze human serums, urine, etc. There might be some sample that
cannot be analyzed depending on the analysis item and the reagents. In this case, refer to the
relevant manufacturers and suppliers.
(2) Use samples that contain no suspended particles. As for serum samples, use serum samples that
contain no blood clots. Use of serum samples containing blood clots or use of urine samples
containing suspended particles may cause the analyzer's probes to get clogged and adversely affect
the analysis processing.
(3) Note that there are some cases where a significant clinical affect is achieved depending on
chemical substances which coexist with samples (medication, anticoagulant, preservative, etc.)
2. Storage of samples
Store samples in an appropriate manner. If stored in an inappropriate environment, samples may
change in quality. For example, if blood is kept in cold storage, potassium in the blood will be
increased.
3. Sample pretreatment and handling of samples
(1) Fibrins contained in serum may clog the probes. When separating serum, make sure that blood is
clotted enough. Samples to be used in the analyzer shall be free of fibrin.
(2) As for using urine as a sample, if there is suspension of particles in a urine sample, centrifugalize
the urine sample so that the suspended particles get precipitated.
(3) If sample pretreatment unique to the analysis item is required, consult the relevant reagent
manufacturers and suppliers. Regarding the advisability of serum separation agents, refer to their
manufacturers.
(4) To prevent samples from evaporating, do not leave the sample containers unsealed for a long time.
The evaporation may lead to incorrect analysis results.
4. Handling of reagents, standard substances, and accuracy control substances
(1) Regarding the ways to store, handle and use reagents, standard substances and accuracy control
substances, follow the instructions of the relevant reagent manufacturers and suppliers.
(2) If a reagent, standard substance or accuracy control substance is not stored appropriately,
regardless of the specified expiry date, correct analysis results may not be gained. With regard to
the ways to store reagents, follow the instructions specified on their packaging, container or
attached documents.
(3) Regarding safety after opening the package of reagents, etc., refer to the relevant manufacturers
and suppliers.
(4) Make sure to calibrate the analyzer whenever reagents are replaced. To gain correct analysis
results, correct calibration is important.
0-4
FOREWORDS
5. Reagent interference of assay method-to-method

In the analysis process sometimes a reagent may be contaminated by other reagents and that may
adversely affect the analysis results. Refer to the relevant manufacturers and suppliers for details
because the influence is different by individual reagents.
6. Analysis performance
If hemolysis, turbidity or bilirubin is contained in serum at high concentrate rate, the medical agent or
its metabolic products may adversely affect analysis results. Refer to the relevant manufacturers
and suppliers for details.
7. Connection of water supply/exhaust hoses
(1) Leave connection work of water supply/exhaust hoses to qualified personnel only. Incorrect
connection may cause troubles including hose disconnection during the operation, leakage. etc.
(2) Make sure to prevent air bubbles from entering the ion-exchange water to be supplied to the
analyzer.
8. Electromagnetic waves, noise, etc.
(1) Do not install the analyzer near the equipment that generates an abnormal noise.
(2) Turn off a portable radio or cellular phone near the analyzer. Abnormal noise or electromagnetic
waves generated from the portable radio or cellular phone may cause malfunction of the analyzer.
(3) Do not use medical equipment that may be affected by electromagnetic waves near the analyzer.
9. Operational environment of the analyzer
Operate the analyzer with temperature: 15 to 30°C humidity: 45 to 85% and temperature variation:
less than 2°C per hour.
Use ion-exchange water (pure water) at water temperature 5 to 25°C. If used outside the specified
range, analysis performance by the analyzer may not be guaranteed.
10. CRT monitor, keyboard and mouse
Do not handle a CRT monitor, keyboard and mouse by hand wet with water or reagents to prevent
failure.
11. Points to check when analyzing
As for the points to check when analyzing, follow your company's operating standards.
Check the following points at least:
· quality of pure water
· remaining amount of reagents and wash solutions
· calibration results
· accuracy control data
· analysis results
· that there is no leakage in pipettes (SPT and RPT) or piping system
· that there is no dust, fibrin or foam within samples.
· that there is enough amount of samples required for analysis
0-5
FOREWORDS
12. Maintenance checks and periodical parts replacement

(1) As for maintenance checks and periodical parts replacement, follow the instructions stated in this
manual.
(2) After replacing main parts of the analyzer including a halogen lamp, probes, syringes, cuvettes,
etc., make sure to calibrate them.
(3) Use consumables and replacement parts we recommend. Use of non-recommended consumables
or parts may adversely affect the performance and safety of the analyzer.
Parts such as nozzle, cuvette, syringe tip, wipe tip, mesh filter, electrode of ISE, diaphragm pump,
micro syringe, electromagnetic valve, waste line tube and etc. that have been replaced may be
infected. When they are discarded after exchanging, refer to the relevant manufacturers and
suppliers and follow your company’s or national regulation for disposal substances and dispose
them appropriately.
13. Backup of data
Please back up parameters and analysis result data, etc. stored in hard disc periodically, so that data
recovery can be provided in unexpected events including failure of the equipment or power
interruption.
When you use external devices, please confirm that those devices are Virus Free.
14. Prohibition of use for purposes other than those intended
Do not use the analyzer for purposes other than those intended.
15. Cleaning of covers, etc.
When covers, worktable, CRT monitor, etc. get dirty, wipe and clean them with a dry cloth, etc.
16. Other cautions
If accidentally any reagent or sample contacts mucous, or if any reagent or sample is swallowed,
immediately consult a physician for the instructions.
17. In the event of trouble, do not play with the analyzer and leave repair work to authorized experts.
0-6
FOREWORDS
General Precautions for Use of Medical Electrical Equipment

(for Safety and Prevention of Danger)
The followings are general precautions for use of medical electrical equipments.
As for precautions unique to each equipment, please read its operation manual for full understanding and do not
do wrong handling.
1. Only qualified personnel shall use the analyzer.

2. The following precautions shall be taken when the analyzer is installed.
(1) Keep the analyzer away from rain or any other water.
(2) Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity,
ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt or sulfur, etc.
(3) Do not expose the analyzer to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during transportation),
etc. and pay attention to the state of safety.
(4) Do not install the analyzer in a place adjacent to a storage room of chemicals or a place where any
gas is likely to be generated.
(5) Pay attention to frequency, voltage and permissible current (or power consumption).
(6) Confirm the conditions of battery power source (state of discharge, polarity, etc.).
(7) Make sure that the analyzer is correctly and well grounded.
(8) Secure the space (minimum 300mm) at the left side of analyzer in order to be easily taken
power-off the analyzer at emergency situation.
3. The following precautions shall be taken before using the analyzer.
(1) Confirm that the analyzer operates correctly by checking contact status of switches, polarity, dial
setting, meters, etc.
(2) Make sure that the analyzer is correctly and completely grounded.
(3) Make sure that all necessary electrical cables are correctly and completely connected.
(4) Special care shall be taken not to result in misdiagnosis or any danger to analyzer or human body
when the analyzer is used in conjunction with other equipment.
(5) Check battery power source.
4. The following precautions shall be taken during operation.
(1) Pay attention not to exceed time and volume required for diagnosis and treatment.
(2) Keep monitoring the behavior of whole system in order to detect any malfunction.
(3) Take immediate corrective measures including shutdown of operation when any malfunction is
detected in the analyzer.
(4) Avoid any possibilities of direct access from patients.
0-7
FOREWORDS
5. The following precautions shall be taken after use of the analyzer.

(1) Turn off the power after every operational switch and control is restored to its pre-use state as
directed.
(2) Do not remove the line cord plugs from receptacles by cords not to give undue stress to cords.
(3) Storage areas:
· Keep away from rain or any other water splash.
· Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity,
ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt or sulfur, etc.
· Do not expose the analyzer to inclination, vibration and shock (including shock during
transportation), etc. and pay attention to the state of safety.
· Do not store the analyzer at a place adjacent to the storage room of chemicals or a place
where any gas is likely to be generated.
(4) Organize and store the accessory parts and cords after they have been cleaned.
(5) Keep the analyzer clean not to cause any inconvenience to the next use.
6. In the event of trouble, do not play with the analyzer and leave repair work to authorized experts.
7. Do not refurbish the analyzer.
8. Conduct maintenance checks correctly.
(1) Make sure to conduct periodic checks on the analyzer and its associated parts.
(2) Make sure to check that the analyzer operates normally and safely when it is reused after being
kept unused for some time.
9. The following precautions shall be taken when the cleaning procedure will be performed.
(1) Appropriate decontaminations is carried out if hazardous meterial is split onto or into the analyzer.
(2) No decontamination or cleaning agents are used which could cause a HAZARD as a result of a
reaction with parts of the analyzer or with material contained in it.
(3) Our agent is consulted if there is any doubt about the compatibility of decontamination or cleaning
agents with parts of the analyzer or with material contained in it.
10. When you discard the analyzer from the field, you should consult our agents in advance.
0-8
FOREWORDS
3. Installation Environment
The analyzer is required to be installed under the environmental conditions that will not adversely affect its
operation or analysis. Qualified service engineer of our servicing division shall carry installation work out
(unpacking, installation, operation check).
Installation environmental conditions
The analyzer shall be installed:
(1) in a place that is not subject to direct sunlight.
(2) in a place that is not exposed to direct wind, rain or any other water. (The analyzer shall be installed
indoors.)
(3) in a dustless place.
(4) in a place that is not subject to vibration or sound.
(5) in not inclined but horizontal place (slope: 1/200 or less).
(6) on a floor that is strong enough to support the weight of the whole analyzer system (about 150 kg).
(7) in a place that is not subject to voltage variation (less than ±10%).
(8) not near noise sources (facility or equipment). Avoid placing the analyzer right under the fluorescent
light.
(9) at the height of 2,000 meters above sea-level or lower. (Use the analyzer only indoors.)
Temperature/humidity conditions
(1) Indoor temperature: 15 to 30°C, Temperature variation: less than 2°C per hour
(2) Indoor humidity: 45 to 85% (No condensation shall be formed.)
(3) Install the analyzer in a place with good ventilation or with ventilation system.
(4) Do not install the analyzer in a place subject to direct wind from the air conditioning.
Space
Refer to the figure below for space required for installation including space for maintenance and for exhaust
ventilation.
Secure the space (minimum 300mm) at the left side of analyzer in order to easily power off the analyzer at
emergency situation.
<space for exhaust 150 and up
300 PC 300 300

Main 690
and up Control and up and up
Unit
1340
600 970
500 and up
Front
(Unit: mm)
2470
0-9
FOREWORDS
Power supply and grounding

Install a 3-pronged power outlet with a ground terminal (A-Type, S-Type or O-Type) within the reach of the
analyzer's accessory power cable (2 m). Ground resistance shall be less than 100W.
Refer power outlet installation to qualified personnel only.
3-Pronged Power
Outlet
Cable Plug
Ground Ground Terminal
Water supply and drainage

As for connection part for water supply and drainage, there are 8 types of tube connections on the right side of
the analyzer. Refer to the table below for details.
Type of Water supply and drainage Type of connection tube Remarks

Pressure-resistant hose
Pure water supply
Inside diameter: 12mm Main analyzer - Purified water generator
Outside diameter: 18mm
P.V.C tube (R-3603)
Main analyzer - Wash Solution Tank 1
Wash solution 1 supply Inside diameter: 1.59mm
(with tube (1m), inline filter and pipe)
Outside diameter: 4.76mm
P.V.C tube (R-3603)
Main analyzer - Wash Solution Tank 2
Wash solution 2 supply Inside diameter: 1.59mm
(with tube (1m), inline filter and pipe)
Outside diameter: 4.76mm
Silicon tube
ISE - High-concentrated wastewater tank
ISE high-concentrated wastewater Inside diameter: 3mm
(length:1m)
Outside diameter: 7mm
Main analyzer - High-concentrated
WU high-concentrated wastewater
Pressure-resistant hose wastewater tank (length:1m)
WU low-concentrated wastewater Inside diameter: 15mm
Main analyzer - Low-concentrated
Trough low-concentrated wastewater Outside diameter: 22mm
wastewater drainage system
Overflow
Before installation of the analyzer, it is required to install a pure water supply system and a low-concentrated
wastewater drainage system. As for high-concentrated wastewater, place a high-concentrated wastewater tank
close to the main analyzer. Before this tank becomes full, dispose of high-concentrated wastewater being stored
in this tank in accordance with the specified wastewater standards.
Please wash Wash Solution Tank 1 and Wash Solution Tank 2 enough with pure water before use.
* Disposal limit of this high-concentrated wastewater tank is approx. 7 hours at the use of 5L tank.
0-10
FOREWORDS
(1) Water supply system (purified water generator)

· Water pressure: 0.15 to 0.34 MPa
· Capacity: the Equipment that has ability of 18 L per hour or more
· Connection tube: Pressure-resistant hose (Inside diameter: 12mm, Outside diameter: 18mm)
Caution
Water pressure for the water supply system is required 0.15 to 0.34 MPa.
(2) Drainage system

· Capacity: 18 L per hour
· Position: Drainage system shall be at a position that is 500mm or more lower than the wastewater
outlet of the main analyzer.
Main Analyzer
500 and up
Installation Table
Wastewater outlet
· Lay the exhaust hose in the wastewater outlet so that the wastewater is drained by a natural drop.
· Open the end of the exhaust hose to the atmosphere. (Do not soak it in the liquid.)
0-11
FOREWORDS
4. Warning Labels
Main meaning of warning labels
The following labels that show warning and attention are affixed on the places that are potentially hazardous.
Biohazard
Electric shock
High temperature
Injury
Action to be taken as directed by the “OPERATOR’S

MANUAL”
0-12
FOREWORDS
Warning labels
The following warning labels are affixed on the main places that are hazardous within the analyzer.
WARNING LABEL WARNING ABOUT PLACE
Risk of electric shock Power supply inlet
Covers of SPT,
Do not touch moving
RPT1, RPT2, MIX1,
parts
MIX2 and WU
Mosaic plate (Mosaic

CONTAINS 1),
HAZARDOUS SWU cover and
MATERIALS Panel in lower
(SERUM, PLASMA right-hand of the
OR URINE) main analyzer (Side
Panel RD)
Lid for replacing
halogen lamps, lid of
RISK OF INJURY
ISE tank, lid for
replacing ISE
TURN THE POWER
electrodes, lid for
OFF BEFORE THE
replacing cuvettes and
PANEL OPEN
Mentenance cover
1/R1/R2
HOT SURFACE DTR
IRU heat insulation

Work according to the
place, lid for ASP, lid
instruction of the
for RCU and input
operation manual.
line for purified water
CLASS 1 LEASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION – CLASS 2 LASER LIGHT WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM CAUTION-CLASS 2 Barcord reader of
650nm, 1mW LEASER LIGHT ASP and RCU
(IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001)
WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE
INTO THE BEAM
0-13
FOREWORDS
5. Technical Specification
1. Kind of device CA-400
2. Usage General chemistry as photometric assay
Immunology as photometric assay (Latex reagent available)
3. Assay type 1 point end, 2 point end, 1 point rate, 2 point rate
4. Type of calibration Factor, Linear, Loglogit, Exponential, Spline
5. Throughput 400 tests per hour
6. Incubation time One reagent assay: 10 minutes (R1)
Two reagent assay: 5 minutes for R1 + 5 minutes for R2
(The samples for which the methods of the One reagent assay are used
and the samples for which the methods of the Two reagent assay are used
can be set at the same time.)
7. Sample type Serum, Plasma and Urine
8. Number of simultaneous 60 methods (Max.) + Electrolyte: 3 methods
measurement *Electrolyte (ISE Unit) is optional
9. Components
(1) Main Analyzer CHS (Chassis Unit)
IRU (Incubation Reaction Unit)
ASP (Auto Sampler Unit)
RCU (Reagent Container Unit)
RPT (Reagent Pipette Unit)
SPT (Sample Pipette Unit)
RPP (Reagent Pump Unit)
SPP (Sample Pump Unit)
WPP (Wash Pump Unit)
DTR (Detector Unit)
MIX (Mixing Stirrer Unit)
SWU (Supply Water Unit)
WU (Wash Unit)
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
CNT (Control Unit)
ISE (Ion Selective Electrode Measurement Unit)
TR (Trough)
STK (Subtank)
0-14
FOREWORDS
9-1 IRU (Incubation Reaction Unit)

Heating method: Direct heat with silicon-rubber heater (The heat block made of aluminum
in IRU is heated.)
Heating range: 37 ± 0.3°C
9-2 Cuvette
Material: PYREX
Size: 8mm(W) × 6.23mm(D) × 30mm(H)
Light length: 6mm (Calibrated to 10mm by the calculation.)
Quantity: 90
Minimum volume: 150ml
Maximum volume: 450ml
9-3 ASP (Auto Sampler Unit)

Tube: Diameter:13 to 16mm, Length: 75 to 100mm
Turn table: Detachable type
Number of tubes: Maximum 92
(Normal / Emergency samples : 36 tubes on the outer circumference + 36
tubes on the middle circumference
Standard samples / ISE cleaning: + 20 sample cups on the inner
circumference)
Cooling method: Cooling with peltier modules (*Optional, cooling only the tubes on the
inner circumference.)
9-4 SPT(Sample Pipette Unit) / SPP(Sampling Pump Unit)

Number of pipettes: 1
Pump type: Syringe pump
Liquid level detection: Micropipette with a liquid level sensor by sensing a change of
capacitance
Sampling volume: 2 to 35ml (0.1ml / step), ISE: 100ml
9-5 RCU (Reagent Container Unit)

Turn table: Detachable type
Number of bottles: Maximum 60 (30 bottles for 100 / 70 / 50 / 40 mL types in total and 30
bottles for 20ml types)
Cooling method: Cooling with peltier modules
Cooling range 8 to 15°C
0-15
FOREWORDS
9-6 RPT1/2 (Reagent Pipette Unit) / RPP1/2(Reagent Pump Unit)

Number of pipettes: 1 per each unit
Pump type: Syringe pump
Liquid level detection: Micropipette with a liquid level sensor by sensing a change of
capacitance
Sampling volume: RPT1 / RPP1: 20 to 350ml (1ml / step)
RPT2 / RPP2: 20 to 250ml (1ml / step)
9-7 DTR (Detector Unit)

Method: Measurement of absorbance (1 or 2 wavelength measurement)
Selectable wavelength: 12 wavelengths
(340, 380, 415, 450, 510, 546, 570, 600, 660, 700, 750, 800nm)
Wavelength selection: Grating method
Light source: Tungsten halogen lamp
Cooling for light source Air-cooled by fan
9-8 MIX1/2 (Mixing Stirrer Unit)

Stirring mechanism: Stirrer (stirring bar) driven by a stepping motor (5 speed)
9-9 SWU (Supply Water Unit)

WU wastewater: 8 diaphragm pumps
Trough wastewater: Free fall
Trough pure water supply : 5 diaphragm pumps (one per trough / RPT1, RPT2, SPT, MIX1 and
MIX2)
9-10 PT Trough 3 PT Troughs (SRT Trough, RPT1 Trough, PRT2 Trough)

Mix Trough 2 Mix Troughs (Mix-1 Trough, Mix-2 Trough)
Trough chamber 1 Trough chamber
9-11 Subtank
(with Water level detector)
Subtank R 1 Subtank
Subtank L 1 Subtank
9-12 WPP (Water Pump Unit)

Wash solution supply for 6 syringe pumps
cuvette cleaning:
0-16
FOREWORDS
9-13 WU (Wash Unit)

Cleaning mechanism: 8 step cleaning
1st step: Drainage + Wash solution supply
2nd step: Drainage + pure water supply
3rd step: Drainage + Wash solution supply
4th step: Drainage + pure water supply
7th step: Drainage
8th step: Drainage (Remove remaining liquid by using a wipe tip)
9-14 Power Supply Unit

Power requirements: 100 to 120VAC, 9A(Max) / 200 to 240VAC, 4.5A(Max), 50/60Hz
Power consumption: 900VA (Max.)
Permissible voltage ±10% (Max.)
variation:
10. Other Functions - Auto start / shutoff,

- Emergency sample insertion
- Automatic sample dilution
- Water blank measurement
- Reagent blank measurement
- Test selection by profile
- Host communication by RS232C with Operational PC.
11. Environment (under operation)

Temperature: 15 to 30°C, 2°C / hour, (Storage / Transport: -10 to +50°C)
Humidity: 45 to 85% (No dew condensation allowed.), (Storage / Transport: 45 to
85%)
Pressure: 800 to 1060 hPa, (Storage / Transport: 500 to 1060 hPa)
12. Dimension
Outside diminution 970mm(W) × 690mm(D) × 582mm(H) (The height of the rubber pad is
(Main analyzer): not included.)
Weight 150 kg (Max.)
(Main analyzer):
0-17
FOREWORDS
13. Connectors to main analyzer

1) Electrical connectors
- Power connector
- RJ-45 modular jack (for connection between main analyzer and
operational PC)
- D-sub receptacle (for connection between main analyzer and optional
external tank rack)
2) Piping Connectors for supply / drainage
- Pure water
- WU high conc. wastewater (output)
- ISE high conc. wastewater (output)
- WU low conc. wastewater (output)
- Trough low conc. wastewater (output)
- Overflow line
- Wash solution 1
- Wash solution 2
14. Maximum sound level 75dB (at the location 1m or longer distant from the main analyzer with
its hatch closed.)
15. Transient overvoltage Overvoltage category II
16. Rated pollution degree Pollution degree 2
0-18
FOREWORDS
17. The rating and characteristics of fuses
TYPE SIZE RATING CHARACTERISTICS LOCATION AND PART NO.

Glass tube fuse 5 × 20 2A / 250V Slo-Blo PCB:25P3503
mm (ASP_DRV) F1
mm (RCU_DRV) F1
mm (ASP_DRV) F2
PCB:25P3506
(SWU_DRV) F1
Glass tube fuse 3AG 10A / 250V Fast-Acting PCB:25P3502

(RCU_DRV) F2,F3,F4,F5
PCB:25P3505
(SWU_DRV2) F1
PCB:25P3509
(IRU_DRV) F1
Glass tube fuse 3AG 4A / 250V Slo-Blo PCB:25P3507

(SWU_DRV3) F1
Ceramic tube fuse 3AB 10A / 250V Slo-Blo Fuse Holder
(AC input) F1 & F2
0-19
FOREWORDS
6. System Configuration
High Con.
Wastewater
Tank
Printer
Low Con.
Main Overflow Wastewater Outlet
Analyzer
XP PC
Purified water
generator
Wash Wash
AC Power Outlet Sol.1 Sol.2
Note: Standard supplies are illustrated in full line.
10
1
2
9
3
4
5 6 7 8
Right side of Main Analyzer
No. Use Note

1 Output line for high conc. wastewater for WU (Pressure-resistant hose. See Page 0-10.) standard
preparation
2 Output line for low conc. wastewater for WU (Pressure-resistant hose. See Page 0-10.)
by customer
preparation
3 Output line for low conc. wastewater for troughs (Pressure-resistant hose. See Page 0-10.)
by customer
4 Output line for high conc. wastewater for ISE (Silicon tube. See Page 0-10.) standard
5 Input line for wash solution 2 (P.V.C tube. See Page 0-10.) standard
6 Input line for wash solution 1 (P.V.C tube. See Page 0-10.) standard
preparation
7 Input line for pure water (Pressure-resistant hose. See Page 0-10.)
by customer
preparation
8 Output line for overflowing (Pressure-resistant hose. See Page 0-10.)
by customer
9 Connecter for external tank rack cable Option
10 Hose clamp standard
0-20
FOREWORDS
4
No. Use
1 Power cable
2 Fuses
3
3 Power switch
4 LAN connecter and cable for PC
2
Left side of Main Analyzer
7. Component List
Please check a component list.
NO. EQUIPMENT MODEL/STANDARD QTY REMARKS
1 Clinical Chemistry CA-400 1 -

Analyzer
2 Power Cable 25AZ-X-6001(25S1031) 1 For Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Between PC and Chlinical
3 LAN Cable Assy. 25AP-X-6001 1
Chemistry Analyzer
4 Operator’s Manual OM-E7219 1 -
Refer to the Standard Accessories
5 Accessories - 1 set
List.
-
6 Spare parts Ceramic Tube Fuse 326 010 : 2 1 set
Glass Tube Fuse 218 002 :1
0-21
FOREWORDS
STANDARD ACCESSORIES LIST
Please check an accessories list.
Part
NAME TYPE QTY REMARKS
co de #
Syringe Tip Insertion
- 25-012-4101 1 For exchange of syringe tip
Tool
- Screw Driver No. 123-S75 1 -
1.5 mm
- Hexagonal Wrench 1 -
3.0 mm
- Hose Clamp 2269-08 1 -
For Tank 1
Plastic Tube P.V.C tube 1.59 mm (Inside) × 4.76
- 25-023-4011 1 mm (Outside): 1m
Wash Solution -1 Inline filter: 1
Pipe: 1
For Tank 2
Plastic Tube P.V.C tube 1.59 mm (Inside) × 4.76
- 25-023-4012 1 mm (Outside): 1m
Wash Solution -2 Inline filter
Pipe: 1
Plastic Tube High
- 15 x 22 1m Line for high conc. waste water
Conc. Waste
Furuno Clean No. 3
- Wash Solution No. 3 1 x 200
(500g)
Furuno Clean No. 9
- Wash Solution No. 9 1 x 200
(500g)
- Wash Solution C-1 Furuno Clean C-1 (500g) 1 x 100
5L Wash Solution
- 25AZ-X-4951 1 For Wash Solution No. 3
Tank 1
5L Wash Solution
- 25AZ-X-4952 1 For Wash Solution No. 9
Tank 2
- Mix Arm Cover 25-023-1911 2 -
- Pipette Arm Cover 25-023-2012 3 -
- Sample Tray Assy 25AZ-X-4307 1 -
- Inner Sample Tray 25-023-2353 1 -
- ASP Lid Assy. 25AZ-X-4314 1 -
- Reagent Bottle Tray 25-034-2451 1 -
- RCU Lid 25AZ-X-4416 1 -
0-22
FOREWORDS
8. Software Operating Environment

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS
OS Window XP Professional version + Multi-language (option)

CPU Type: Intel CPU
Operating frequency: 1GHz or more
Memory English 256 Mbytes（Other 512Mbytes) or more
VGA 1024*768 or more
Hard Disc 2GB or more ,Capacity before analyzer installation
Serial Port RS232C (used only when using ASTM)
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
Sound Function Sound function + speaker (when using alarm sounds)
CDROM Used at the time of analyzer installation

Operating mode can be designated by software.
(1) Page Printer
Printer A page printer with the driver corresponding to XP
(2) Line Printer
Fujitsu M33051, only English and Japanese modes are available.
Modem (Optional) Windows Dial-up connection
Backup System CD-R, MO, ZIP, Flash Memory, etc.*１

Others Keyboard, mouse, and PS2 compatible BCR
*1 : The device which OS file recognizes as file system. This can be connected to USB, IEEE1394.
*2 : When you use external devices, please confirm that those devices are Virus Free.
*3 : This operating PC shall not be used with applications of other companies, since it is not guaranteed.
List of installed software in PC

Program
Program No. Use
Name
UI Main 25504631XX This program is for handling of user interface.
UI UC 25503291XX This program is for handling of communication between PC and main unit.
UI PRT 25504741XX This software is for live printing.
UI LIS 25503311XX This software is for handling of communication between host.
XX shows the software version number.
List of installed software in Main unit

Program
Program No. Use
Name
Unit Main 25504221XX This program is for handling of machinery unit (main unit).
Uinit LIQ 25503041XX This program is for handling of liquid level detection.
Unit DTR 25503031XX This software controls the DTR.
Unit SPT 25504431XX This software controls the SPT.
XX shows the software version number.
Note: Version number of each program can be verified by opening the tab menu [Version] under the job menu
[System (F9)].
0-23
FOREWORDS
9. Handling of barcode reader

(1) Specifications
- Class2 laser product
- Emitted wavelength: 650nm
- Maximum output: 1.0mW
(2) Safety Precautions

- Do not stare beam light.
- Do not ray the laser beam to human body for a long time.
- Do not disassemble the unit.
- Do not remove the cover. Adjustment of BCR is carried out by a service engineer.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments, or the performance of procedures other then those specified
herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Laser beam is rayed out from each BCR unit to the arrow direction while analyzer is operating. (See below.)
RCU ASP
0-24
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 General
This Fully Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer is a middle-sized automated biochemical analyzer,
which is capable of performing 400 tests per hour. This analyzer is operated by an external operational PC
and measurement results can be printed out from a printer.
This analyzer may be connected to a host computer, when needed (ASTM Protocol capable).
Ninety cuvettes, where the samples are reacted with reagents, are located on the Incubation Reaction Unit
(IRU), the inside of which is kept at 37°C constantly. Cuvettes are cleaned by the cleaning mechanism of the
analyzer after each use for the next use.
The absorbance of the content of each cuvette on the Incubation Reaction Unit (IRU) is measured every 9
seconds by the Detector Unit (DTR) after the sample fully mixed with a reagent. Wavelength(s) (to a
maximum of 2 wavelengths) used for a measurement can be chosen from 12 pre-specified wavelengths.
Samples [including standard samples and quality control samples (QC samples)] are placed on the
removable ASP tray. The ASP tray can accommodate maximum of 72 tube-holders and 20 cup-holders.
Cup holders are located in the center of the ASP and can keep samples cold, which are exclusively used
for standard samples and QC samples (control samples). They cannot be used for normal samples. Barcode
labels can be affixed to the sample tubes so that the analyzer can identify the contents by using the barcode
reader.
Reagents are mounted on the removable RCU tray. Maximum of 60 reagent bottles can be mounted.
Barcode labels can be affixed to the reagent bottles so that the analyzer can identify the contents by using the
barcode reader (optional). The RCU has a cooling function to keep a constant temperature.
LAN Cable
RS232C
Main Analyzer
PC
Host Computer
Operational PC
Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Equipment Layout
Figure 1.1-1
Refer to Figure 1.1-2 for the appearance of the main analyzer (control section).
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 General
1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
Appearance of Main Analyzer (Control Section)

Figure 1.1-2
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 General
1-2
Chapter 1 Overview
Viewed from the front
Viewed from the Rear

Perspective View of Main Analyzer (Control Section)
Figure 1.1-
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 General
1-3
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 Built-In Unit
The main analyzer consists of various built-in units as shown below.
RPT2 MIX2 IRU WU
RCU RPT1 MIX1 ASP SPT
DTR MIX2 RPT2 RPT1

Trough Trough Trough
SPT MIX1 ISE

Trough Trough
Built-In Units 1/2

Figure 1.2-1
1.2 Built-in Unit
1-4
Chapter 1 Overview
Sub-Tank L RPP2 RPP1 SWU3
WPP
SPP (Washing)
SPP (Sample)
SWU2
Sub-Tank R
SWU1 (Inside)
Built-In Units
Figure 1.2-2
1.2 Built-in Unit
1-5
Chapter 1 Overview
Major functions of each unit are summarized in the table below.
Major Functions of Each Unit

Unit
Major Functions
(Abbreviation)
IRU Incubation Reaction Unit:
The cuvette table (turntable) of the IRU holds 90 cuvettes. It rotates and brings the
designated cuvettes to where samples/reagents are dispensed by the SPT/RPT.
DTR DeTectoR unit:

The DTR measures the absorbance of reaction liquids during reaction (mixing and
incubation) process in cuvettes. This disperses the light from the halogen lamp as a source of
light with a grading method and measures 12 wavelengths at one time.
SPT Sample PipeTte unit:

The SPT aspirates the sample from the Auto SamPler unit (ASP) by using the SPP and
dispenses it into a cuvette (in IRU) and/or into the ISE. Each nozzle is cleaned in the SPT
TRough after use.
RPT Reagent PipeTte unit:

The RPT aspirates a reagent from a reagent bottle (in RCU) by using the RPP, then
dispenses it into a cuvette (in IRU). The RPT consists of the RPT1 for the reagent #1 and the
RPT2 for the regent #2. Each nozzle is cleaned in the RPT Trough after use.
MIX MIXing stirrer unit:

After a sample and a reagent are dispensed into a cuvette, the MIX brings down the
paddle-type stirrer and stirs the mixture in the cuvette by rotating the stirrer to react the
sample with the reagent evenly. This unit consists of the MIX 1 for the reagent #1 and MIX2
for the reagent #2. The stirrer is cleaned with pure water after every use.
WU Wash Unit:
The WU consists of six supply/drain nozzle pairs, one drain nozzle and one wipe tip. This
unit drains the reaction liquid out of each cuvette after the completion of measurement and
cleans the inner surface of each cuvette by pouring wash solution or pure water into the
cuvette.
ASP Auto SamPler unit: *Barcode Reader and Cooling Function are optional.
The ASP holds 72 tubes of samples (normal samples and emergency samples), and 20
sample cups (standard samples and the ISE wash solution) and brings the required sample to
the SPT pipetting position by rotating its turntable.
RCU Reagent Container Unit: *Barcode Reader is optional.

The RCU holds maximum of 60 reagent bottles in the reagent tray and brings the required
reagent to the RPT pipetting position.
SPP Sampling PumP unit:

The SPP aspirates/dispenses both samples and pure water by moving its plungers up and
down. Since the sample syringe and the cleaning syringe have separate motors, they can
operate independently.
1.2 Built-in Unit
1-6
Chapter 1 Overview
Unit
Major Functions
(Abbreviation)
RPP Reagent PumP unit:
The RPP aspirates/dispenses both reagents and pure water by moving its plungers up and
down. This unit consists of the RPP1 for the reagent #1 and the RPP2 for the regent #2. Since
the reagent syringe and the cleaning syringe have separate motors, they can operate
independently.
WPP Wash PumP unit:

The WPP (consists of six pumps which) aspirate/dispense wash solution or pure water by
moving its plungers up and down, which are connected to the nozzles of the WU (Cuvette
Wash Unit). This unit supplies wash solution or pure water to WU1 and WU3, and supplies
pure water to WU2, WU4, WU5 and WU6.
SWU Supply Water Unit:

The SWU consists of SWU1, SWU2 and SWU3.
This unit
- controls pure water supply from the purified water generator to the subtanks R/L
(SWU1-1),
- supplies pure water from the sub-tank R to the SPT Trough and the MIX1 and 2 Troughs
(SWU2),
- supplies pure water from the sub-tank L to the RPT1 and 2 Troughs (SWU3),
- drains wastewater from the WU (SWU1-2).
TR TRough unit:
The TR (Wash Station) consists of 5 troughs and one trough chamber.
This unit collects wastewater in the nozzles of the SPT and the RPT-1 and 2, and cleans the
external surfaces of these nozzles of the SPT and the RPT-1 and 2 and also cleans the stirrers
of the MIX-1 and 2 with pure water, then collects the wastewater after cleaning.
ST SubTank:
The ST consists of the sub-tanks R and L. These tanks store pure water, which will be
supplied to the SPP, the WPP and the RPP-1 and 2, and each trough for the SPT, the MIX-1
and 2, and the RPT-1 and 2.
ISE Ion Selectable Electrode unit:*Optional

The ISE determines the concentration of the electrolytes (sodium, potassium and chloride)
contained in serum, plasma and urine by using ion electrodes.
- Chassis Unit (Enclosure):

This Chassis Unit houses the above-mentioned units, and the PC boards and the power
supply unit that are not installed in these units, and protects them from damage using covers.
This unit also has functions such as cooling, dust-proof etc. using fans and filters.
- External tanks and external tank sensors:*Optional

External tanks supply wash solutions that are used by the analyzer and store the
wastewater discharged from the analyzer. The external tank sensor(s) monitor the amount of
liquid in each tank. (Optional)
1.2 Built-in Unit
1-7
Chapter 1 Overview
THIS PAGE IS
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK.
1.2 Built-in Unit
1-8
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3 Measurement Flow

1.3.1 Normal Measurement
Test selection(s) and calibration curve(s), which are required for the measurement, must already exist, or
required amount of calibrators necessary to find calibration curves must be set at the starting position of the
ASP in advance.
A) Reagent Control (RCU Scan)
When you execute the “RCU Scan”, the tray in the RCU unit goes into a 360-degree roll. During this
movement, the barcode reader reads the barcodes on the reagent bottles in the tray. Based on these barcode
records, the reagent information is controlled. This “RCU Scan” needs to be performed prior to pressing
the [F1] key for Measurement Start.
B) Preparatory Operation
When you press the [F1] key for Measurement Start, the following preparatory operations will be
performed.
(1) Each unit is initialized.
(2) The SPP, RPP-1 and 2 are primed. The ISE is also primed.
(3) Water blank measurement is performed for the cuvette (Cuvette #6), which will be used at first.
(4) The ASP turns around and barcode of the sample to be measured is read. Then, an inquiry to the PC
regarding the measurement schedule (Test Selection) is performed.
C) Reagent No. 1 Measurement
As long as there is no lack of the reagents (R1 and R2), pure water, wash solution and diluent, the
following processes are performed.
(1) Reagent No. 1 (R1) Dispensing
Reagent No.1 Pipette (RPT-1) aspirates the Reagent No.1 on the RCU and dispenses it into
cuvette on the IRU. The IRU and the RCU rotate individually and move to the positions where
the reagent is aspirated/dispensed.
(2) Sample Dispensing
The Sample Pipette (SPT) aspirates the sample in the ASP and dispenses it into the cuvette in
the IRU in which the R1 reagent is already dispensed. The ASP and the IRU rotate individually
and move to the position where the sample is aspirated/dispensed.
(3) Stirring
The R1 reagent and the sample dispensed in the cuvette in the IRU are stirred thoroughly by the
stirrer (MIX-1). The IRU rotates and brings the cuvette to the stirring position of the MIX-1.
(4) Photometry (1-34)
The absorbance of the thoroughly stirred mixture of Reagent No.1 and the sample in the
cuvette is measured by the DTR every 9 seconds and up to 34 times. The results of measurement
are collected as R1 Time Course Data.

1-9
Chapter 1 Overview
D) Reagent No. 2 Measurement

(1) Reagent No. 2 (R2) Dispensing
The Reagent No.2 Pipette (RPT-2) aspirates the Reagent No.2 in the RCU and dispenses it into
the cuvette (where the Reagent No.1 and the sample have already been dispensed). The IRU and
the RCU rotate individually and move to the position where each reagent is aspirated/dispensed.
(2) Stirring
The R2 reagent and the sample dispensed in the cuvette on the IRU are stirred thoroughly by
the stirrer (MIX-2). The IRU rotates and brings the cuvette to the stirring position of the MIX-2.
(3) Phometry (35 – 68)
The absorbance of the thoroughly stirred mixture of Reagent No.1, Reagent No.2 and the
sample in the cuvette is measured by the DTR every 9 seconds and up to 34 times. The results of
measurement are collected as R2 Time Course Data.
E) Cleaning
After the measurement of the R2 Time Course is complete, the mixture in the cuvette is discharged at the
WU unit. The used cuvette is cleaned with wash solution and pure water, then used for the next
measurement.

1-10
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.2 Sample Dilution

High concentrated sample that is beyond the measurement range is diluted prior to the measurement. The
quantity of the sample that will be diluted, the quantity of diluent and the sample to be diluted shall comply
with the contents specified by the Chemistry Parameters. The measurement results are output using the
concentration corrected by dilution proportion.
1.3.3 Reagent Blank Measurement

This is to measure the absorbance of the cuvette with a dispensed reagent. There are four types of
Reagent Blank Measurements as follows,
(1) R1
(2) R1+ R2
(3) R1+ Water
(4) R1+ R2 + Water
Measurement conditions such as dispensing quantity, number of the measurements (one chosen from
Single, Duplicate and Triplicate) and measurements with or without water (equivalent to sample), are
determined by the Chemistry Parameters. Adjustment by the reagent blank value allows you to obtain
higher accurate results of the absorbance measurement.
1.3.4 Water Blank Measurement

“Water blank Measurement” is defined as an absorbance measurement for the cuvette with dispensed
water. This measurement is inevitably performed for each cuvette that is used for sample measurement.
The purpose of this measurement is to adjust the differences among cuvettes. The measurement results are
also used to evaluate the condition of the cuvettes’ contamination. The measurement results of the water
blank can be referred in the tab menu [Mainte (F10)] – [W Blank].
1.3.5 ISE Measurement

The ISE unit measures the concentration of sodium (Na), potassium (K) and chloride (CI) contained in
serum, plasma, urine etc. by using ion electrodes. Urine must be diluted ten times before measurement.
The code number and name of the diluent need to be registered on the tab menu [System (F9)] –
[Reagent] prior to measurement.
The ISE measurement of the sample is executed by conducting test selection setting on the tab menu
[RUN (F5)] – [Selection].
The ISE prime, the ISE cleaning and the ISE calibration can be executed on the tab menu [Mainte (F10)]
– [Sequence].

1.3.2 Sample Dilution /1.3.3 Reagent Blank Measurement /
1.3.4 Water Blank Measurement / 1.3.5 ISE Measurement
1-11
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4 Operation Basics

1.4.1 Analysis Specifications
Items Specifications
Up to 240 methods (Common: 60, Serum: 60, Plasma: 60, Urine:
Number of analysis methods
60)
50 steps
Normal range
6 types = gender (2 kinds) x age (3 generations), others: 44 types
Multi standard Capable of 10 set definition
Control sample Capable of registration of 40 types (samples)
Profile Capable of 20 type definition
Method to method calculation Capable of 40 type definition

Normal sample: Up to 1,000 samples
Test selection
Emergency sample: Up to 100 samples
Reagent registration Up to 200 types
Number of controllable reagent bottles Up to 800 bottles (10 trays)

Sample measurement results: 1,000,000 tests
Sample time course: 60,000 tests
Measurement results
Calibration results: 25,000 tests
Calibration time course: 6,000 tests
Calibration curve Number of methods x 2 (Old and New): 480 curves
QC measurement results Up to 50,000 tests (approximately for one year)
Number of identifiable patients 30,000 patients
Number of maximum rounds per day. 99 rounds per day

1.4.1 Analysis Specifications
1-12
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.2 Sample Identification Code

All samples placed in the ASP have been assigned identification codes as shown in the table below.
These identification codes (SID) are printed on the barcode labels attached to the samples.
*General Identification Code: Identification code (SID) with additional information of measurement
numbers, which will be displayed in the SID section of the Run Monitor screen and the Result Search
screen.
Identification General
Digit
Type of sample code identification code Details
number
(SID) (Refer to above *)
xxxxxxxxxxxx: Sample
Normal sample xxxxxxxxxxxx 3 - 12 Nxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 identification code
nn: Number of measurement
xxxxxxxxxxxx: Sample
On line sample xxxxxxxxxxxx 3 - 12 Oxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 identification code
xxxx: Sample identification code
Pediatric sample 8999xxxx 8 n8999xxxxnn1
xxx: Sample identification code
Emergency sample 99000xxx 8 E99000xxxnn1
Pediatric emergency xx : Sample identification code
990009xx 8 e990009xxnn1
sample nn : Number of measurement
xx : Sample identification code
Control sample 970000xx 8 C970000xxnn1 nn : Number of measurement
xxxxx : Reagent code

y : Classification (from 1 to 7)
Standard sample 98xxxxxy 8 S98xxxxxynnm
nn : Number of measurement
m : Number of repetition
x : Set number
y : Classification (from 1 to 7)
Multi-standard sample 950000xy 8 M950000xynnm
nn : Number of measurement
xxxxx: Reagent code
Serial dilution y : Classification (from 1 to 7)
93xxxxx0 8 D93xxxxxynnm
standard sample nn : Number of measurement
Replicate sample 9400xx01 8 R9400xxnn111 xx: Sample identification code
Orderless sample 920000xx 8 A920000xx111 xx : ASP position code

x: Sample identification code
Blank sample 9510000x 8 B9510000xnnm nn: Number of measurement
m: Number of repetition
xxxxx : Reagent code
Reagent blank 91xxxxx1 8 RB91xxxxx1nnm nn : Number of measurement

1.4.2 Sample Identification Code
1-13
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.3 Barcode Label Specifications for both Sample and Reagent

A) Barcode Type
* Only numbers can be used for Reagent barcode label.
Type Data digit number Check digit Effective characters
UPC(JAN) From 3 to 12 digits 1 digit, Modulus 10 Numbers (from 0 to 9)
Numbers (from 0 to 9)
NW7 From 3 to 12 digits 1 digit, Modulus 16
Symbols (-, $,/,.,+)
From 3 to 8 digits Numbers (from 0 to 9), Alphabet
CODE39 1 digit, Modulus 43
Symbols (-, $,/,.,+)
ITF From 3 to 12 digits 1 digit, Modulus 10 Numbers (from 0 to 9)
Numbers (from 0 to 9), Alphabets (capital
CODE128 letters and small letters)
2 digits, Modulus
(Set A, B From 3 to 12 digits Symbols (!,”,#,$,(,),*,+,.,/,:,;,<,>,=,?,@,[,])
103
and C) Note: Small Roman letters cannot be used for
the Set B.
From 13 mm to 16 mm
B) Barcode Specifications for Sample
Bar module width From 0.25mm to1.00mm
Barcode height 15 mm or higher
Barcode length 60 mm or shorter, including quiet zone.
Quiet zone Blank areas before/after the barcodes.
4 mm or 10 times length of the minimum
module width, whichever the greater.
Maximum 77mm
Printing Black on the white background. Quality
standard shall comply with the ANSI MH10.8M
standard.
Barcode label location Refer to the drawing on the right.
Note: Usable sample tube: Diameter in the range of 13 mm to 16 mm

10 mm or shorter
Barcode Label
C) Barcode Specifications for Reagent Bottle
Bar module width From 0.25 mm to1.00 mm
Barcode height 15 mm and higher
Barcode length 80 mm or shorter, including quiet zone
Quiet zone Blank areas before/after the barcodes.
4 mm or 10 times length of minimum module 70 mm
width, whichever the greater.
Printing Black on the white background. Quality
standard shall comply (compatible) with the
ANSI MH10.8M standard.
Barcode label location Refer to the drawing on the right. 10±1 mm
Barcode label

1.4.3 Barcode Label Specifications for both Sample and Reagent
1-14
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.4 Keyboard
This analyzer is controlled using the PC keyboard and/or the mouse.
The function and description of each key are shown below.
Key Function Description

Press this key when you start measurement and/or restart
[F1] Measurement start
measurement.
Stop dispensing of the sample into the subsequent cuvettes.
[F2] Sampling stop However, the measurement for the dispensed sample(s) will
be continued.
[F3] Emergency sample addition Press this key when you add an emergency sample.
When an alarm occurs, this key starts blinking in red.
[F4] Alarm
When you press this key, the alarm screen will be displayed.
[F5] Daily performance Job menu [Run (F5)] selection key.
[F6] Analysis condition setting Job menu [Parameter (F6)] selection key.
[F7] Calibration setting Job menu [Calibration (F7)] selection key.
[F8] QC setting Job menu [QC (F8)] selection key.
[F9] System parameter setting Job menu [System (F9)] selection key.
[F10] Maintenance Job menu [Maintenance (F10)] selection key
[F11] Tab menu selection (upward) Tab menu selection key.
[F12] Tab menu selection (downward) Tab menu selection key.

[Shift] When you wish to start the simple measurement without
+ Orderless measurement start settings of test selection, press [Shift] and [F1] keys
[F1] simultaneously. (Refer to the Note below)
[Shift]
When you press [Shift] and [ESC] keys simultaneously, the
+ Alarm sound stop
alarm sound will stop.
[ESC]
[Control] When you wish to abort the measurement process in progress,
+ Emergency stop press [Control] and [F2] keys simultaneously. This brings the
[F2] analyzer operation to a complete halt.
[Control] When you wish to print the screen image that is currently
displayed using the printer, press [Control] and [F5] keys
+ Screen-print
simultaneously. This function is not available during
[F5]
measurement process.
Note: The “Orderless measurement start” function is available either with or without the ASP barcodes.
This function allows the analyzer to measure all available samples positioned in the ASP for all
methods that are set by the chemistry parameter regardless of the presence of the test selection. The
measurement methods for the Orderless measurement can also be selected in advance. The necessary
reagents that have been registered must be positioned in the RCU for this operation. (Refer to Chapter
2, “2.7.1.10 Orderless Sample”)

1.4.4 Keyboard
1-15
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.5 Menu Structure
Power on
Monitor
Round
Selection
Result
Run (F5)
Inventory
Sleep Scheme Normal
Std QC Normal2
Patient ISE
SI
Parameter (F6)
Calc
Reg Calib Profile
Serial Dilution Order
Calibration [F7] Multi-Std Wash
ISE
Graph
Job Menu Details
QC [F8] Daily
Cumulative
Setup Settings
Reagent Registration
Login
System (F9) Backup
Setup2 Water B1
Define Work Hour
Range Sequence
Sensor
Perform
Mainte (F10) Passwd
* Adjust
Depending on login mode, these
* DTR Pos
menus become invisible.
* Operation Logs
Combination
Emergency stop
Start (F1) (Cntrl) + (F2)
SStop (F2)
Print-screen
Global (Cntrl) + (F5)
STAT (F3)
Menu
Orderless measurement start
Alarm (F4) (Shift) + (F1)
TabUP (F11)
Alarm sound stop
TabDOWN (F12) (Shift) + (ESC)

1-16
Chapter 1 Overview
A) Job Menu List
Job Menu Tab Menu Description

Run (F5) Monitor Measurement status monitor
Round Measurement details status monitor

Test order (patient sample, standard sample, control sample and blank
Selection
sample), patient information and mask settings.
Result Measurement results control
Inventory Reagent remaining amount control
Sleep Scheme Settings of sleep schedule and wake-up conditions

Test order settings for standard samples and control samples positioned
Std QC
in the innermost circle of the ASP. (Barcode label is not applicable)
Patient Patient information registration
Parameter (F6) Setting for the analysis condition per method.
Normal (Settings for analysis method, measurement point, dispensing amount,
normal range, technical range, stirring speed etc.)
Setting for the analysis condition 2 per method.
Normal2 (Settings for limit check, blank measurement condition, inter-equipment
coefficient etc.)
ISE Analysis condition setting for the ISE.
SI Condition setting for serum information.
Calc Definition of method to method calculation
Profile Profile setting
Order Settings for measurement order and printout order.
Wash Method to method wash setting

Calibration (F7) Reg Calib Registration and setting for calibration curve
Serial Dilution (Serial) Dilution standard setting
Multi-Std Multi-standard setting
ISE ISE calibration results display
QC (F8) Graph QC graph display
Details QC measurement results details display
Daily Daily statistical processing for QC results
Cumulative Statistical processing of QC results for specified days
Settings Setting for the evaluation criteria of QC results
Registration Registration of control samples for quality control (QC).

1-17
Chapter 1 Overview
Job Menu Tab Menu Description

System (F9) Setup for system parameter 1
(Host communication parameters, higher-order digits in the sample
Setup numbers, settings for sample barcode type etc., settings for various
selection condition flags and the RPT special wash solution code,
header settings for real-time printing.)
Registration and settings for reagent codes, reagent names, bottle sizes
Reagent
etc.
Versions Display of various program numbers
Backup Backup for system parameter and measurement data

Setup for system parameter 2
Setup2 (Settings for default settings of reagent bottles, technical range value
and age and generation of patients etc.)
Define Definition and editing for patient information
Range Definition and editing for normal range name(s).

Mainte (F10)
Water Bl Display for water blank value of cuvettes
Work Hour Display for operating time of the equipment and consumable parts
Sequence Single operation and specific sequence operation of units
Sensor Test and display for sensor status

Temperature status monitor for IRU, RCU and ASP.
Perform
Sensitivity status monitor for various wavelengths of DTR.
Passwd Setup necessary password for each user level.
Adjust For factory adjustment (volume adjustment)

Execution of DTR light path adjustment for cuvettes and adjustment
DTR Pos
amount display
Operation Logs Operational record by any operator’s

1-18
Chapter 1 Overview
1.4.6 Control Screen Layout

The screen layout of the control section (Operational PC) is shown below.
To select the menu, click each function key (for example [Run (F5)]) displayed on the screen or press
[F5] key on the keyboard.
(5) Equipment status (1) Current date and time (2) Wakeup time (3) Mode display
Status Date Time Wakeup Time Mode

Run (F5) Parameter (F6) Calibration (F7) QC (F8) System (F9) Mainte (F10) SHUT DOWN
(11) Login level

(6) Job Menu
(4) Shut down or Sleep cancel
(7) Tab Menu
(10) Indication message
Indication
Start (F1) SStop (F2) STAT (F3) Alarm (F4) TabUP (F11) TabDOWN (F12)
(8) Global Menu (9) Tab Menu Selection
No. Details
(1) Date Time
Current date and time is displayed.
(2) Wakeup Time
Wakeup time from the sleep mode is displayed.
(3) Mode
One of the following messages is displayed.
・Receiving order：Indicates that the test order is being received from the host computer.
・ RCU Scan in process：The RCU is currently rotating in order to obtain reagent control information
・ No displays: None of the above.
(4) SHUT DOWN / SLEEP CANCEL
During measurement process, this button is used to shut down the analyzer or shift to the sleep mode.
When pressed during the sleep status, the sleep is cancelled.

1-19
Chapter 1 Overview
No. Details
(5) Status
“Main status” and “Sub-status” messages that indicate the status of the analyzer are displayed.
<Main status display message (left display box) >
Not ready： Communication with each CPU in the analyzer has not been
established yet.
Pre-ready： The boot process has been completed, however, cuvette water
dispensing and prime have not yet been performed.
Ready： Ready to perform measurement any time.
Measurement： Measurement for normal sample(s) is now in process.
STAT-measurement： Emergency samples are being measured as a priority. Standard
sample and QC samples are not measured.
MSStopping： Sample dispensing is completed or being stopped, or samples
are being added to the ASP.
ESStopping： Sample dispensing cannot be continued due to an error
Sleeping： The analyzer is in a sleeping status.
Maintenance： Units of the analyzer are operated from the [Maintenance]
screen.
Emergency Stop： The analyzer has stopped emergently due to equipment
abnormality or user command.
Sampling stop in progress： An error that disables sample dispensing occurred.
Sampling stop complete： The measurement(s) have been completed after an error that
disables sample dispensing occurred.
Maintenance complete： Operation from the [Maintenance] screen has been completed.
Em Stop in progress： The process enabling Emergency Stop is in progress.
Em Stop complete in progress： Restoring from Emergency Stop status.
<Sub status display message (right display box) >

PowerOn： The power-on process is in progress.
Preparation： Either initialization of units or the SPP/RPP prime is in
progress.
Startup： Process to start measurement is in progress.
AddSTAT： The process to add emergency sample is in progress.
STAT measurement complete： Emergency sample measurement has been completed.
Sampling Complete： Sample dispensing to cuvettes has been completed.
Measurement complete： All measurement processes have been completed.
Sleep Progress： Shift to the sleep mode is being prepared.
Wakeup： The analyzer is booting from the sleep mode.
STATStop： Emergency sample dispensing to cuvettes is stopped.
STATReStart： Emergency sample dispensing to cuvettes is restarted.
ReStart： Normal sample dispensing to cuvettes is restarted.
CancelSleep： Preparation for the shift to sleeping status is cancelled.
Maintenance in process： [Performance] Tab in the Maintenance Menu is in progress.
Maintenance Complete： [Performance] Tab in the Maintenance Menu has been
completed.
Passing： The analyzer is ready after the completion of priming,
Shutdown： The analyzer has been shut down.
Sampling stop in process： Sample dispensing to cuvettes is stopped due to an error.

1-20
Chapter 1 Overview
No. Details
(6) Job Menu
By clicking the displayed Job Menu buttons, the following menus can be selected.
(Refer to “1.4.5 Menu Structure, (A) Job Menu List”.)
・Run (F5) Refer to “3.1 Run Menu: [Run (F5)]”.
・Parameter (F6) Refer to “3.2 Set-up Menu 1: [Parameter (F6)]”.
・Calibration (F7) Refer to “3.3 Set-up Menu 2: [Calibration (F7)]”.
・QC (F8) Refer to “3.4 QC Menu: [QC (F8)]“.
・System (F9) Refer to “3.5 System Menu: [System (F9)]”.
・Mainte (F10) Refer to “3.6 Maintenance Menu: [Mainte (F10)]”.
(7) Tab Menu
By clicking the displayed Tab Menu Button, the Tab Menu attached to each Job Menu can be
selected.
(Refer to “1.4.5 Menu Structure: A) Job Menu List”.)
(8) Global Menu
These Global Menu buttons are always shown on the bottom of the screen, they are available in any
Menu.
・Start (F1) By clicking this button, measurement can be started.
・Sstop (F2) By clicking this button during measurement, sample dispensing can be
stopped. To restart the measurement, click the [Start (F1)] button.
・STAT (F3) When you add an emergency sample to the ASP tray, click this button.
・Alarm (F4) By clicking this button, the alarm message screen can be selected. All
alarm messages can be referred in this screen. When an alarm happens,
this button starts blinking in red.
(9) Tab Menu Selection
The following buttons allow you to select Tab Menu that is attached to each selected Job Menu.
・TabUP (F11) Press this button to move up to select Tab Menu.
・TabDOWN (F12) Press this button to move down to select Tab Menu.
(10) Indication message
Indication messages that will help your operations such as selection, input settings, are displayed.
(11) Login Level
Login level (L1 or L2 or L3 or EL) is displayed in this box.

1-21
Chapter 1 Overview
THIS PAGE IS
INTENTIONALLY LEFT
BLANK.

1-22
Chapter 2 Measurement Procedure
Chapter 2 Measurement Procedures

2.1 Prior Checking and Power On
2.1.1 Checking Prior to Work
Make sure that you check out the followings before measurement work.
1. Confirm that each discharge line (high or low level concentration of waste fluid used for WU, and
low level concentration of waste fluid used for the trough) and the overflow line or the pure water
supply line connect to the analyzer accurately (it means the right side of the unit).
Each drain line should be placed in a sloping path and led to the waste equipment located in the
premises so as not to remain waste fluid inside the tube.
2. Confirm that the pure water supply line is in a condition that some pure water from the water
supply unit can be transferred to the analyzer.
- The quantity of water supply: 18 liters or more per an hour
- The supply water pressure: 0.15 - 0.34 Mpa
3. Confirm that wash solutions (Wash-1 and Wash-2) are in full in each tank then each tube is
sufficiently inserted so as not to come out from the fluid level in measurement operation.
High concentration of waste The right side of the unit

fluid used for WU
Low concentration of waste
fluid used for WU
External tank rack cable
connector
Low-concentrated waste
fluid line for Trough
High –concentrated waste fluid
line for ISE
Overflow Line
Pure Water Supply Line

Wash Solution Line
Wash-1
Wash Solution Line

Wash-2
2.1 Prior checking and Power On

2-1
4. The following checking is required to confirm as well if an ISE unit is added.

(a) Make empty the waste fluid tank for ISE (High concentrated waste fluid). Then set the edge
of the ISE waste fluid line tube not to touch the surface of the waste fluid line for high
concentrated waste fluid tank.
(b) Make sure that each electrode within expiration date (Na, K, Cl) has been applied to the unit.
(c) Make sure that the Cal-A (Calibrant-A solution) in a pack has enough solution for the
number of the tests to be implemented.
(d) Confirm that the Cal-A solution can be discharged from a small hall next to the sample port
when you try to do ISE prime from 3 to 5 times.
(e) Note that the ISE calibrations must be implemented after the analyzer is power on. The setup
to calibrate about 2-points calibrator is available on the tab menu [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence].
(See “3.6.3 [Sequence]” in “Chapter 3 Menu Details”)

2-2
2.1.2 External Tank Rack (optional)
You can purchase a tank rack to set a tank for wash solution. This is an option.
The external tank rack is available to place both of the Wash solution-1 and Wash solution-2 (Wash-1/2)tanks
and the remaining wash solution of each tank is being monitored by a sensor attached to the rack. The sensor
will send out a warning signal to the analyzer when the solution of the tank goes under the regular amount.
Connect a sensor cable, detecting the liquid level of the high-concentrated waste fluid tank used for ISE, to
the external tank rack. Connect the edge of the sensor to the high-concentrated waste fluid tank used for ISE
as well.
External tank rack

Cable for connection between (Optional)
external tank rack and the analyzer
A detecting sensor for the liquid

level（high-concentrated waste
fluid tank）
Wash-1 and Wash-2 tanks
Cable for connection between

external tank lack and the analyzer
A detecting sensor for the liquid level

(high-concentrated waste fluid tank)

2.1.2External Tank Rack
2-3
2.1.3 Power ON
A) Power on the main unit
First you have to check that all electrodes and the Cal-A (Calibrant solution) has been set before turning
the power on.
The power on switch is attached to the right side of the analyzer.
LAN connector
(connector for the operating PC）
Power supply switch
Power supply cable
The left side of the analyzer
B) Power on for printer

Turn on the power supply of the printer connected to the operating PC so that the printer will change a
ready status. Make sure that enough print papers are set in the printer as well.
C) Power on for operating PC

Turn on the power supply for the operating PC connected via a LAN connector of the analyzer.
Basically all the software has been installed in the analyzer designed as becoming a run mode
automatically after the PC turns on.
After the PC’s power on, the following pop-up message will be shown in the center of the screen as an
inquiry that whether you need to implement a preparatory mode that it fills pure water (or system water)
enough in an internal tank of the analyzer or the supply lines. (See the figure below.). This inquiry will not
happen in an automatic run by sleep mode, however. We strongly recommend you implement this
preparatory mode such as the completion of an analyzer setting or before resumption of the analyzer out of
operation for a long time.

2.1.3 Power ON / 2.1.4 Power OFF
2-4
OK： By clicking the button, a preparatory mode which fills pure water line or the wash solution line
inside of the analyzer will start. (About 8 minutes)
Cancel：By clicking the button, a preparatory mode will be passed.
2.1.4 Power OFF

A) Shut down for the operating PC
To shut down your analyzer, click the Shut Down displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen so
you will see the following pop-up message. Next, choose one of the following modes for shutdown.
The Shut Down button is available on all screen modes.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Sleep： Selecting a Sleep mode

By choosing this mode the analyzer will execute a pre-sleep process then turn into a sleep mode.
Therefore, you MUST NOT turn off the power of the analyzer when selecting this mode.
A sleep state is that all functions will stop except that cooling function for a reagent container unit
(RCU) and an Auto Sampler unit (ASP) for the analyzer will continue. The analyzer will resume in a
run mode, available for measurement, at the time specified sleep release in advance. (See the tab
menu [RUN (F5)] – [Sleep Scheme])
For choosing sleep modes, you have to register these “After Sleep” and “Sleep Scheme” on the
tab menu [RUN (F5)] – [Sleep Scheme] in advance then set up “Before Sleep” on a pop-up menu to
shift Sleep Mode from Shut Down.

2-5
ISE cleaning:
Specify the number of ISE cleaning times (0-5 times).
SPT Wash:
Specify the number of SPT cleaning times. Selecting “(W)” will execute SPT wash with system
water and “(S)” will be for wash solution. Wash solution should be registered on [Run (F5)] – [Std
QC] in advance.
The number can be chosen form 0 to 5 times and SPT wash will not be executed when the number
is “0”.
Note that you cannot select both “(W)” and “(S)” at the same time.
RPT1, 2 Wash:
Specify the number of RPT cleaning times. Selecting “(W)” will execute RPT wash with system
water and “(S)” will be for wash solution. Wash solution should be registered on [System (F9)] –
[Setup] in advance.
The number can be chosen form 0 to 5 times and RPT wash will not be executed when the
number is “0”.
Cuvette Fill:
Choose whether you fill cuvettes with system water, wash solution or none (not fill cuvettes).
Wash solution should be registered on [System (F9)] – [Setup] in advance.
Nozzle Wash:
Nozzle wash operation will be implemented in IRU cuvettes for 10 minutes.
Mix Wash:
Mix 1 / 2 wash operation will be implemented in IRU cuvettes for 10 minutes.

2-6
Even in sleep mode you can go to see any screens as you like because the mode will not affect the
operating PC. But note that the [Start (F1)] key for starting measurement and the [Mainte (F10)] key
for the job menu for each unit operation will not work as each unit of the analyzer is inoperative.
It is possible to return in a normal condition regardless of sleeping. By clicking on the Shut Down
button again for release. The pop-up massage confirming the release will be shown as below. To click
the OK button inside of the message, the sleep mode will release.
- Before Sleep：
This is some preparatory event for the analyzer such as nozzle's cleaning before
transferring to a sleep mode. You need to set up those events at pop-up screen to shift
Sleep Mode from Shut Down.
- After Sleep：
This is prime and nozzle cleaning actions to be done for the analyzer when it returns
from a sleep mode (Wake up). You need to set up those actions at [Sleep Scheme] screen
on the job menu.
- Sleep Scheme：
This is a setting such as a wakeup time to be returned from a sleep mode and a
necessity to be done events after a sleep mode everyday (from Monday to Sunday). You
need to set up those actions at [Sleep Scheme] screen on the job menu.
(2) Power Off：Selecting of A power-off mode.

By choosing this mode, the operating PC will start a process that makes all the analyzer equipments
turn off the power and after that it will shut down itself automatically.
(3) Cancel： Your selecting the Shut Down will be canceled.

2-7
B) Power OFF for the measurement equipment

(1) When selecting Sleep
After having completed some Before Sleep processes, set by the [Sleep Scheme] on the job menu,
the analyzer itself will be in a sleep mode. The current status will be shown in the upper left portion
of the screen so that you can watch the transitional condition of each process.
The following shows change of a Status on the left side of the top line of the screen as an example.
<A status shown in processing a “Before Sleep” (Shut Down click）>
<A status shown in sleeping mode>
<A status shown in releasing a sleep mode (Shut Down click again）>
(2) When selecting Power Off
Make the analyzer turn off after the completion of the end processes of software at the PC side.
Note that cooling function for the Reagent Container Unit (RCU) and Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) will
not be applied to this condition.
C) Power Off for the printer

Turn off the printer as appropriate.

2-8
2.2 Reagent Registration

It is required to register each reagent for measurements including wash solutions and dilute solutions in
advance with measurements. Go to register its information in the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Reagent].
The list of the registered reagents Bottle information
Reagent Register Panel：[System (F9)]-[Reagent]
First, the bottle information of registered reagents and the list of registered reagents will be shown in
the screen. On the registered reagent list, a reagent list that is currently being registered will be seen on
the left side of the screen. It is available to delete its registration and change some information of the
reagent, by clicking any reagent codes or reagent names on the list. In this regard, you don’t need to click
inside of the list in the case of additional registration.
Generally, some white parts in the screen are a selecting or settings for input items available.
A reagent code consists of 5 digits (numerals only) and you cannot use following codes.
Codes start from “000” and codes end at “00”.
You can select “Reagent bottle types” up to 3 types. Default types depends on “Default setting for
reagent bottle types” on [System]-[Setip2].
2-9
2.2.1 Addition
<Additional registry procedures>
1 Enter a reagent code in 5 digits, which you want to add as new, in the “Reagent Code” area.
2 Enter a new name within 6 digit alphanumeric characters in the “Reagent Name” area.
3 For the information for the setting of the first reagent bottle (R1), you have to click the
“Enable” box of R1 and wait until it turns on. Register the amount of the bottle to be used from
“Reagent bottle types”. If you want to check the term of stability for this reagent bottle, click the
“Enable” box of the “Stability Check” then enter 2 numeric digits (from 0 to 99) as an effective
stability term in the “Term” area.
4 For the information for the setting of the second reagent bottle (R2), you have to click the
“Enable” box of R2 and wait until it turns on. Register the quantity of the bottle to be used from
“Reagent bottle types”. If you want to check the term of stability for this reagent bottle, click the
“Enable” box of the “Stability Check” then enter 2 numeric digits (from 0 to 99) as an effective
stability term in the “Term” area.
The start point for the stability check is the date registered reagent codes. This function will be
implemented in the tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Inventory], and as a result, part of the inventory of
the reagent that is no longer within the stability term will be displayed with yellow background.
5 For the information for the setting of the wash solution (or Wash), you have to click the
“Enable” box of Wash. Then register the initial amount of the bottles to be used by 70 / 20 mL.
6 For the information for the setting of the dilute solution (or Dil), you have to click the
“Enable” box of Dil. Then register the initial amount of the bottles to be used by 70 / 20 mL.
7 Save all the settings by clicking the Save button.
2.2 Additional registry procedures

2.2.1 Addition
2-10
2.2.2 Editing
<Editing procedures for the registered information>
1 By clicking a reagent code or a reagent name in the registered list, the information of current its
bottle will be shown.
2 Enter the information of the bottle that you want to change.
3 Save all the settings by clicking the Save button.

2.2.2 Editing
2-11
2.2.3 Delete
<Deletion of the registered information>
1 By clicking a reagent code or a reagent name in the registered list, the information of its current
bottle will be shown.
2 Click the Delete button.
3 The following pop-up message will be shown to reconfirm your elimination command, so that
press OK if you can commit it. However, it will become invalid to click the Cancel button.
2.2 Measurement Procedures

2.2.3 Delete
2-12
2.3 Settings for Chemistry Parameters

Parameters related to the assay conditions for measurements should be defined in advance to
measurement. You need to register those necessary parameters for measurements using some tab menu on
the job menu [Parameter (F6)]. The following table describes the outline of each tab menu.
[Parameter (F6)]
Setting Description
Tab menu
Method Number / Name, Sample types, Output unit for concentrated value, Assay
Type, Measurement point, Measurement Wave Length, Amount of Sample dispensing,
[Normal] Amount of Dilute Solution, Amount of reagent dispensing, Normal Range, Technical
Range, and Stirring Speed
(See “3.2.1 [Normal]”in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Method Number / Name, Sample types, Limit Values (Duality, Sensitivity, linearity,
Prozone, Absorbance limit), Conditions for Blank Measurements (Application available
[Normal2] / unavailable, Application conditions, Reagent types, the number of measurement times,
Duality limit Values), Instrument Factor
(See “3.2.2 [Normal 2]”in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Sample Types, Dilute Solution name, Instrument Factor, Normal Range (Maximum
[ISE] and Minimum values per Na, K and Cl)
(See “3.2.3 [ISE)” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Factors for blood serum information (from A to F), Amount of sample dispensing,
Instrument Factor, Reagent names, Amount of reagent dispensing, SI criteria
[SI]
(Hemolysis / Turbidity / Icterus)
(See “3.2.4 [SI]” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Definition of Method to Method calculation
This value is a combination of several results produced from the measurement results.
The value is calculated based on some results that have been taken by some type of
[Calc]
methods in real measurements and its calculation uses four arithmetic operations. The
produced value is used as another value of the real value.
(See “3.2.5 [Calc]” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Definition of a profile
A profile is that is combined several measurement methods in a file. It is possible to set
[Profile]
up to 20.
(See “3.2.6 [Profile]” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Definition of Orders in Measurement Procedure
[Order] The definition of measurement order and print order
(See “3.2.7 [Order]” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
Definition of nozzle wash Program
This is to define cleaning for reagent nozzle in every measurement methods to prevent
[Wash] from being infected with the nozzles (RPT1 / RPT2), of which dispensing different
reagents used by a measurement method may cause contamination problem.
(See “3.2.8 [Wash]” in the “Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus”.)
2.3 Setting for Chemistry Parameters
2-13
2.3.1 Setting for Chemistry Parameters (1)

Before starting measurement, specify necessary parameters for measurement to select the tab menu
[Parameter (F6)] – [Normal].
[Parameter (F6)]－[Normal]
<Setting descriptions>
1 Specify the Method number and the Method Name.
Click the drop-down arrow on the list
box to display.
Your choice for a method number and name is 3 types. One is that you move your cursor to
the center of the box then type a value directly; the other one is that you keep pressing the press
key to display the list and select one of the values, or the other is that you select one from the
drop-down menu. Choose one as appropriate.
The space key function list will be shown as a pop up at the center of the screen. (Refer the
figure on the next page.)
2-14
Space Key List
2 Specify a measurement name used for printing. If this print name is not inputted, the name
will be used in printing with the measurement name that was set in the Name section. The
name can use alphanumeric and signs within 15 digits.
3 Specify a sample category.

box to display.
Select any one of types on the drop-down menu as a sample type: Common, Serum, Urine
or Plasma.
4 Type a measurement unit for concentration.
Specify a unit that will be added with the measurement results. Type a unit what you need
inside the box.
5 Specify an assay type.

box to display.
Select “ Rate” or “End” from the drop-down menu for the assay type.
2-15
6 Specify measuring points

Specify the measuring points from the measured time course data to evaluate a
concentrated value
The points can be selected from 1 to 68 on the drop- down menu.
Click the drop-down arrow

on the list box to display.
Specify a range for Measuring point-1.

Specify a range for Measuring point-2 to click the “Enable” check box.
Make sure that the range of measuring point is from 1 to 68, Start<=End, [Measuring
point-1]<[Measuring point-2].
7 Select a wavelength for Primary and Secondary.
Click the drop-down arrow on the list box to

display available wavelengths.
Specify a Primary Wavelength and a Secondary Wavelength for measuring. The available
wavelengths are 12 wavelengths: 340 / 380 / 415 / 450 / 510 / 546 / 570 / 600 / 660 / 700 / 750 /
800. Click the “Disable” check box of the Sec. not to use a Secondary Wavelength.
8 Specify an amount of the sample. (See 10)

Three cases can be specified for the amount as a normal measurement, rerun for high value
measurement, rerun for low value measurement.
The setting for “Sample (µL)” and “Diluent (µL)” are unavailable when the Dilution check
box is OFF.
Click those check boxes

to dilute.
Amount of the sample used for measurement An amount of the dilution

(An amount after mixing with dilution)
An amount of the sample for mixing with the dilution
2-16
9 Specify an amount of the primary (R1) and the secondary reagent (R2) for dispensing.
You can select Reagent Name from the pop-up list displayed by pressing the Space key where you
type in the box, or form the drop-down menu. Available reagents, which are registered in the tab menu
[System (F9)] – [Reagent], will be displayed in any of those lists.
Click the “Enable” box of R2 to apply the secondary reagent (R2).

The range for R1 reagent consumption is from 20 to 350 μL (1 μL step) and that of R2 is from 20 to
250 μL(1 μL step).
The range of dilution water is from 100 to 350 μL (1 μL step).
Note: You can specify an amount of pure water (or system water) for diluting reagents for
both R1 and R2. However, the total amount of the reagent and pure water, which will be
injected in cuvettes, comes to the dispensing amount for IRU’s cuvettes when you specify
the amount of pure water for reagent dilution.
The total volume (sample, R1 / R2 reagents, R1 / R2 dilution) used for measuring
should be between 150 and 450 μL.
Click the check box to apply R2 Specify reagent amount for measurement
reagent.
Specify a reagent name Specify an amount pure water for

dilution when the reagent dilution.
10 Specify a Dilution
Specify the name used for a sample dilution to dilute it. Click the “Enable” box to be able to
specify a dilution name. The ways to specify like the previous section, you can choose from the
list by using the Space key or from the drop-down menu.
You can specify some amount of pure water to dilute an identified dilution with pure water.
Note: Be aware of the sample dilution (Item-8) if you register an amount of pure water of
reagent dilution. Therefore, the total amount comes to the sum of the dilution and pure
water.
Click the drop-down arrow on the The box is available to type an amount
list box to display. of pure water to dilute the Dilution.
2-17
11 Specify a significant decimal point for measurement.

box to display.
The range of number 0 to 5 can be chosen from the drop-down menu. For example, when you
select “2” as a decimal point, the concentration of your measurement result will be displayed to
two places of decimals.
12 Specify a Normal Range value.

By double clicking a box of Min and Max on the list, you can change the value.
Those boxes can be able to change or modify

their value of Min and Max.
The Range Names from No.1 to No.6 are the fixed values. Refer the below.
1. Male-G1 ：Male Generation1
2. Male-G2 ：Male Generation2
3. Male-G3 ：Male Generation3 Go to register the range of each age to the tab menu
[System (F9)] – [Setup2]
4. Female-G1 ：Female Generation1
Numbers up to No.50 after No.7 can be defined on the Tab Menu [System (F9)] – [Range].
13 Specify a Technical Range.

Here, you can specify the lower and upper limit of the concentration as a Technical Range.
The lower limit The upper limit
Concentration
Absorbance
The setting for absorbance is not here. Its setting is defined on the tab menu [System (F9)]
– [Setup2].
2-18
14 Specify a special wash for SPT nozzles.

Select one of wash solutions from the drop-down menu by clicking the “Enable” check box
to execute SPT nozzle wash.
box to display.
Those solutions displayed on the drop-down menu have been registered on the tab men
[System (F9)] – [Reagent], and you can choose among them.
15 Specify a stirring speed.

Specify the stirring speed for the Mix-1, which R1 reagent and a sample is dispensed in
cuvettes.
Specify the stirring speed for the Mix-2, which R1 & R2 reagent and a sample is dispensed
in cuvettes.
Any of the stirring speeds can be selected from the drop-down menu.
Select one from

the drop-down
menu.
16 Click the Save button to save the editing parameter unless it has any problems.
Use the Cancel button to cancel the editing parameters.
Click the Delete button for deleting the method number of chemistry parameters that you are
selecting from the database.
2-19
17 This is a parameter registration by using a copy function.

Parameters that are the same as the copy parameter except the Method, the Name and the
sample type can be registered to another method of the chemistry parameters.
Click the “Copy” check box (on the lower left corner of the screen)
When you click the Copy check box, the “Method”, “Name” and “Sample” parameters and the
Save and Cancel button will be available, and the others cannot be changed. All you have to do
is type your necessary information such as a measurement method number and its name, a
sample type then press the Save button so that the chemistry parameter will be registered as a
new one.
Change available
2-20
2.3.2 Setting for Chemistry Parameters (2)

A measurement condition like each limit value and a reagent blank is defined on the tab menu
[Parameter (F6)] – [Normal2].
[Parameter (F6)] - [Normal2]
1 Specify the method number, the method name and a sample category on the screen.
The method name that is registered on the tab menu [Normal] will be shown automatically
when you set the Method number. Select one of the categories from the drop-down menu:
Common, Serum, Urine and Plasma
The drop down menu

2.3.2 Setting for Chemistry Parameter (2)
2-21
2 Click the enable check box for the Duplicate Limit and define the value to get the Duplicate
Limit check effective. This check will be effective only when a calibration measurement.
Enable check box
3 Click the enable check box for the Sensitivity Limit and define the value to get the
Sensitivity Limit check effective. This check will be effective only when a calibration
measurement.
Enable check box
4 Click the enable check box for the Linearity Limit and define its percent threshold value (%)
and absorbance limit (mAbs/10) to get the Linearity Limit check effective. This check will be
effective only for a rate method measurement.
Enable check box
5 Click the enable check box for the Prozone Limit and define its percent threshold value (%),
a choice of a judge direction (Upper/Lower), the first and last measurement point numbers of
the Slope-1, the first and last measurement point numbers of the Slope-2 and a sensibility limit
value in order to get the Prozone Limit check effective. Make sure that this check is not applied
to a calibration measurement.
Enable check box Prozone threshold value Judge direction (Upper/Lower)

(%)
The measurement rang of Slop-1

(SL1-S < SL1-F)
The measurement rang of Slop-2

(SL2-S < SL2-F)
Sensibility Limit
6 Click the enable check box for the Absorbance Limit and define its reaction trend (increase/
decrease) and its limit value (mAbs/10) to get the Absorbance Limit check effective. This
check will be effective only for a rate assay measurement.
Enable check box

Select a reaction trend
(Increase / Decrease)
Limit value setting

2-22
Select the type of blank measurement

7 Specify the Blank measurement.
from the drop-down menu.
Drop-down menu
- Disable reagent blank and S1 blank : It does not measure a reagent blank and S1 blank.
By choosing this, item-8，9 and 10 are unnecessary to
define.
- Enable S1 Blank (Factor or Linear) : It measures S1 blank.
- Enable reagent blank : It measures reagent blank.
- Enable reagent blank for S1 (Linear) : It takes the reagent blank result substitute for a S1 result.
8 Specify the measurement timing for reagent blank.
Select the measurement

timing from the drop-down
menu.
Drop-down menu
- Daily : It executes any of the Methods that has not been measured for reagent blank in
a same day. The timing of measurement is anytime an unprocessed reagent blank
method occurs.
- Next Run : It executes the reagent blank in every round.
- None : It does not measure any reagent blank. (Because a reagent blank in the past is
applied.)
9 Specify blank measurement method.
Select a measurement method

- Reagent blank (no sample) :It measures blank only with a reagent.
- Reagent blank (system water) :It measures blank with pure water instead of a sample.
10 Specify the number of reagent blank measurements.
Select the number of measurement

Drop-down menu
- Single : It determines the value of the reagent blank by just 1time measurement.
- Duplicate : It determines the value of the reagent blank from 2 times of the measurement results.
- Triplicate : It determines the value of the reagent blank from 3 times of the measurement results.

2-23
11 Specify whether or not to need a Duplicate Limit check for the reagent blank measurement
and its limit.
Click the enable check box for the Duplicate Limit and define its response to get the
Duplicate Limit checks effective. This determines whether the result is duplication. After
ticking off the check box, enter its limit value in the box.
Enable check box
Input the limit in the box.

- In the case of a Duplicate, if both of the 2 measurement results are within its limit, it will
adopt its average.
- In the case of a Triplicate, if all of the 3 measurement results are within its limit, it will adopt
the center value of the results. It will adopt the average of the 2 results, which are within its
limit in the 3.
12 Specify an Instrument Factor.
Input a slope Input an intercept
The measurement result of methods defined in this menu can be corrected with linear
equation to be consistent with other analyzers. You can specify its parameters (a slope and an
intercept) here.
13 Click the Save button to fix the setting on the menu.
・Save : By clicking the button, the setting will be saved.

・Cancel : By clicking the button, the setting will be canceled.

2-24
2.3.3 Setting for ISE Parameters

You can specify ISE measurement methods on the tab menu [ISE] in the job menu [Parameter (F6)].
[Parameter (F6)] - [ISE]
1 Specify a sample type and an ISE type.
- Note that you have to choose whether ISE or ISE(D) for ISE type when you select Common
for a sample type.
- When you select Serum or Plasma for a sample type, ISE will be automatically selected for
the ISE type.
- When you select Urine for a sample category, ISE (D) will be automatically selected for the
ISE type. The meaning of ISE (D) is that it executes ISE measurement using a sample
dilution.
Drop-down menu for

sample category
Drop-down menu for
ISE types
2.3Ssetting for Chemistry Parameters

2-25
2 When you select ISE (D) for ISE type, you need to specify its dilution name.
The dilution name should have been registered on the tab menu [Reagent] in the job menu
[System (F9)]
Type dilution name
Note: If any dilution names have been typed in the box, you can choose a previous name from
the drop-down menu.
3 Specify a value for Normal Range.

Double-click any part of the Na-Min, K-Min and Cl-Min cells for the lower Limit and the
Na-Max, K-Max and Cl-Max cells in the box to change its value.
You can correct or change the Min and Max value on the list.
The Range Names from No.1up to No.6 are the fixed values. Refer the below.
1. Male-G1: Male Generation1
2. Male-G2: Male Generation2
3. Male-G3: Male Generation3 Go to define the range of each age to the tab
4. Female-G1: Female Generation1 menu [Setup2] in the job menu [System (F9)]
5. Female-G2: Female Generation2
6. Female-G3: Female Generation3
4 Define an Instrument Factor

Here you can calibrate your results, each Na, K and Cl, with a linear equation in order to be
consistent with the results of other analyzers. You can define parameters for the calibration (a:
Sloop, b: Intercept).

2-26
5 Click the Save button to fix the setting parameters in the menu.
・Save : By clicking this button, the setting parameters will be saved.

・Cancel : By clicking this button, the setting parameters will be canceled.
・Print : By clicking this button, the setting parameters will be printed out.
However, this button should be available to click.

2-27
This page is intentionally left blank.

2-28
2.3.4 Setting for Serum Information (SI) Parameters

You can specify serum information parameters for a measurement and judgment condition, on the
tab menu [SI] in the job menu [Parameter (F6)] (See Chap 3 “3.2.4 [SI]”).
All necessary parameters for SI measurement are defined correctly and then selecting SI
measurement on the tab menu [Selection] in the job menu [Run (F5)] will be available.
[Parameter (F6)]－[SI]
1 Specify a reagent type. Click the arrow to display the
drop-down menu.
Specify whether “R1” or “Dil” for a reagent type, from the drop-down menu
2 Specify a reagent name and its dispensing amount.
Enter a reagent name Enter an amount of reagent dispensing
You can select a reagent name from the list displayed by pressing the Space key where you
type in the cell box, or from the drop-down menu. Note that the reagent names you will choose
should have been defined on the tab menu [Reagent] in the job menu [System (F9)] beforehand.

2.3.4 Serum Information（SI）Parameters
2-29
3 Define a Factor value.

Specify Factor A to F each (The range: 0 -999999).
4 Specify an amount of dispensing for the sample
Set sample’s dispensing amount
5 Specify the range for judgment.
H0 < 100
100 ≤H1 < 110
The judge range 110 ≤ H2 < 120

(Hemolysis)
120 ≤ H2 < 130
H4 > 130
L++ < 150
150 ≤L+ < 160

The judge range 160 ≤L+- < 170
(Turbidity)
170 ≤L- < 180
L-- > 180
I+++ < 200
200 ≤I++ <210

The judge range
(Icterus) 210 ≤I+ <220
220 ≤I+- <230
I- > 230
Max 5 letters available for judgment signs
Judgment value (0 –999999 available)

2-30
6 You can specify an Instrument Factor

The measurement result in each Hemolysis (or H), Turbidity (or L) and Icterus (or I) can be
consistent with that of other analyzer so that the result can be calibrated with a linear equation.
You can specify those parameters (a: gradient / b: intercept).
5 Click the Save button to fix the setting parameters on this menu.
All necessary parameters for SI measurement are defined correctly and then selecting SI
measurement on the tab menu [Selection] in the job menu [Run (F5)] will be available.
・Save :By clicking this button, the setting parameters will be saved.
・Cancel : By clicking this button, the setting parameters will be canceled.
・Print : By clicking this button, the saved parameters can be printed out.
Note, this button should be available to click.

2-31
2.3.5 Definition of Method-to-Method Calculation

Method to Method calculation is a combination of several measurement produced from the measurement
results. The value is calculated based on some results that have been measured and you can use it as if another
one. You can define the method on the tab menu [Calc] in the job menu [Parameter(F6)]. (See Chap 3 “3.2.5
[Calc]”).
2.3.6 Definition of Profile

You can define several mesurement items in a file. This is called a “Profile”, and it is possible to define 20
files per a sample. The registration way for this, go to the tab menu [Profile] in the job menu [Parameter(F6)].
(See Chap 3 “3.2.6 [Profile]”).
2.3.7 Setting for Measurement Orders

You can define a measurement order and a result printing order on the tab menu [Order] in the job menu
[Parameter (F6)]. (See Chap 3 “3.2.7 [Order]”)
2.3.8 Definition of Nozzle Wash Program

Reagent nozzles (RPT1 or RPT2) mutually used over different methods may cause infection trouble. To
avoid this, you can define nozzle wash program on the tab menu [Wash] in the job menu [Parameter (F6)]. This
program will be processed in measuring so that the throughput of this measurement may be affected, indeed.
(See Chap 3 “3.2.8 [Wash)”)
Method A Reagent Nozzle Wash Method B
Dispensing Reagent Dispensing Reagent

(RPT1 or RPT2) (RPT1 or RPT2)

2.3.5 Definition of Method to Method Calculation / 2.3.6 Profile Defenition /
2.3.7 Define Measurement Order/ 2.3.8 Define Nozzle Wash Program
2-32
2.4 Placement for Reagent Bottles (RCU)

Before starting measurement, place all necessary items such as reagents, dilutions, and wash solutions
on the tray in Reagent Container Unit (RCU).
The bottle types are 100 / 70 50 / 40 / 20mL. You can put 30 bottles of 100 / 70 50 / 40 / 20mL types in
total on inner side and 30 bottles of 20mL types on outer side.
This reagent tray can be removed from the RCU.
Bottles can be placed in any slots on the RCU’s tray but they need to be registered beforehand. (See
Chapter 2 “2.2 Reagent Registration”)
An analyzer distinguishes bottles on the RCU’s tray by reading barcodes attached on the bottles. In
addition, it needs to know all the information of reagents placed on the RCU’s tray (reagent types, reagent
remaining, bottle type etc) before the measurement; therefore Reagent Scan process should be performed.
(See Chapter 2 “2.9 Confirmation of Reagent Remaining Volume”)
2.4.1 Sequence Procedures for Bottles
1 Place some bottles horizontally on an empty slot of the RCU’s tray.
2 Set the reagent try you placed some bottles inside of RCU in the analyzer.
3 Turn the reagent tray slowly and make the guide pin fit.
Reagent Tray
Guide pin
4 Detach the lid of the bottle you placed.

5 Set the lid of RCU.
2.4 Placement for Reagent Bottles

2.4.1 Sequence Procedures for Bottles
2-33
2.5 Calibration Setting
For converting the absorbance of the measurement result into a concentrated value, the analyzer needs an
approximation formula. Therefore, it will get the approximation formula to calculate from Standard sample (or
Calibrator) that has a previous concentrated value. Standard sample usually consists of a concentrated value below
7 types. This result, an approximation formula, is needed to all measurement methods and the value should have
been prepared in the analyzer in advance with measurement.
A regulatory calibration for each method is fundamentally required to implement a stable measurement. This
analyzer has a function that can set an expiry for a calibration in order to guarantee the regulatory calibration
updates. Moreover, the analyzer has another function that can check its expire date of the calibrator.
The calibration types are;
- Full-calibration
This is to get a calibration curve, using all necessary calibrators.
- Re-calibration (Partial calibration)
This is to calibrate the current calibration curve, measuring only a necessary calibrator.
There are 2 types as you see on the above.
As a result of a calibration measurement, the result can get 2 types of calibration curves as followings.
- Master
This curve is resulted in a full calibration measurement and it will also go to the Work result.
- Work
This curve is a curve that resulted in a re-calibration and it is corrected with a Master.
This Work curve is used for converting a sample (including control measurement) into a concentration
value.
The calibration result that was measured by reagent sets (R1/R2) of different lot number can be saved as “New”
and “Old” areas. You can use both by switching as appropriate. (Lot numbers are available up to 2 types)
2.5.1 Calibration Curve Type
As a calibration type, 5 curves can be selected among the following.
(1) Factor: An operator should set a gradient value of a linear equation in the system. An intercept
value can be calibrated to measure a standard sample (SI).
(2) Linear: This is to get a linear equation from the measurement results of various standard
samples.
(3) Point To Point: This is to get a linear equation for each measurement point from the measurement
results of various standard samples.
(4) Log-Logit: This is to get a log formula from the measurement results of various standard samples.
(5) Spline: This is to get a spline curve approximation formula from the measurement results of
various standard samples.
(6) Exponential: This is to get an approximation formula of an exponential function from the
measurement results of various standard samples.
2.5 Caribration Setting

2.5.1 Calibration Curve Type
2-34
2.5.2 Calibration Registration / Setting

You can define calibration parameters that you need for measurements on the tab menu [Reg Calib] in the job
menu [Calibration (F7)].
[Calibration (F7)] - [Reg Calib]
<Setting Descriptions>
1. Specify both of a Method number and a Method Name.
There are 3 types of specifying a Method number. One is to input it directly in the cell by making the key
cursor move where you input, the other one is to choose one of the values from the list displayed by
pressing the space key and the other is to select one from the drop-down list. All three are possible so you
can select one as applicable. (Note: This is the same as “2.3.1 Chemistry Parameter Setting (1)”) The
method name added with related to its method number will be shown automatically.
2. Specify a sample category to apply.
Choose one from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma, shown by the drop-down list.
3. Specify the number of measurements for a calibrator.
Choose the number from the drop-down list.
- Duplicate: This function executes duplicate measurement, and it takes its average for a measurement
result.
- Triplicate: This function executes triplicate measurement, and it takes its median value for a
measurement result.

2.5.2 Cariblation Registration /Setting
2-35
4. Specify a stability term for a calibration.

To get a stable and precision measurement, a calibration curve modifying with some regular intervals is
preferable. Input an expiry term (days: 0- 99) for the reason.
The expiry term check will not be executed when you set 0 days for the term.
This check detects any method names which have past their expiry date from the latest calibration
measurement, and it makes them turn red on the Test Selection screen ([Run (F5)] – [Selection]). In
addition, a “CTO” flag will be added for the result of the sample measurement.
1 Method Number
3 The number of calibration measurement
2 Sample Type
4 The calibration’s expiry terms
5 Automatic measurement condition

6 Type of automatic measurement
10 Reagent lot (New/ Old)
9 Material name 7 Time interval for automatic measurement

8 Calibration type
5. Specify an automatic measurement condition. (See note.)

Choose either “Change Lot” or “Timeout” by the drop-down list.
- Chang Lot: When the lot number of reagent for the calibration is changed, the calibration
measurement can be automatically executed.
- Timeout: When the times are passed over the specified interval time in the “Auto Interval”,
the calibration measurement can be automatically executed.
6. Specify the type of automatic measurement. (See note.)
Choose one type from Blank/ One/ Two/ Full Calibration by the pull-down list.
- Blank: Blank measurement
- One: One-point calibration
- Two: Two-point calibration
- Full Calibration: Full calibration
7. Input the time interval for automatic measurement of calibrator. (See note.)
This setting becomes available when the “Timeout” is selected as the automatic measurement condition.
8. Specify a calibration type. (See note.)
Choose one type from Factor / Linear / Point To Point / Log-Logit / Spline / Exponential, shown by the
drop-down list. (See item-12 later discussed, when you select Factor.)
Note: The function of automatic execution for calibration measurement is applied only when the
calibrator(s) is/are placed in the innermost slot (#I01 to I20) of ASP. (Refer to “2.7.2 Special Test
Selection”.)

2-36
9. You can input a calibrator material name. (Within 8 alphanumeric)

10. Select either “New” or “Old” for the reagent lot.
This is used for a partial resetting for a calibration that has been measured, or for a calibration switching
to apply another one.
The meaning of “New” and ”Old” is that the calibration results of which reagent lot numbers are
different can be administrative as 2 types.
(a) The first calibration result using reagent lot number N1 will be stored in “New”.
(b) The second calibration result using reagent lot number N2 will be stored in “New” and the first result
will be transferred to “Old”.
(c) After the third result, a result using a calibration result which is different from “New” or “Old” one
will be executed as same as a (b) process. However, a result using the same lot number as “New” (or
“Old”) one will be overwritten it to its area which is stored, and also its time-stamp is renewed.
Depending on time-stamp, the name of “Old” (or “New”) is changed to “New” (or “Old”).
11. Input a concentration of each standard sample (Calibrator). Max 7 samples are possible to set.
This setting must be defined before calibration measurements.
But, when selecting “Factor” as a case of calibration curve type, you don’t have to deal with this setting.
12. The absorbance result of calibration measurement will be displayed.
Work: At Full-calibration, the value will be shown same as Master’s
At Re-calibration, the only Work will be updated.
Master: The result of Full-calibration will be displayed. In addition, those absorbance values can be
edited except “Factor”.
13. You can input the lot number of a normal sample (Calibrator).
It is effective that a calibration type is Linear / Point To Point / Log-Logit / Spline / Exponential.
But, when selecting “Factor” as a case of calibration curve type, you don’t have to deal with this setting.
By clicking this check box, the same lot number S1 you

entered is applied to from S2 to S7.
12 Absorbance value for calibration 13 Lot number for standard samples

11 Concentration for standard
sample result.

2-37
14. In case of only selecting “Factor” for a calibration curve type, the cells for K-Factor will be displayed.
For Point To Point, Log-Logit, Spline, Exponential, those cells will not be displayed.
Also, next to K-Factor, blank measurement check box “ON” or “OFF” on the tab menu [Normal2] of the
job menu [Parameter (F6)] will be indicated. (See chapter 2 “2.3.2 The setting chemistry Parameters (2)”)
14 Type the K-Factor, only when you select” Factor” as a

calibration type. (-99999.999 to 99999.999)
Applicable to “Factor” and “Linear”; Applicable to only “Linear”;

: will execute S1 blank measurement : The reagent blank is defined as S1.
(You don’t have to set s1 to ASP at calibration
: will NOT execute S1 blank measurement. measurement.)
15. After the completion of selecting or inputting the necessary parameters for calibration, click the Save
button. This action makes all the settings effective.
The Print button for printing calibration parameters will be available after the save action.
16. The reagent lot number (R1 or R2) used for calibration measurement will be displayed.
If there is any information of a lot number on the barcode label attached on a reagent bottle, its number
will be displayed. As you switch “New” and “Old”, this lot number will change consistently. (See item-
10.)
17. The date and time executed a full calibration will be shown (yyyy / mm / dd hh:mm)
As you switch “New” and “Old”, this date and time of measurement will change consistently. (See item-
10.)
18. A graph of s calibration result will be shown.
On the graph chart, the red line shows the Full-calibration result and the blue line shows Re-calibration.
The horizontal axis is concentration and vertical is absorbance.
19. The latest reagent blank measurement (mAbs/10) its measurement date (yyyy / mm / dd hh:mm) will be
shown.
20. The latest S1 blank measurement (mAbs/10) its measurement date and time (yyyy / mm / dd hh:mm) will
be shown. When the calibration type is “Factor” and “Linear”, it is available.
21. This will be able to simulate a concentration conversion.

This simulator enables to convert an absorbance into a concentration, using the current calibration curve.

2-38
Type: Select either “Master” or “Work” as an applicable calibration curve.

Absorbance: Type an absorbance value that will be calibrated.
Conc: A concentration value after converting will be displayed.
Recalculation : By clicking this button, a converting calculation starts.
16 Reagent Lot Number 17 Calibration measurement date and time
08/10/2008 11:24
18 Calibration graph
19 Reagent blank and its

measurement date and time
20 S1 blank and its measurement date and time

21 Concentration converting simulator

2-39
2.5.3 Serial Dilution Setting

By auto diluting of a standard sample that is the maximum concentration, the analyzer produces some
standard samples and executes calibration measurement, called this serial dilution.
This fuction can automatically caluculate an appropriate amount of dilution relevant to necessary each
standard sample on tab menu [Serial Dilu] of the job menu [Calibration(F7)].
By specifying the Method number on the screen, it will get a right dilute concetration, which is relevant to
other standard samples, from maximum standard samples defined on the tab menu [Reg Calib]. (See Chapter 3
“3.3.2 [Serial Dilut]”)
2.5.4 Multi Standard Setting

This can be alocated some method to a standard sample. We call this “Multi Standard”. In advance to
calibration measurement, define “Multi Standard” samples on the tab menu [Multi-Std] of the job menu
[Calibration (F7)] (See Chap 3 “3.3.3 [Multi-Std]”)
2.5.5 Confirmation of ISE Calibration

For confirmation of ISE calibration result, go to see the Tab Menu [ISE] of the [Calibration (F7)]. (See
Chapter 3 “3.3.4 [ISE)”)
2.5 Calibration Setting

2.5.3 Serial Dilution Setting / 2.5.4 Multi Standard Setting /
2.5.5Configuration of ISE Calibration
2-40
Chapter 2 Measurement procedure
2.6 Confirmation of System Parameters

A variety of condition settings for the whole system can be set as the system parameter by job menu
[System (F9)]. When you execute the daily measurement work, the various settings and the definitions as
the system parameters must be executed in advance.
There are the following tab menus for setting of the system parameters.
(1) Setup: System settings

(2) Reagent: Registration of Reagent information (Refer to Chapter 2 “2.2 Reagent
Registration”)
(3) Login: Login with password and Confirmation of software versions
(4) Backup: Backup of data
(5) Setup2: Definition of range of Technical Range
(6) Define: Definition of Patient Information basic data
(7) Range: Definition of Normal Range name
It is recommended that the backup of the system parameter and the measurement data be executed
regularly to prepare for unexpected problems.
Refer to Chapter 3 “3.5 System Menu” for the specific content and the setting method of tab menu.
2.6 Confirmation of System Parameters
2-41
2.7 Test Selection Setting

The measurement schedule about which Method is executed to each sample is necessary before the
measurement of samples is executed. This measurement schedule is called “Test Selection” or “Test Order”.
Unique sample ID numbers are added to the all samples (Patient sample, Standard sample, Control sample,
Blank sample) placed in ASP and the ID number identifies them. Therefore, Test Selection is to define about
which Method is executed to each sample.
<Sample Barcode Management>

The Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) has a barcode reader as standard equipment. Therefore, if the barcode
labels that have the barcode information of the sample ID number are stuck and are read with the ASP
barcode reader, it can be automatically recognized which slot position in the ASP the sample is at. Therefore,
you only have to define the relation between the sample ID number and the Method about the test selection
in this case.
<Sample Barcode non-management>

When there sample ID barcode management is not applied, the relation between the sample ID number
and the Method should be defined as Test Selection Setting after deciding about which ASP slot the sample
which has certain sample ID number is in.
This system responds to both of Sample Barcode Management and Sample Barcode non-management.
Test Selection Setting is done basically by the Menu [Run (F5)] - [Selection]. However, Standard sample,
Multiple standard sample, Dilution standard sample, Control sample, Blank sample, ISE wash solution and SPT
wash solution except Patient sample can be placed at installation slot only for sample cup (the slot number I01 to
I20) in the innermost circumference block in ASP. This innermost circumference block has the cold insulation
function to prevent the liquid in cups from evaporating and its inside is kept 10°C or less for cold insulation. The
samples placed in that area is the Sample Barcode non-management. Test Selection Setting for the innermost
circumference block is done by tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Std QC]. (Refer to “2.7.2. Special Test Selection: [Run
(F5)]-[Std QC]”)
When you place a sample cup in the ASP slot# I01 to I20 for a long time without applying, it is recommended
to wrap proper waxed paper around the cup to protect evaporation and condensation for the liquid.
<The execution sequence of test selection>

The execution sequence of test selection is as follows.
First the content of tab menu [Std QC] is executed and then the content of tab menu [Selection] is executed.
2-42
2.7.1 Normal Test Selection:[Run (F5)]-[ Selection]
SID List
Display area of Ordinary Method
Display area of ISE Method
Display area of Profile
The background color of warning for Method display (Ordinary Method and ISE Method) is shown in
the table below.
Method
Priority background Meaning of warning notice
color
The calibration measurement has not been executed or
High Red
the time limit of calibration has passed.
The control measurement has not been executed or
Middle Yellow
the time limit of control has passed.
The method is not executable because its method is set
--------- Dark Gray on the mask. Refer to “2.7.1.9 Mask Setting” to release
the mask condition.

2.7.1 Normal Test Selection: [Run (f5)]-[Selection]
2-43
2.7.1.1 Normal Sample (Normal)
Measurement will be proceeded in ASP position order.
<Order setting procedure>

1 Specify the ASP slot number to place the sample.
In the case of Barcode Management : Select “Blank” without the slot number.
In the case of Barcode Non-management : Select the slot number from drop-down menu.
outer circumference 36 (1 to 36),
middle circumference 36 (37 to 72)
2 Select “Normal” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 When using the barcode reader for the keyboard, click this “BCR” box ON.
4 Select the type of the sample cup.
Select either “Normal”or “Pediatric” from drop-down menu.
However, The selection of “Pediatric” becomes effective only for Normal samples or Emergency samples.
5 Set the sample ID number (SID)
When making high-order digit the fixed number, defining can be done by tab menu [System (F9)] –
[Setup] in advance. After defining, you have only to input low-order digit. However, that becomes
effective only when “Normal” of sample cup has been selected.
When “Pediatric” has been selected, inputting the SID number of four digits becomes possible and
“8999” of upper 4 figures is automatically added. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code”)
As the default, SID number is automatically produced, that SID number is same as the designated ASP
slot number in “Pos”. (In the case of barcode non-management.)
6 Set the Patient ID number. Selecting ones have been set by tab menu [Patient] from the drop-down menu
is possible. When PID number is inputted into the “PID” box, if its PID is not registered in advance, the
pop-up screen for definition of patient information is automatically popped up to determine the patient
information, and its pup-up screen is disappeared after completing the definition. (Note: The pop-up screen
is very close to “3.5.6 [Define]”.)
7 When being still Normal sample and treat as the Emergency sample(STAT), click this “E” box
(Emergency sample specification) ON.
8 Set a drawing blood date from the calender by pulling down the drop-down menu.
1 ASP Slot number 2 Sample type 3 Keyboard BCR 5 Sample ID number 6 Patient ID number
4 Sample cup type 7 Emergency sample specification 8 Drawing blood date

2-44
9 Select the sample category. Select Common or Serum or Urine or Plasma from drop-down menu.
10 Select the type of normal range taht is the evaluation standard of measurement result.
Default is “Human Auto”.
Human Auto means that the type of the normal range is automatically selected from the sex and the age
of the patient which was set by tab menu [Patient] and the judgment is performed by that reference value.
However, when the age of the patient is uncertain, it is treated as the middle generation (G2).
11 Select Doctor name and Place and Sample Comment from each drop-down menu. It is necessary to set
these information beforehand. When they have not been set, the drop-down menu is blank. These setting
information is added to the printer output of the measurement result.
9 Sample Categories 10 Normal range type 11 Doctor name, Place, Sample comment
SID List
Note:
When both type of Samples, with and
without barcode, are mingled in the SID list,
the sample with barcode is displayed at the
end of SID list without number of “Pos”.
12 Method (Ordinary item) 13 Measurement number of times
12 Specify the Method. When clicking the box on the left side of Method name ON, taht Method is orderd.
ISE and the profile are in the lower part than the display area of the Ordinary Method.
13 Specify the measurement number of times to the Method from drop-down menu of the “Number” box.
Default value is once. Allowable range is 1 ~ 99. When this repetition measurement number of times is two
or more, the rerun is not executed (when being outside the technical range and outside the prozone check
range, the rerun becomes the object).
14 Then fixing the setting contents, click the Save button in the lower part of screen. After fixing them, the
ASP sample position number and its Sample ID number (SID) are displayed in Order list on the left side of
screen. In the case of the Barcode management sample, the ASP sample position number is blank. Execute
from the procedure-1 when continuously executing the Test Selection of another sample.
After saving the setting contents, SID number is automatically counted up by one.
14 Setting save button

2-45
<Order Copy Procedure (in the case of the barcode management)>

After proceeding the procedures-13;
15 When wanting to apply the present content of the test order to two or more sample IDs, click the “C/D”
box ON.
16 Input the copy final sample ID number.
17 Click the Save button. The present test order is continuously set to the final sample ID.
15 Copy Function ON 16 Copy Destination Final sample ID number

20 Group Delete Function ON 21 Delete Final sample ID number
18 SID List

2-46
<Order Copy Procedure (in the case of the barcode non-management)>

After proceeding the procedures-13;
15 When wanting to apply the present content of the test order to two or more sample IDs, click the “C/D”
box ON.
16 Set ASP slot number of the copy end sample or input the copy destination final sample ID number.
When the copy end slot number is set, the present test order will be automatically copied between the
copy source slot number and the copy end slot number. The setting box for the end sample ID number of
copy destination becomes unavailable.
When the sample ID number of the copy end is inputted to its box, the present test order will be
continuously copied until the end sample ID number of copy destination.
17 When click the Save button, the copy of the order is executed.
4. Copy source Sample position 16. Copy end sample position 15. Copy function ON
21. Delete beginning sample position 21. Deletion end sample position 20. Group Delete function ON
18 SID List
16. Copy Destination Final

sample ID number

2-47
<Deletion Procedure of Order>

18 The SID numbers of all samples set in ASP such as current Normal sample, Standard sample, Control
sample, etc. are displayed in “SID List” on the left of the screen.
19 When deleting the orders of all samples, click the Delete All button.
When delete the order of a specified sample, click the sample ID number (SID) or the patient ID number
(PID) in the order list and then the order state of its sample (Method) is displayed, and so click the Delete
button after confirmation.
20 When deleting the orders of a group of sample IDs within the range, click the “C/D” box ON.
21 In the case of the barcode management sample, input the Delete final sample ID number. (See page 2-46.)
In the case of barcode non-management sample, set the Delete beginning slot number and the Deletion
end slot number in the lower “Pos” part. (See page 2-47.)
22 Click the Delete button. 19/22 Delete button
23 When clicking the Delete or Delete All button, the sample IDs to delete are deleted from the order list on
the screen, and the screen becomes in the status to wait clicking the Save button or the Cancel button.
When clicking the Cancel button, deletion becomes invalid and the former state returns.
When clicking the Save button, the following alert messages is displayed at the center of the screen by
the pop-up to confirm the deletion execution. When actually executing deletion, click the OK button.
When invalidating deleting, click the Cancel button.
message for Delete
message for Delete All

2-48
2.7.1.2 Emergency Sample (STAT)
Measurement will be proceeded in ASP position order same as normal sample.
<Order setting procedure>
1 Specify the ASP slot number to place the sample from drop-down menu. (1 ~ 72)
2 Select “STAT” as the sample type from drop-down menu. These are same as
“2.7.1.1 Normal
Sample (Normal)”.
3 When using the bar-code reader for the keyboard, click this “BCR” box ON.
4 Select the typ of sample cup. (This is similar to Procedure of Normal sample-4)
5 Set sample ID number. Input the numeric code of 3 digits.

When Normal has been selected as the Sample cup, “99000” of upper 5 figures is automatically added.
When Pediatric has been selected as the Sample cup, the numerical value of 2 digits can be input as
Sample ID number and “990009” of last 6 digits is automatically added. (Refer to “1.4.2 Sample
Identification Code”.)
As the default, SID number tht is same as the designated ASP slot number in “Pos” is produced
automatically to save the operator’s labor.
6 Set the Patient ID number (PID). (This is similar to Procedure of Normal sample-6)
Procedure of Normal sample-7 doesn't exist in the case of Emergency sample.
The same procedures as from procedure-8 to procedure-13 of Normal sample are applied in the case of
Emergency sample.
5. Sample ID number
This is similar from

<Order copy procedure > ( In the case of Barcode Management) > Setting Procedure-14 to
Setting Procedure-22 of
<Order copy procedure > ( In the case of Barcode Non-management) > “2.7.1.1 Normal Sample
<Delete procedure of order> (Normal)”.

2.7.1.2 Emergency Sample (STAT)
2-49
2.7.1.3 Replicate Sample (Replicate)

< Order Setting / Delete Procedure >
In the case of Barcode Management: Select “Blank” without the slot number.
In the case of Barcode Non-management: Select the slot number from drop-down menu.
outer circumference 36 (1 ~ 36),
middle circumference 36 (37 ~ 72)
2 Select “Replicate” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 When using the barcode reader for the keyboard, click this “BCR” box ON.
4 Specify the sample ID number. Inputting the numeric value of 2 digits is possible and “9400” of upper 4
figures and “01” of last 2 digits are automatically added. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code”).
As the default, SID number is automatically produced, that SID number is same as the designated ASP
slot number in “Pos”.
5 Select sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
6 Select the type of the normal range taht is the evaluation standard of the measurement result. Default is
“Human Auto”.
Human Auto means that the type of the normal range is automatically selected from the sex and the age
of the patient set by tab menu [Patient] and the judgment is performed by that reference value. However,
when the age of the patient is uncertain, it is treated as the middle generation (G2).
7 Specify the Method. When clicking the box on the left side of Method name ON, that Method is ordered.
ISE and the profile are in the lower part than the display area of the ordinary Method.
8 Specify the measurement number of times to the specified Method from drop-down menu of the
“Number” box. Allowable range is 1 ~ 99. In case of Replicate sample, auto-rerun is not available.
1.ASP Slot Number 2 Sample Type 3 Keyboards BCR 4 Sample ID Number
5 Sample category
6 Normal Range type
SID List
Note:
When both type of Samples, with and
without barcode, are mingled in the SID list,
the sample with barcode is displayed at the
end of SID list without number of “Pos”. 7 Method list（Normal Method） 8 Measurement number of times
9 Click the Save button in the lower part of screen to fix setting contents. When fixed, in the case of the
sample of Barcode Non-management, the ASP Sample position number and its Sample ID number (SID)
are displayed in “SID List” in the left side of the screen. In the case of the sample of Barcode
management, the ASP Sample position number is the blank. Execute from the procedure-1 when
continuously doing Test Selection of another sample.
After saving the setting contents, SID number is automatically counted up by one.

2-50
10 When Delete, Click the SID number that shows Replicate sample in “SID List” and click the Delete
button. Specified sample will be delete from the list on the screen, and click the Save button next. Alert
message of deletion confirmation
“Warning ! Is it all right if the specified order is deleted ?”
is displayed at the center of the screen by the Pop-up. Executing delete, click the OK button.in the Pop-up
message.
10 Delete button 9 Setting save button

10 Delete determination button
<Order Copy Procedure>

11 When applying the order of the present sample ID number (SID) to the other sample ID, after setting
sample ID number of “SID” part by Procedure-4, click the “C/D” box ON.
12 In the case of Barcode Management : Input the Copy end sample ID number (2digits) in the Input
part right under the “SID” box.
In the case of Barcode Non-management : Set the Copy end sample position number in the lower “pos”
part. Select the position number from drop-down menu.
13 Click the Save button and the test order will be copyed within the range of the samples which is set by
any one of above-mentioned method.
UPPER: 1 Copy source Sample position UPPER: 4 Copy source Sample ID number
LOWER: 12 Copy end Sample position 11 Copy Function ON LOWER: 12 Copy end Sample ID number
12. Copy execution button

2-51
2.7.1.4 Standard Sample (Standard)

The Standard sample to which the barcode management is applied can be judged about all necessary
information in the inside of the system from the content of the barcode label. Therefore, place the Standard
samples of necessary number in ASP and no necessary to set the order. When samples are not managed by the
barcode, it is necessary to set those Test Order according to the following procedures.
<Order Setting / Delete Procedure>
1 Specify the slot nummber of ASP to place the standerd sample from drop-down menu. (1 - 72)
2 Select “Standard” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Select sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
4 Set Method. (Only one type can be selected.)
5 Specify the number of sample in “No” part. For Full-calibration, select “Full” and for Re-calibration,
select the number of Sandard sample to place (which standard sample). (Refer to “2.5.2. Registration and
setting for calibration.”)
6 Click Save button and the oder is fixed and the SID number of calibrator is displayed in the “SID List”.
(Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code”.).
7 In case for two or more calibrators by Re-calibration, repeat from Procedure-1 to Procedure-6.
8 As for delete, click the SID number that shows the Sandard sample in “SID List” and click the Delete
button. The specified sample is deleted from the list on the screen, and so click the Save button next.
Alert message of deletion confirmation
is displayed at the center of the screen by the Pop-up. To delete, click the OK button.in the Pop-up
message.
1. ASP slot number 2. Sample type 5. Number of Standard Sample 3. Sample category 4. Method List
SID List
6. Setting save button
8. Delete button
8. Delete determination button

2.7.1.4 Standard Sample (Standard)
2-52
2.7.1.5 Multi Standard Sample (Multi Standard)

When the barcode management is applied, all necessary information can be judged in the inside of the
system from the content of the barcode label. Therefore, place the Multi Standard samples of necessary
number in ASP and no necessary to set the order. When samples are not managed by the barcode, it is
necessary to set those Test Order according to the following procedures.
1 Specify the slot nummber of ASP to place the Multi-standerd sample from drop-down menu. (1 - 72)
2 Select “Multi Standard” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Select the Sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu. (Follow the
content registered by Tab Menu [Calibration (F7)] – [Multi-Std]).
4 Select the Multi Standard name from drop-down men.
5 The method is orderd according to the content registered by tab menu [Calibration (F7)] – [Multi-Std].
6 Specify the number of sample in “No” part. For Full-calibration, select “Full” and for Re-calibration, slect
the number of Standard sample to place (which standard sample). (Refer to “2.5.2. Registration×and setting
for calibration”.)
7 Click the Save button and the oder is fixed and the SID number of Multi-standard Sample is displayed in
the “SID List”. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code”.)
8 As for Delete, Click the SID number that shows the Multi standard sample in “SID List” and click the
Delete button. The specified sample is delete from the list on the screen, and so click the Save button next.
message.
6 Number of
1 ASP slot number 2 Sample type 4 Multi-standard name 3 Sample category
Standard Sample
5 Method List
SID List


2-53
2.7.1.6 Dilution Standard Sample (Serial Dilution)

Before executing the test selection setting, the necessary dilution rate and the dilution stage need to be
decided in tab menu [Calibration (F7)] – [Serial Dilut].
system from the content of the barcode label. Therefore, place the required dilution standard sample in the
ASP and the order setting is not required. When samples are not managed by the barcode, it is necessary to set
the Test Order according to the following procedures.
1 Specify the ASP slot nummber to place the dilution standard sample from the drop-down menu.
2 Select “Serial Dilution” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Select the sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
4 Specify the Method. Click the box on the left side of a Method name and this Method will be orderd.
Follow the Setting contents of tab menu [Serial Dilut]on job menu [Calibration (F7)] about Procedure-3 and
Procedure-4.
5 Click the Save button and the oder is fixed then the SID number of the dsilution standard sample is
displayed in the “SID List”. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code.”).
6 As for Delete, click the SID number that shows the dsilution standard sample in “SID List” and click the
Delete button. The specified sample is deleted from the list on the screen and so click the Save button next.
message.
1 ASP slot number 2 Sample type 3 Sample category
SID List 4 Method list

6 Delete button

2-54
2.7.1.7 Blank Sample (Blank)

Before executing the Test selection setting of the blank sample, “Enable S1 Blank (Factor or Linear)” needs
to be set by tab menu [Parameter (F6)] – [Normal2].
system from the content of the barcode label. Therefore, place the required blank sample in ASP and the order
setting is not required. When samples are not managed by the barcode, it is necessary to set the Test Order
according to the following procedures.
1 Specify the ASP slot nummber to place the blank sample from drop-down menu.
2 Select “Blank” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Select the sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
4 Only the Methods whose “Blank measurement enable” was set by tab menu [Parameter (F6)] – [Normal2]
has been orderd. (You cannot change the order here.)
5 Click Save button and the oder is fixed then the SID number of the blank sample is displayed in the “Sid
List”. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code.”).
6 As for Delete, click the SID number that shows the blank sample in “SID List” and click the Delete button.
The specified sample is deleted from the list on the screen and so click the Save button next. Alert message
of deletion confirmation
is displayed at the center of the screen by the Pop-up. Todelete, click the OK button.in the Pop-up
message.
1 ASP slot number 2 Sample type 3 Sample category
4 Method list
SID List

6 Delete button

2-55
2.7.1.8 Control Sample (Control)

Before executing the Test selection setting of the control sample, it is ecessary to register the name of the
control sample by tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Registration] and set the Method which is applied on tab menu
[Settings] and the accuracy management data..
When the barcode management are applied, all necessary information can be judged in the inside of the
system from the content of the barcode label. Therefore, place the required control samples in the ASP and the
order setting is not required. When samples are not managed by the barcode, it is necessary to set the Test
Order according to the following procedures.
1 Specify the ASP slot nummber to place the control sample from drop-down menu.
2 Select “control” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Select the name of the control sample from drop-down menu.
4 The Methods which was set by tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings] has been order.
5 Clicking the Save button and the oder is fixed then the SID number of the control sample is displayed on
the Order List. (Refer to “1.4.2. Sample Identification Code”.)
6 As for Delete, click the SID number that shows the control sample in “SID List” and click the Delete
button. The specified sample is deleted from the list on the screen and so click the Save button next. Alert
is displayed at the center of the screen by the Pop-up. To deletion, click the OK button in the Pop-up
message.
1 ASP slot number 2 Sample type 3 Control name
SID List 4 Method list


2-56
2.7.1.9 Mask Setting (Mask)

The Method that can be measured on this analyzer, that is to say, about the Method which meets the
condition that the chemistry parameter is set and the calibration curve exists and the necessary reagent for the
measurement exists in RCU, too, even if the test order exists, forbidding the actual measurement is enabled.
This is called “Mask settings”.
When the mask is ON (no check mark), its method is not applied to the measurement for specimen (include
profile), control and calibration (include multi-standard).
<Mask settings / Procedure of release>
1 Select “Mask” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
2 Select Normal / Control / Standard as the Mask Type.
3 The mask state of the Method is displayed.
The Methods with check mark in the check box of the Method name show the mask off, and they
become measurable Methods. When clicking the check mark again, the mark disappears and the Method
becomes the mask on, and becomes the measurement forbiddance Method.
4 When making all Methods the mask on, click the Mask All button.
5 After that, the button changes to the Clear All button. When clicking this button, the masks of all Methods
are reset, and all Methods become measurable Methods.
6 When clicking Save button, the mask state of the Method list is fixed.
NOTE: “SID Llist” in the left of the screen only displays the current order state of measurable Method and
there is no influence on the state of the mask.
No check mark: Mask ON (Disable measurement)

1 Sample type Check mark: Mask OFF (Enable measurement) 2 Mask Type
SID List
3 Method list
4 All item mask setting

button
6 Setting save button 5 All method’s mask release

button

2.7.1.9 Mask Settings (Mask)
2-57
2.7.1.10. Orderless Sample (Orderless)

Before executing the orderless measurement, the Method that permits measuring can be selected beforehand.
NOTE：The Orderless measurement means that when “Shift” key and the “F1” key are pushed at the same
time, all measurable Methods of all samples that exist in ASP will be measured.
<Selection procedure of Method>
1 Select “Orderless” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
2 Select sample type. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
3 Select the type of Normal range taht is the evaluation standard of measurement results. Default is “Human
Auto”.
Human Auto means that the type of the normal range is automatically selected from patient's sex and
age set by Taab Menu [Patient] and the judgment is performed by that reference value. However, when the
patient's age is uncertain, it is treated as the middle generation (G2).
4 Set No Permission / Permission of measurement by the Method list.
The Methods that have the check mark in the check box in the left side of the Method name are
measurement permission Methods. Methods that don’t have the check mark on that erea are no permission
Methods. Every time the check box is clicked, the check mark alternately changes between ON and OFF.
5 Specify the measurement number of times to the Method from drop-down menu of “Number” box.
Default is one time. Allowable range is 1 ~ 99. When this replicate number is two or more, the auto-rerun
is not executed. (when the result is over the Technical Range and Prozone Check Range, the auto-rerun
becomes available.)
6 Clicking the Save button and the Method is fixed.
1 Sample type 2 Sample category 3 Normal Range type
5 Measurement number of times
4 Method list

2.7.1.10 Orderless Sample (Orderless)
2-58
2.7.1.11. Online Sample (Online)

“On Line Batch” or “On Line Real time” should be selected beforehand as Host Communication Mode by
tab menu [System (F9)] – [Setup] to execute the online measurement. In case of Online real time and sample
barcode management, the order is automatically established by the communication between the host computer
and the analyzer. The order setting explained here is to confirm the order. However, in case of sample barcode
non-management, it is necessary to relate the ASP slot number to the sample ID number beforehand to specify
the slot number of ASP where the sample is mounted. Therefore, execute processing according to the
following order setting procedure.
<Order setting procedure >

In the case of Barcode Management : Select “Blank” without the slot number.
In the case of Barcode Non-management : Select the slot number from drop-down menu.
outer positions 36 (1 ~ 36),
middle positions 36 (37 ~ 72)
2 Select “Online” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
3 Click this “BCR” box ON when using the barcode reader for the keyboard.
4 Set the sample ID number (SID)

When the high-order digit is made the fixed number, it is possible to define it beforehand by tab menu
[System (F9)] – [Setup]. After defining it, you only have to input only the low order digit of the sample ID
number.
5 Click the Save button. Then, the sample ID number to be placed is fixed.
When fixed, in case of the barcode non-management, the ASP Sample Position Number (Pos) and the
Sample ID Number (SID) are displayed in “SID List” in the left side of screen. In case of the barcode
management, the ASP Sample Position Number (Pos) is the blank. Execute from the procedure-1 when
continuously setting another sample ID number. Moreover, if the sample ID numbers are consecutive, the
use of the copy function is very effective to set those samples. Refer to after-mentioned “<Sample group
setting · delete procedure>”.
6 Click the Acquire orders button and the order information of the Method etc. will be sent from the host
computer.
7 The sample order state is displayed in the order Method list.(Editing is impossible)

2.7.1 Normal Test Selection: Run (f5)]-[Selection]
2.7.1.11 Online Sample (Online)
2-59
1 ASP slot number 2 Sample type 3 Keyboard BCR 4 Sample ID
7 Order item list
SID List
6 Host order demand 5 Sample ID save

2-60
<Group setting and Delete procedure of samples (In the case of Barcode Management)>
8 Click the “C/D” box ON.
9 Input the Copy (or Delete) beginning sample ID number.
10 Input the Copy (or Delete) end sample ID number.
11 Click the Save button (Delete button).

Clicking the Save button and a series of sample ID number (SID) will be added and displayed in the
order list.
Clicking the Delete button and a series of sample ID number (SID) will be deleted from the order list on
the screen then click the Save button next. Alert message of deletion confirmation
message.
12 Click the Acquire orders button for the order confirmation after copying (or deleting) completed.
8 Copy (Delete) function ON 10 Copy (Delete) End sample 9 Copy (Delete) Beginning sample
number number
12 Host order demand 11 Group SID deletion 11 Group SID copy execution

2-61
<Group setting and Delete procedure of samples (In the case of Barcode Non-management)>
8 Click the “C/D” box ON.
9 Input the Copy (or Delete) ASP slot number of Beginning sample placing.
10 Input the Copy (or Delete) ASP slot number of End sample placing.
11 Click the Save button (Delete button).

Clicking the Save button and a series of sample ID number (SID) will be added and displayed in the
order list.
Click the Delete button and a series of sample ID number (SID) will be deleted from the order list on the
screen then click the Save button next. Alert message of deletion confirmation
message.
12. Click the Acquire orders button for the order confirmation after copying (or deleting) completed.
9. Copy (Delete) Beginning sample 10. Copy (Delete) End sample

number number
8. Copy (Delete) function

ON

2-62
2.7.1.12 ISE Calibration

It is necessary to specify the ASP installation site of necessary ISE standard (Calibrant-B) for the ISE
calibration measurement. . When the sample barcode management is applied, the installation site becomes
clear by reading the barcode label. However, in the case of the sample barcode non-management, specify /
delete the ASP slot number to place the ISE standard according to the following procedures.
1. Select the ASP slot number to place the ISE standard from drop-down menu. (1 ~ 72)
2. Select “ISE Calibration” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2. “ISE Calibration” Designation
3. Click the Save button

3 Set save button
5 Delete button 5 Delete determination button
4. The ASP slot number and the SID number “96000001” of the ISE standard sample are displayed in “SID
List”.
4 SID List
5. As for delete, click the SID number that shows the ISE standard in “SID List” and click the Delete button.
The specified ISE standard is deleted from the list on the screen and then click the Save button next. Alert
is displayed at the center of the screen by the Pop-up. When actually executing deletion, click the OK
button.in the Pop-up message.
2.7.1.12 ISE Calibration
2-63
2.7.1.13 ISE Cleaning

It is necessary to specify the ASP installation site of necessary ISE wash solution (ISE Cleaner) for Cleaning
treatment of the ISE module. When the sample barcode management is applied, the installation site becomes
clear by reading the barcode label. However, in the case of the sample barcode non-management, specify /
delete the ASP slot number to place the ISE wash solution according to the following procedures.
1 Select the ASP slot number to place the ISE wash fluid from drop-down menu. (1 ~ 72)
2 Select “ISE Cleaning” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “ISE Cleaning” Designation
3 Click the Save button.

4 The ASP slot number and the SID number “96000101” of the ISE Cleaner are displayed in “SID List”.
4 SID List
5 As for Delete, click the SID number that shows the ISE Cleaner in “SID List” and click the Delete button.
The specified ISE Cleaner is deleted from the list on the screen and then click the Save button next. Alert
message.

2-64
2.7.1.14 SPT Wash

It is necessary to specify the ASP installation site of necessary wash solution (SPT wash solution) for
Cleaning treatment of the SPT nozzle. When the sample barcode management is applied, the installation site
becomes clear by reading the barcode label. However, in the case of the sample barcode non-management,
specify / delete the ASP slot number to place the nozzle wash solution according to the following procedures.
1 Select the ASP slot number to place the SPT nozzle wash solution from drop-down menu. (1 ~ 72)
2 Select “SPT Wash” as the sample type from drop-down menu.
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “SPT Wash” Designation
3 Click the Save button.

4 The ASP slot number and the SID number “9600201” of the SPT wash solution are displayed in “SID List”.
4 SID List
5 As for Delete, click the SID number that shows the SPT wash solution in “SID List” and click the Delete
button. The specified SPT wash solution is deleted from the list on the screen and so click the Save button
next. Alert message of deletion confirmation
message.

2.7.1.14 SPT Wash
2-65
2.7.2 Special Test Selection: [Run (F5)] – [Std QC]

The innermost 20 slots (Slot #I01 to #I20) of the ASP are used for special samples such as standard samples,
control samples or washing solutions, and only accommodate cups can be used. Therefore, barcode control is not
available. It is required to perform settings for slot numbers and sample types in advance.
2.7.2.1. Standard Sample (Standard)
<Slot Number Setting/Delete Procedure>
1. Select the number of the slot where the cup is placed from the drop-down menu.
2. Select the “Standard” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the sample category. Select one sample category from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from the
drop-down menu.
4. Select the “Auto” function for execution mode. Select Invalid / Start / Auto / Start+Auto from the
drop-down menu. (Refer to “3.1.7 [Std QC]”.)
- Invalid: The measurement of this test order is suppressed.
- Start: The measurement is automatically performed when the first round of this test order is
started. After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to “Invalid”.
- Auto: At the time when the lot number of reagent is changed or the time-out period for calibration
goes over, the measurement of this test order is automatically performed. These conditions
should be set in the tab menu [Calibration] – [Reg Calib] in advance.
- Start+Auto: The measurement of this test order is automatically performed when the first round of this
test order is started or the lot number of reagent is changed or the time-out period for
calibration goes over. These conditions should be set in the tab menu [Calibration] – [Reg
Calib] in advance. After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to “Auto”.
5. Select the measurement method. Click the box left of the method name and a check mark appears then the
method becomes effective. Click the checkmark again and the checkmark disappears then the method
becomes non-effective.
6. Designate the number of samples at the “No.” section from the pull-down menu. To perform full
calibration, select “Full”. To perform partial calibration (recalibration), select the number of standard
samples you will place. (Refer to “2.5.2 Registration and Setting for Calibration”)
7. Click the Save button to decide the order. Calibrator SID number will be displayed on the “SID List”.
(Refer to “1.4.2 Sample Identification Code”)
8. For the partial calibration (set more than one calibrator), repeat the procedures from 1 to 7.
9. To delete the standard sample, click the SID number indicating the standard sample in the “SID List”, and
click Delete button. After the designated standard sample is shown as deleted, click Save button. The
warning message
“Warning! Is it all right if the specified order is deleted?”
to confirm the delete action, will be pop-upped in the middle of the screen. If you are sure to execute the
delete action, click on the OK button in the pop-up message.
2.7 Test Selection

2.7.2 Special Test Selection: ［Run (f5)］-［Std QC］
2.7.2.1 Standard Sample
2-66
1. ASP Slot Number Designation 2 ”Standard” selections 3. Sample category selection 4. “Auto” selection
6. Number of Standard Sample selection
5. Measurement Method Selection
9. Delete button 7. Setting save button

2.7 Test Selection

2.7.2.1 Standard Sample
2-67

2. Select the “Multi Standard” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the sample category. Select one sample category from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from the
drop-down menu.
drop-down menu. (Same as the 4. of “2.7.2.1 Standard Sample”.)
5. Select the Multi Standard name from the drop-down menu.
6. Defined measurement methods can be referred on the tab menu [Calibration (F7)] – [Multi Std]. The
measurement methods with checkmarks in the left boxes will be measured.
7. Designate the number of samples at the “No.” section from the pull-down menu. To perform full
calibration, select “Full”. To perform partial calibration (recalibration), select the number of standard
samples you will place. (Refer to “2.5.2 Registration and Setting for Calibration”)
8. Clicking the Save button top decide the order. Calibrator SID number will be displayed on the “SID List”.
9. For the partial calibration (to set more than one calibrators), repeat the procedures from 1 to 8.
10. To delete the multi standard sample, click the SID number indicating the multi standard sample in the
“SID List”, and click Delete button. After the designated multi standard sample is shown as deleted, click
Save button. The warning message
to confirm the delete action, will be pop-upped in the middle of the screen. When you are sure to execute the
delete action, click the OK button in the pop-up message.
1. ASP Slot Number Designation 2 ”Multi Standard” selection 3 Sample category selection
7 Number of Standard 5. Multi-standard name selection

Sample selection
4. “Auto” selection
SID List 6. Measurement Method Confirmation

2.7 Test Selection

2.7.2.2 Multi Standard Sample
2-68

2. Select the “Serial Dilution” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from the drop-down menu.
5. Select the measurement method. Click the box left of the method name and check mark appears then the
method becomes effective. When you click the checkmark (again), the checkmark disappears and the
method becomes non-effective.
6. Clicking the Save button finalizes the order. Dilution calibrator SID number will be displayed on the “SID
List”. (Refer to “1.4.2 Sample Identification Code”)
7. To delete the dilution calibrator, click the SID number indicating the dilution calibrator in the “SID List”,
and click Delete button. After the designated dilution calibrator is shown as deleted, click Save button. The
warning message
to confirm the delete action, will be pop-upped in the middle of the screen. When you are sure to execute the
delete action, click the OK button in the pop-up message.
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “Serial Dilution” selection 3 Sample category selection
SID List 5 Measurement Method selections
6 Setting Save Button

7 Delete Button 7 Delete Save Button
2.7 Test Selection

2-69

2. Select the “Control” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the Control Sample name from the drop-down menu.
4. Select the “Auto” function for execution mode. Select one of Invalid / Start / Auto / Start+Auto from the
drop-down menu.
- Invalid: The measurement of this test order is suppressed.
- Start: The measurement is automatically performed when the first round of this test order is
started. After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to “Invalid”.
- Auto: At the time when the test count is reached the specified numbers (“Auto test interval”) or
the times are passed over the specified interval time (“Minutes”), the measurement of this
test order is automatically performed. These conditions should be set in the tab menu
[QC (F8)] – [Settings] in advance.
- Start+Auto: When the first round of this test order is started, the measurement is automatically
performed. And at the time when the test count is reached the specified numbers or the
times are passed over the specified interval time, the measurement of this test order is
automatically performed. These conditions should be set in the tab menu [QC (F8)] –
[Settings] in advance. After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to
“Auto”.
5. The measurement method(s), which have been set on the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings], are being
ordered.
6. Click the Save button to decide the order. Control Sample’s SID number will be displayed on the Order
List. (Refer to “1.4.2 Sample Identification Code”.)
7. To delete the control sample, click the SID number indicating the control sample in the “SID List” and
click Delete button. After the designated control sample is shown as deleted, click Save button. The
warning message
to confirm the delete action, will be pop-upped in the middle of the screen. When you are sure to execute
the delete action, click the OK button in the pop-up message.
1.ASP Slot Number Designation 2. “Control” Designation 3. Control Name Designation
5.Measurement Method Confirmation

SID List

2.7 Test Selection

2-70

< Slot Number Setting/Delete Procedure>
2. Select the “Blank” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Select the sample category. Select Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from the drop-down menu.
5. Only the measurement methods, which have been set as the “S1 Blank Measurement Enable” on the Tab
Menu [Normal2] of the Job Menu [Parameter (F6)], are being ordered. (Order change is not available here.)
6. Click the Save button to decide the order. Blank Sample SID number will be displayed on the “SID List”.
7. To delete the blank sample, click the SID number indicating the blank sample in the “SID List” and click
Delete button. After the designated blank sample is shown as deleted, click Save button. The warning
message
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “Blank” selection 3 Sample category selection
SID List
5. Measurement Method Confirmation

2.7 Test Selection

2-71

2. Select the “ISE Cleaning” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Clicking the Save button to decide the order. ISE Cleaner SID number (96000101) will be displayed on the
“SID List”. (Refer to “1.4.2 Sample Identification Code”.)
4. To delete the ISE Cleaner, click the SID number indicating the ISE Cleaner in the “SID List” and click
Delete button. After the designated ISE Cleaner is shown as deleted, click Save button. The warning
message
1 ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “ISE Cleaning” Designation
SID List

2.7 Test Selection

2-72
2.7.2.7 SPT Wash

2. Select the “SPT Wash” as a sample type from the drop-down menu.
3. Clicking the Save button to decide the order. SPT washing solution SID number (96000201) will be
displayed on the “SID List”. (Refer to “1.4.2 Sample Identification Code”)
4. To delete the SPT washing solution, click the SID number indicating the SPT washing solution in the “SID
List” and click Delete button. After the designated SPT washing solution is shown as deleted, click the
Save button. The warning message
1. ASP Slot Number Designation 2 “SPT Wash” Designation
SID List

2.7 Test Selection

2.7.2.7 SPT Wash
2-73
2.8 Sample Placement (ASP)

Blood collection tubes (Tube) and sample cups for normal samples, emergency samples, control samples and
standard samples can be placed into the two types of trays in the Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) of the analyzer.
The tray mechanism inside the ASP is equipped with a holder of double structure, which can hold samples as
described below.
1) Tube tray (capable of placing 72 samples in the inner and outer circles):
Barcode labels on the tubes enable barcode control. Sample cups placed on the lip of tubes with
barcode labels also can be controlled.
2) Sample cup tray (capable of placing 20 samples):
Sample cup tray is located in the innermost layer of the ASP and used to place special samples such as
standard samples or control samples. Barcode control of the sample cups placed here is not available.
Measurement begins with the test order for the sample cup tray in the innermost circle, and then the test order
for the tube tray is performed.
Note:
Sample volume of the cup installed in ASP should be satisfied the following requirements;
- Sample cup: More than 150μL
- Pediatric cup: Within 50 to 100μL
Sample cup tray (from #I01 to #I20)
Tube tray (Outer circle: from #1 to #36, Inner circle: from #37 to #72)
2.8 Sample Placement
2-74
2.8.1 Placement to Tube Tray

When you place standard samples on the tray, make sure to start placing from the position #1. Samples
placed after a patient sample cannot be calibrated adequately.
<Sample Placement>
1 Take out the tube tray from the Auto Sampler Unit (ASP).
2 Place the sample into a slot of the tray. The tube with a barcode label should be positioned in such a
way that its label faces the slit of the slot.
3 Set the tray into the ASP unit so that the inner guide pins can be fit into the two pin-holes (located
between Slot #40 and #41, and between Slot #57 and #58) of the tray.
Guide pin Barcode label

2.8.1 Placement to Tube Tray
2-75
2.8.2 Placement to Sample Cup Tray (Innermost slots of ASP)

<Sample Placement>
1 Take out the sample cup tray from the Auto Sampler Unit.
2 Place the cups containing samples (standard samples, control samples etc.) into the cup placement holes.
3 Set the sample cup tray into the unit inside so that the inner guide pin can be fit into the pin-hole (at Slot
#10) of the sample cup tray.
Note: When you place a cup for a long time without applying, it is recommended to wrap proper waxed
paper around the cup to protect evaporation / condensation for the liquid.

2.8.2 Placement to Sample Cup Tray
2-76
2.9 Confirmation of Reagent Remaining Volume

Prior to the measurement, you need to check if the necessary reagents are placed adequately in the
Reagent Container Unit (RCU) and to confirm the reagent remaining amount.
Information such as types and remaining volume of the reagents, which are placed inside the Reagent
Container Unit (RCU), can be confirmed on the tab menu [Inventory] of the job menu [Run (F5)]. If
necessary, add new reagent bottles after confirmation.
Every time you add a new reagent, make sure to perform “Reagent Scan” in order to update the reagent
information.
For barcode controlled reagent bottles, it is very easy to carry out the “Reagent Scan”. When you click
the RCU Scan button of the tab menu [Inventory], the Reagent Container Unit (RCU) starts rotating and
the barcode reader reads the barcodes on the bottles. Necessary information such as reagent types, reagent
quantity, bottle capacity is automatically recognized.
However, for the bottles which are not controlled by reagent barcodes, the necessary information is
required to be input on the tab menu [Inventory] from the keyboard.
(Refer to the “3.1.5 Reagent Information Control: [Inventory]”)
[Run (F5)]-[Inventory]
Red line: Number of test is less than 1.

Pink line: Valid term is expiry.
Yellow line: Stability term is expiry.
2.9 Confirmation of Reagent Remaining Volume
2-77
2.10 Measurement Start and Monitor

2.10.1 Measurement Start
By pressing the [F1] key on the keyboard or clicking on the [Start (F1)] button of the Global Menu located at
the bottom of the screen, you can start the measurement operation. Measurement Start operation can be carried
out from any screens, however, in principle, we recommend that you perform the Measurement Start after
selecting [Monitor] or [Round] of the tab menu in the job menu [Run (F5)].
The measurement cannot be performed unless following conditions are satisfied prior to the measurement.
1) Each lid for ASP, RCU and ISE is closed.
2) The temperatures inside the RCU are 15°C or lower.
3) The temperature range inside the IRU is within 37± 0.5°C.
4) Halogen lamp is stable. (20 minutes or more has passed after the light turned on)
5) 30 or more usable cuvettes are present in the IRU.
6) Purified water of regulated amount or more is reserved in the sub tanks (R and L) inside the analyzer.
7) No water leakage inside the analyzer.
8) No insufficient reagents for measurement methods.
If you press [Control] and [F1] keys, you can skip remaining reagent volume check at Measurement Start.
Press [Ctrl] and [F2] keys for emergency stop. When Alarm (F4) blinks at measurement start, press [Ctrl] and
[F2] keys for emergency stop and then verify alarm messages.
The measurement status can be monitored either on the tab menu [Monitor] or [Round] of the job menu [Run
(F5)]. On the tab menu [Round], further details of the measurement process status can be monitored.
·Click on the Start (F1) button:

Start (F1)
·First check message is popped up:
Start check in process

Inventory check in process
·Secondary check message is popped up:

Click OK ; Measurement start is proceed.
Click Cancel; Measurement start is canceled.
Check remaining volume of wash solution.
OK Cancel
·Preparation message is popped up:

Measurement preparation in process.

2.10.1 Measurement Start
2-78
2.10.2 Measurement Status Monitor (Run Monitor)

By selecting the tab menu [Monitor] of the job menu [Run (F5)], the Run Monitor screen can be opened. This
screen allows you to easily perform the ISE calibration, the ISE cleaning, the SPT cleaning etc. immediately
before the Measurement Start. Addition of emergency samples and/or normal samples during the measurement is
also performed on this screen.
For the details and functions of this screen, refer to “3.1 [Run (F5)]” of Chapter 3.
When the mouse cursor is put on ASP ASP Monitor

slot mark, a sample number is displayed.
Run Monitor：[Run (F5)] - [Monitor]
ASP monitor Meaning ASP monitor Meaning

Green Sampling process started White Sampling process not started yet
Blue Range over occurred in the result Yellow Any test order not recognized
Purple Auto-rerun required for the result Gray Measurement process not started yet
Barcode not recognized and any test
Red Error occurred in the result Pale Gray
order not found
Light Blue Measurement normally completed

2.10.2 Measurement Status Monitor (Run Monitor)
2-79
2.10.3 Measurement Process Monitor (Round Monitor)

By selecting the tab menu [Round] of the job menu [Run (F5)], the Round Monitor screen can be opened. On
this screen, detailed progress status of measurement process can be monitored.
For the details and functions of this screen, refer to “3.1 Run Menu: [Run (F5)]” of Chapter 3.
Reagent Blank
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
No. Process Detail

0: Water of the interior of SPT is dispensed to the cuvette. This case
is only the Reagent Blank Measurement.
(1) ASP Position Number
1 to 92: ASP position number of the cup or tube contained the sample to be
dispensed to the cuvette is displayed.
Specified PID in the tab menu [Selection] of the job menu [Run (F5)] is
(2) Patient ID Number
displayed.
Specified SID in the tab menu [Selection] of the job menu [Run (F5)] or the
(3) Sample ID Number
automatically defined SID, for example “Reagent Blank”, is displayed.
(4) Method Name Method name for the measurement is displayed.
(5) R1 dispensing completion When R1 dispensing to the cuvette is completed, star mark is displayed.
(6) Sample dispensing completion When sample dispensing to the cuvette is completed, star mark is displayed.
(7) R1 Mixing completion When the stirring of the Mixer-1 is completed, star mark is displayed.
When the photometry for the first half (1 to 34 points) is completed, star
(8) Photometry (1) completion
mark is displayed.
(9) R2 dispensing completion When R2 dispensing to the cuvette is completed, star mark is displayed.
(10) R2 Mixing completion When the stirring of the Mixer-2 is completed, star mark is displayed.
When the photometry for the last half (35 to 68 points) is completed, star
(11) Photometry (2) completion
mark is displayed.
(12) Result After the concentration value is calculated, its result is displayed.
(13) Cuvette Number The cuvette number that has been used for the measurement is displayed.
When any error is occurred during measurement, error flag is displayed.
(14) Error Status
In the case of no error, the blank code is filled in this cell.

2.10.3 Measurement Details Monitor (Round Monitor)
2-80
2.11 Sample Addition

2.11.1 Emergency Sample Addition
Added Emergency Samples will be measured prior to other samples.
To add an emergency sample while the measurement is in process, perform the following procedures.
1. Click the [STAT (F3)] button of the Global Menu. Sampling process for new sample comes to a pause,
however, the measurement process for already dispensed cuvettes in the IRU is carried on.
2. After sampling process is stopped, ASP rotates to the position where any test order is not still registered.
However, if there is more than one slot, ASP rotates to the youngest number of slot.
And the present screen is automatically jumped to the tab menu [Selection] and the following pop-up
message is appeared.
“Place the sample at following position: gray, yellow, light blue or blue.
Do not use following colored position: white, green purple and red”
When the operator selects the ASP slot position to place the additional sample, it should be considered
the sort of color in the SID List at the left of screen as referring to the pop-up message.
When click the OK button in the pop-up message, the pop-up message is disappeared from the screen.
Available ASP slot for

additional sample
SID List
3. Then, you can perform to designate the test order of the additional sample. Refer to “2.7.1.2 Emergency
Sample (STAT)” of Chapter 2.

2-81
4. Remove the “Sample addition lid” and place the additional sample to the ASP slot.
After completion of sample placement, return the “Sample addition lid” to its original position.
When you want to add more than one sample, repeat the procedures from 3 to 4.
Sample Addition Lid
Sample Addition Opening
5. Click the Global Menu button [Start (F1)] flickering yellow to restart the measurement process. The
following message is popped up while the analyzer performs the start up check and inventory check, then
the message is disappeared after completion of check process.
The ASP starts rotating and the measurement is resumed. But the measurement of emergency sample is
prioritized. Of course, the measurement for the suspended sampling process is restarted.
3. [Rotation ASP] Button
5. [Start (F1)] Button 1. [Stat (F3)] Button

2-82
2.11.2 Normal Sample Addition

Added Normal Samples will NOT be measured prior to other samples.
To add a normal sample while the measurement is in process, perform the following procedures
1. Click the [STAT (F3)] button of the Global Menu. Sampling process for new sample comes to a pause,
however, the measurement process for already dispensed cuvettes in the IRU is carried on.
2. After sampling process is stopped, ASP rotates to the position where any test order is not still registered.
However, if there is more than one slot, ASP rotates to the youngest number of slot.
And the present screen is automatically jumped to the tab menu [Selection], and the following pop-up
message is appeared. (Refer to previous page “2.11.1 Emergency Sample Addition”.)
“Place the sample at following position: gray, yellow, light blue or blue.
Do not use following colored position: white, green purple and red”
When the operator selects the ASP slot position to place the additional sample, it should be considered
the sort of color in the SID List at the left of screen as referring to the pop-up message.
When click the OK button in the pop-up message, the pop-up message is disappeared from the screen.
Available ASP slot for

additional sample
SID List
3. Then, you can perform to set the test order for the additional sample. Refer to “2.7.1.1 Normal Sample
(Normal)” of Chapter 2.
When click the Rotation ASP button, the ASP slot that has been newly selected rotates to CW.

2-83
4. Remove the “Sample addition lid” and place the additional sample to the ASP slot.
After completion of sample placement, return the “Sample addition lid” to its original position.
When you want to add more than one sample, repeat the procedures from 3 to 4.
Sample Addition Lid
Sample Addition Opening
5. Click the Global Menu button [Start (F1)] flickering yellow to restart the measurement process. The
following message is popped up while the analyzer performs the start up check and inventory check, then
the message is disappeared after completion of check process.
ASP starts rotating and the suspended sampling process is restarted, then the measurement of samples
including additional sample is performed.
3. [Rotation ASP] Button
1. [Stat (F3)] Button

5. [Start (F1)] Button

2-84

3.1 [Run (F5)]:Run Menu
3.1.1 [Monitor]:Run Monitor
This menu is available to monitor the measurement progress and to execute some functions such as ISE Calibration,
ISE Cleaning, SPT Wash, Initialization or Prime.
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
No. Descriptions
(1) Time at run started
It will display the measurement start time.
Estimated time at sampling complete

It will display an estimated time for the completion of a sampling.
Some necessary time will be added for BCR samples when the order inquiry about samples.
Estimated time at run end

It will display the measurement end time.
IRU
It will display the IRU temperature. The temperature of the IRU is monitored with several sensors, and the
screen will show their representing temperature. If any of them exceed ±0.5 from 37˚C, the temperature value of
its sensor will be displayed in red.
3.1 Run
3.1.1 Monitor
3-1
No. Descriptions
(1) Halogen
It will display the remained time that Halogen lamp is available to use. (by minute)
After Power ON, it will be counted down from 20 minutes.
Auto Rerun
Specify whether or not to need an auto-rerun operation.
Rerun will be performed automatically with setting parameters in advance by this Auto-Rerun function when
results are over the technical range or error flags occurred.
Refer to “3.2.1 Chemistry Parameter 1” for details on rerun operations.
(2) ISE Calibration

This button is to implement ISE Calibration. The setting for the ISE calibrating solution is available on the
“Selection” or “Std QC” screen.
ISE Cleaning
This button is to implement ISE cleaning. The setting for ISE cleaning solution is available on the
“Selection” or “Std QC” screen.
SPT Wash
This is to perform the SPT cleaning with wash solution.
This SPT wash solution is defined on the “Selection” or “Std QC” screen.
MIX Ascend / MIX Descend

This is for easy stirrer cleaning of MIX1 / MIX2. Click this button and MIX1 / MIX2 unit move to upper
direction and the button title will be changed to MIX Descend. After cleaning work, click on the button MIX
Descend to return MIX1 / MIX2 units to initial position.
WU Ascend / WU Descend
This is for easy nozzle cleaning of WU. Click on this button and WU unit move to upper direction and the
button title will be changed to WU Descend. After cleaning work, click on the button WU Descend to return
WU unit to initial position.
Inner ASP
ASP will rotate CW.
Initialization
Click on this button and it will make each unit return to its home position.
Prime
Click this button and as well as filling the purified water and wash solution inside of the tubing, the air in
the path is discharged. It will execute the number of times specified in the .
ISE Prime
Click this button and it will execute a discharging air in the path by the solution Calibrant A. It will execute
the number of times specified in the .
3.1 Run
3.1.1 Monitor
3-2
No. Descriptions
(3) Start (F1)

Click this button and the measurement process is started. During the measurement, this button is flickered
with yellow color.
Sstop (F2)
Clicked this button, the sampling movement is suspended until the Start (F1) button is clicked again.
STAT (F3)
This is an operational button for additional sample. It will be switched over the tab menu [Selection] by
pressing [F3] key from any screen.
3.1 Run
3.1.1 Monitor
3-3
No. Descriptions
(4) <ASP Monitor>

The monitor shows the status of each sample placed in the ASP with colors.
And when the key cursor is placed on the sample mark, its sample number (SID) is displayed.
Display Addition
Status
High Color of samples
Grey It means that the status is unprocessed and the (Gray) shows before
Allowed
(Unknown) the round starts.
It means that at least one error method is included. (Except for STB
error)
Red When conversion concentration has been failed due to such as a Not
(Error) calibration curve error or no calibration curve, the color will be red. allowed
Note: Abnormal temperature error may not be shown immediately
on the screen.
Priority in the case each method‘s status is different.
It means that at least one method for rerun is included.

Purple When samples are technical range over and the samples are rerun, the
color will be changed from (Green) to (Purple). Not
(Rerun
Rerun samples will be measured when their barcodes are read at the allowed
Required)
re-circulation of ASP and its color is changed from (Purple) to (White).
It means that at least one range-over method is included.
The measurement has been completed and the conversion of
Blue concentration of the measurement has been normally done but the Not
(Range Over) result is over Technical Range. allowed
The color will be changed from (Green) to (Blue).
It means that all methods have been completed (STB error is deemed
Light Blue as normal completion.).
(Process The measurement has completed and its concentration conversion Allowed
Complete) has been normally done, all methods are within the technical range.
The color will be changed from (Green) to (Light blue).
It means that the process from sampling for the first method to the
Green sampling for all methods has done (Except for occurrences of rerun,
Not
(Sampling errors and range over.).
allowed
Started) The color will be changed from (White) to (Green) at the time that
the sample has been dispensed in cuvettes.
It means that all methods are unprocessed sampling.
If the sample barcode can be read and its order is registered, the
White color will be changed from (Grey) to (White) and the status means that Not
(Not it is waiting for a sampling process. allowed
Processed) Meanwhile, it remains (Grey) in the case that the barcode could not
be read.
Yellow It means that any test order is not registered.

(No test Although the sample barcode can be read, its order is not registered and Allowed
Ordered) the color will be changed from (Gray) to (Yellow).
Low
It means barcode is not recognized and any test order is not Allowed
Dark Gray
registered for its ASP slot.
3.1 Run
3.1.1 Monitor
3-4
3.1.2 [Round]:Round Monitor (Error Flags)

You can check both of the statuses, the unit control before start and an each sample’s condition in process.
(1)
<Reaction Process>
(2)
No. Descriptions
(1) IRU C
The temperature of the IRU is monitored with several sensors and represented temperature of them is
displayed on the screen.
If any of which exceeds ±0.5 from 37◦C, its temperature will be displayed in red.
Halogen Min
It will show a remaining time that the Halogen lamp will be available (stable) by minutes.
Time at run started

It will display the measurement start time.
Estimated time at sampling complete

It will display the sampling estimated completion time.
Estimated time at run end
It will display the measurement completion time.
(2) <Operational Monitor List>

The measurement status of each sample will be shown.
Pos
This will display the sample position number at the IRU.
PID
This is patient ID. It will be blank if it is not registered.
3.1 Run
3.1.2 Round
3-5
No. Descriptions
(2) SID
A sample ID will be shown.
On the list, the sample number will be displayed together with its number added measurement times and
repeat times.
Normal sample Nxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 (3 to 12 digit display)
nxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 (Pediatric)
Exxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 (STAT)
e8999xxxxnn1 (STAT & Pediatric)
On line sample Oxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1
oxxxxxxxxxxxxnn1 (Pediatric)
Normal Pediatric sample n8999xxxxnn1
STAT sample E99000xxxnn1
e99000xxxnn1 (Pediatric)
STAT Pediatric sample e990009xxnn1
Control sample C970000xxnn1
Standard sample S98xxxxxynnm
Multi-Standard sample M950000xynnm
Serial Dilution sample D93xxxxxynnm
Replicate sample R9400xx0111
r9400xx0111 (Pediatric)
Orderless sample A920000xx11
Blank sample B9510000xnnm
Reagent Blank sample RB91xxxxx1nnm
“nn” indicates the measurement times, “m”
does repeat times, and “y” does the solution
number(1 to 7).
Method
The measurement method name will be shown.
<Reaction Process>
The reactive process in measurement will be shown by “*”.
R1: R1 Reagent dispensing completion
S: Sample dispensing completion
M1: R1 Stirring completion
O1: Photometry for the first half completion
R2: R2 Reagent dispensing completion
M2: R2 Stirring completion
O2: Photometry for the last half completion
Result
The measurement result (the concentration value) will be shown.
CN
The number of a cuvette used in measurement will be shown.
Error
When an error occurs, its error flag will be displayed with alphabets then the flag will be shown. If some
errors are duplicated, one of the higher priorities will be chosen to display.
3.1 Run
3.1.2 Round
3-6
Error Flags
Error Error
Descriptions Matter of error
ranks flags
<None> Normal
IE1 Requirement of ISE No correspondence for the measurement requirement is from

(1)
measurement is abnormal ISE.
IE2 Not received ISE
The measurement result from ISE could not be received.
measurement result data
(2) SPS SPT nozzle clogging SPT becomes step-out on the IRU.
SS The liquid level of SPT is not detected or a hit of the bottom

Sample shortage
is detected in ASP.
SS Out of the range of the liquid The result of SPT liquid level detection is out of the range in
level of sample ASP.
SI1 Non detection of the liquid The liquid level of SPT is out of the range or a hit of the
level of sample discharge bottom has been detected in IRU.
SI1 Out of the range of the liquid The result of SPT liquid level detection is out of the range in
level of sample discharge IRU.
SI2 The liquid level of SPT is out of the range or a hit of the
Dilution sample shortage
bottom has been detected in IRU.
SI2 Out of the range of the liquid The result of SPT liquid level detection is out of the range in
level of Dilution sample IRU.
R1S When R1 reagent aspirating, the RPT liquid level is not
R1 Reagent shortage
detected or a hit of the bottom is detected.
R1S Out of the range of the liquid When R1 reagent aspirating, the result of the RPT liquid level
level of R1 Reagent detention is out of the range.
R2S When R2 reagent aspirating, the RPT liquid level is not
R2 Reagent shortage
R2S Out of the range of the liquid When R2 reagent aspirating, the result of the RPT liquid level
level of R2 Reagent detention is out of the range.
DS When dilution aspirating, the RPT liquid level is not detected
Dilution shortage
or a hit of the bottom is detected.
DS Out of the range of the liquid When dilution aspirating, the result of the RPT liquid level
level of dilution detention is out of the range.
WS When wash solution aspirating, the RPT liquid level is not
Wash solution shortage
WS Out of the range of the liquid When wash solution aspirating, the result of the RPT liquid
level of the wash solution level detention is out of the range.
R1B No R1 reagent bottle R1 reagent bottle has not been registered.
R1S Volume Zero in R1 reagent The remaining volume of R1 reagent has reached zero.
R2B No R2 reagent bottle R2 reagent bottle has not been registered.
R2S Volume Zero in R2 reagent The remaining volume of R2 reagent has reached zero.
DB No dilution bottle The dilution bottle has not been registered
DS Volume Zero in dilution

The remaining volume of the dilution bottle has reached zero.
bottle
WB No wash solution bottle Wash solution bottle has not been registered
WS Volume Zero in wash solution The remaining volume of the wash solution bottle has
bottle reached zero.
LOT Lot inconsistency The reagent lot number has not been inconsistency.
SPW SPT wash has been failed. Check the alarm to determine the
Failure of SPT wash
reason for its fail.
3.1 Run
3.1.2 Round
3-7
Error Error
Descriptions Matter of error
ranks flags
R1W Method to Method washing, an operation in advance to R1,

Failure of RPT 1 wash
has failed. Check the alarm to determine the reason for its fail.
R2W Method to Method washing, an operation in advance to R2,

Failure of RPT 2 wash
has failed. Check the alarm to determine the reason for its fail.
IRU temperature extremely
(3) TE1 IRU temperature < 37-2(◦C)
low
IRU temperature extremely
TE2 IRU temperature > 37+2(◦C)
high
RCU temperature extremely
TE3 RCU temperature > 15◦C
high
ASP temperature extremely
TE4 ASP temperature > 10◦C
high
EST Anomalous measurement Error sampling stop. Check the alarm for the reason.
EXP The reagent is no longer An expired reagent was used in the measurement
(4)
valid.
STB Reagent stability expired Invalid reagent stability was used with the measurement.
The reason is that the measurement was taken by a method of
CTO Calibration expired which calibration has not been implemented within a setting
term.
The reason is that the measurement was taken by a method of
CXP Control expired which QC measurement has not been implemented within a
setting term.
(5) CA? An error of concentrations of No calibration curve, or ISE calibration ever has been
conversions. executed after the startup.
(6) OVR An error out of the range of The value is not between Calibrator’s minimum and
calibrator. maximum.
LIN Linearity Limit Error Linearity Limit Error
PRO Prozone Limit Error Prozone Limit Error

AB1 Absorbance Limit1 Error Only one of the measured values is in Absorbance Limit.
After the first 3 points of the measured value that are out of
(7)
Absorbance Limit, and also more than 2 points of the measured
AB2 Absorbance Limit2 Error value are out of Absorbance Limit. But when more than 8 points
of the measured value are within Absorbance Limit, “AB2” flag
is not applied to the result.
Using the different lot Used reagent lot number in the specimen or control
CLT measurement has been different from the reagent in the
number of R1 or R2
calibration measurement.
The measurement was taken by sample type of each method
(8)
STM Sample type Inconsistent that does not match the sample type.
The concentration value was converted with a calibration
curve that does not match the sample type.
(9) DUP Duplicate Limit Error Duplicate Limit Error
SEN Sensitivity Limit Error Sensitivity Limit Error
CAL Failure of calibration An operation of calibration has filed in shortage of points etc.
(*) In an error, a Concentration value (or the measurement value) will be shown by “*****”.
The priority of each error rank should be (1)> (2)> (5)> (6)> (3)> (4)> (7)> (8)> (9).
The errors from (1) to (4) are that has been occurred in the main analyzer, and the errors from (5) to (9) are that has
been detected in the UI side.
3.1 Run
3.1.2 Round
3-8
The descriptions for ISE error codes are provided with the following list.
The code consists of 4 bytes. When the numeric value of each byte is converted into binary numbers, each method of
the following case may be error.
In the case the Bit 0 (0x01) is ON, the measurement value for Na will be shown by “*****” if Na error.
In the case the Bit 1 (0x02) is ON, the measurement value for K will be shown by “*****” if K error.
In the case the Bit 2 (0x04) is ON, the measurement value for CI will be shown by “*****” if CI error.
All the three methods are considered error unless the value has set with from “0 to 7”. This will be applied except that
the value from “K” to “R” for the byte 4 is effective.
Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4

Out of Range
Noise or Air
Noise or Air for Sample / Out of Range and/or Na Error for
for Sample / Drift in Cal A
for Cal A Cal B and Urine Only (Note１)
Cal B
Urine
ISE No error 0 0 0 0
Noise, Na 1 1 1 1
Drift or
K 2 2 2 2
Out of
Range Na, K 3 3 3 3
Cl 4 4 4 4
Na, Cl 5 5 5 5
K, Cl 6 6 6 6
Na, K, Cl 7 7 7 7
ISE(D) Na Urine error
No error 0 0 0 0 K only, no out of
range error
Noise, Na 1 1 1 1 L
Drift or
K 2 2 2 2 M
Out of
Range Na, K 3 3 3 3 N Na Urine error
Cl 4 4 4 4 O and out of range
Na, Cl 5 5 5 5 P error
K, Cl 6 6 6 6 Q
Na, K, Cl 7 7 7 7 R
Air S (Note2) A －－－
B (Note2) －－－－
(Note 1): ISD (D) is basically uses error codes from “0 to 7”. However, “K” is used for a case as Na error and no range
over, from “L to R” are used for another case as both Na errors and range over.
(Note 2) :”S” indicates aeration when sample dispensing, “B” does when Cal B dispensing either.
3.1 Run
3.1.2 Round
3-9
3.1.3 [Selection]:Test Selection

The orders of the outer and inner circumferences are registered.
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3)
(5)
No. Descriptions
(1) <Order List>

The order list will be shown. To edit the order, click to chose some orders on the list.
“Pos” column:
The sample position number of the outer and middle positions in ASP will be shown. The Pos will be
shown from 1 to 72, and after that the registered orders in “Sample Barcode Exist” will be displayed.
“SID” column:
A sample ID will be shown.
<Untitled> column:
Unique name attached to the sample will be shown.
Such as PID, Control name, Reagent name, Multi-standard name, “REP”, “ISE STD”, “ISE CLEAN”,
“ORDERLESS”, “BLANK” and “SPT WASH”.
(You can register a setup for the ASP center circumference on the [Run (F5)] – [Std QC] menu.)
3.1 Run
3.1.3 Selection
3-10
No. Descriptions
(2) Pos (Upper)

Choose an ASP position.
The outer circumference 36 (1－36)
The middle circumference 36 (37－72)
Specify an ASP position for order input.
When you order by specifying the Pos, it will be considered as “Sample Barcode Reader not exist Order”.
When you order by Pos with blank, it will be considered as Sample Barcode Reader exist Order”.
In that case, it is only available to register Normal, STAT, Replicate and Online sample order.
Pos (Lower)
Enter the end position of the copy and the repeat deletion (1 to 72).
Type
Choose a type of setting object by means of drop-down menu.
The following types can be selectable by means of the drop-down menu.
Normal
STAT
Replicate
Standard
Multi Standard
Serial Dilution
Blank
Control
Mask
Orderless
Online
ISE Calibration
ISE Cleaning
SPT Wash
Cup
Specify attribute sample by means of drop-down menu.
Select either one of “Normal” or “Pediatric”.
Choosing “Pediatric” means that the Pediatric process will be taken by the sample number of Normal
sample and STAT sample.
BCR
Choose a mode for keyboard BCR use.
As the barcode reader accommodated to connect a keyboard, you can input SID with full digits to turn this
check mark ON. At this time, the upper digits of SID will turn blank in a Normal sample case, and some
information such as “Type” will automatically change depending on the reading SID number.
C/D
Package registration (by Save button) and delete (by Delete button) orders will be available in a specified
range with this check mark ON.
You can specify “Pos (End Number)” and the “SID (End Number)” then.
Meanwhile, it will be able to use the Save button and Delete button to register or delete an each sample
with this check mark OFF.
In addition, the both of ”Pos (End Number)” and “SID (End Number)” will be prohibited the designation.
E
Specify an emergency sample.
Specify a STAT sample remaining its ”SID” as a Normal sample.
This is only effective for Normal sample.
SID: Upper
Input a sample ID (Should be within alphanumeric 12 digits).
SID: Lower
Input the last sample ID to be copied or deleted when the “C/D check box” is ON.
3.1 Run
3.1.3 Selection
3-11
No. Descriptions
(2) PID
You can input a patient ID (Should be within alphanumeric 20 digits).
Choose a registered patient ID from the drop-down menu.
If your input PID is not registered, the patient information settings is automatically popped up so that you
can newly create the patient information for the inputted PID.
Collection date
Choose a drawing blood date from the drop-down calendar.
Physician
Choose an attending physician (or an archiater) from the drop-down menu.
Physician can be created in the tab menu [Define] of the job menu [System (F9)] in advance.
Department
Choose a department from the drop-down menu.
Department can be created in the tab menu [Define] of the job menu [System (F9)] in advance.
Sample Comment
Choose a sample’s comment from the drop-down menu.
Sample’s comment can be created in the tab menu [Define] of the job menu [System (F9)] in advance.
Sample
Choose a sample type.
Choose a sample category from “Common”, “Serum”, Urine”,” Plasma” displayed on the drop-down
menu. It will display the measurement methods for each selecting sample type and then switch over the
screen.
Range
Specify the Normal Range to use for judgment of the result.
Need to be chosen from Human Auto (Auto), six types of Human (each 3 Generations in both Sexes) and
other 44 types. The default setting is Human Auto.
No.01 to 06 are fixed as follows.
01: Male-G1
02: Male-G2
(This standard value should be applied if no age and no sex have been specified in Human Auto.)
03: Male-G3
04: Female-G1
05: Female-G2
06: Female-G3
The No.07 to 50 are available to select only for ranges of which name has been registered on the tab menu
[Range] of the job menu [System (F9)].
MS: This item is only output when you select “Multi-Standard” in “Type” selection.
By choosing a set name shown on the drop-list, the check box of measurement methods registered in each
set will be shown as “ON”.
Control: This item is only outputted when you select “Control” in “Type” selection.
It will be shown when you select the Control in “Type”.
Choose a control sample from the drop-down menu.
3.1 Run
3.1.3 Selection
3-12
No. Descriptions
(3) <Measurement methods specification>

(1) In the case of setting of Normal, STAT and Replicate sample’s measurement order
Specify measurement methods (Standard, ISE, SI and Profile).
It is available to select methods registered on each menu of Normal, ISE, SI, and Profile. Methods
which reagents have not been registered or which reagents have been shortage will not be displayed.
Methods which calibrations have not been executed or which calibrations have been expired will be
displayed in red. However, methods which calibration types are “Factor” will not be checked.
Methods which Control have not been executed or expired will be shown in yellow.
Methods which Calibrators have been expired will be shown in orange.
Note: The priority levels are;
“Calibration expired” > “ Control expired” > “Calibrator expired”
ISE methods will be displayed differently by types specified in “Sample”.

Common :It is possible to choose from ISE or ISE (D).
Serum and Plasma :It is only available to choose ISE.
Urine :It is only available to choose ISE (D).
All the measurement methods in Profile will be displayed with underline when you choose “Profile”.
Move a mouse pointer to any of Profile methods and the registered measurement methods in Profile will
be shown in a hint box..
(2) In the case of setting of Control sample’s measurement order
By choosing a control name from the drop-down menu, check boxes of registered methods will be
changed ON. These measurement methods cannot be modified here.
(3) In the case of setting of Standard sample’s measurement order
Choose a sample type from the drop-down menu and the registered method will be displayed. Then
you can specify a measurement method here.
(4) In the case of setting of Multi-Standard sample’s measurement order
Choose a Multi-standard name and sample type and measurable methods will be checked and
displayed set on the “Multi-Std” screen.
Measurement methods cannot be modified here.
(5) In the case of setting of Blank sample’s measurement order
Choose this order and the measurement methods used for Blank sample will be shown.
Measurement methods cannot be modified here.
(6) In the case of setting of Masking
By check-OFF on this setting, it will mask the measurement methods.
The mask information is not eliminated even when the measurement has been completed.
From the next measurement, the previous setting will be displayed.
The Mask order you set will be applied to all the samples.
(7) In the case of setting of Orderless sample’s measurement order
Specify methods that you will measure in all methods measurement (Shift+F1).
Click the check box ON to implement measurements.
(8) In the case of setting of Online measurement order
In “Online Batch” mode, click the Acquire orders button and sample order information will be
transferred from the host computer. The order list will be updated by receiving data.
When you measure any samples without a sample barcode in “Online Real Time” mode, you have to
register a “SID” for each “Pos” in advance.
In case that the received Online Orders and the registered orders on the screen match, the orders will
be determined. However, if they don't match, the orders will be an error and then it will not be
determined (result in fail).
An “SID” received from the host computer becomes an “SID” added to the error message
(9) In the case of setting of ISE Calibration, ISE Cleaning and SPT Wash
Specify an ISE Calibrator, ISE wash solution and a position for SPT special wash solution.
You can execute each performance on the [Monitor] screen or the [Sequence] screen of the job menu
[Maint (F10)].
3.1 Run
3.1.3 Selection
3-13
No. Descriptions
(4) Number
Specify Normal samples / Replicate samples when you repeatedly measure.
Choose a number from 1 to 99 on the drop-down menu.
Note that Auto Rerun will not be performed when this number is two or bigger.
(5) Rotation ASP

When the STAT (F3) button is clicked for the sample addition (Emergency or Normal), this button
becomes available to move the ASP slot.
Acquire orders
Receive host orders.
Click this button and the analyzer will start to receive the order information from the Host computer.
Normal and emergency samples are available. QC samples are also available in Online Real mode.
During receiving orders from the host, the message of “Receiving Orders.” will be displayed in the
“Mode” box at the upper right of screen.
Delete
Delete the order of the selected sample ID.
All samples from Start Sample ID (start position) to End Sample ID (end position) will be deleted at once
with the C/D function.
A confirmation massage will notify you to complete delete process.
To press the OK button will continue the delete and to press the Cancel button will be dissolved the
deletion.
Save
Order settings will be saved.
Order information of Start Sample ID (start position) will be copied from the Start Sample ID to End
Sample ID (end position) with the C/D function.
Cancel
It will cancel editing data and original data is available.
Print
It will print out the registered orders when you specify the range of sample numbers you need.
Mask All / Clear All
Both buttons will be only available on the mask order screen.
By clicking the Mask All, all the measurement methods will be masked (Their check boxes will become
“OFF”). At the same time, the button name will switch over the Clear All.
By clicking the Clear All, all the measurement methods that have been masked will be released (Their
check boxes will become “ON”). Associated with this, the button name will switch over the Mask All.
3.1 Run
3.1.3 Selection
3-14
3.1.4 [Result]:Measurement Results

On this screen, you can retrieve the measurement results and testing count for each sample type then display it, print it
out and send it to the Host computer.
3.1.4.1 Measurement Result
(A) In the case of selection “All” in the “Sample Type”
(1)
(2)
(3)
(B) In the case of selection “Control” in the “Sample Type”
(1)
(2)
3.1 Run
3.1.4 Result
3-15
No. Descriptions
(1) Sample Type

Specify a sample type.
Choose a type from the following: All, Normal, STAT, Online, Standard, ISE Standard, Control, Replicate,
and Test Number.
Normal, STAT, Online, Replicate and Control sample’s results will be outputted when you select “All”.
“Standard” includes “Serial Dilution” and “Multi-Standard” and Blank sample.
Sample
Select a sample type.
Choose a type from the following: All, Common, Serum, Urine and Plasma.
”Common”, “Serum”, “Urine” and “Plasma” will be subject to retrieve when you select “All”.
<ID select>
Select an ID (SID, PID, Name or Medical Chart) for a search.
“Name” & “Medical Chart” can be selected when Sample Type is “Normal”, “STAT” or “Online”.
▪ 12 digits will be available in both “From” and “To” boxes on the screen when you select a SID.
▪ 20 digits will be available in both “From” and “To” boxes on the screen when you select a PID.
The content of “From” and “To” boxes will be cleared when its ID is changed.
From / To
Specify the range of a search SID or PID, depending on the selection of ID select.
Input it within 20 alphanumeric digits. (Should be the Start number (From) ≤ the End number (To))
“*” (Asterisk) can be used for the wildcard character and all SID / PID will be target with “*”.
Date From / To
By pulling down the drop-down menu, set a date from the calendar.
[From]: Input a search start date.
If the “Disable” check box is ON, you don’t have to input the date. In that case, all data you have
will be target.
[To]: Input an end date.
If the “Disable” check box is ON, you don’t have to input the date. In that case, the latest date
will be the end date.
Round#
Specify a round number for search.
Round number1 - 99 can be entered.
The first measurement in a day will be Round 1, the second measurement will be Round 2 and the third
measurement will be Round 3. Round number is a serial measurement number in a day.
“*” (Asterisk) can be used for the wildcard character and all rounds will be target with “*”.
Method (for Control result extraction)
Choose a method name for the result of the control measurement.
This selection method is only appeared on the screen when “Control” is specified in the “Sample Type”.
Refer to previous page “(B) In the case of selection “Control “ in the “Sample Type”.
Name (for Control result extraction)
The name of the selected “Method” will be shown.
Refer to previous page “(B) In the case of selection “Control “ in the “Sample Type”.
Send
Specify a result data type transferred to host computer from 3 types bellow.
This will be available when “Normal” is specified as “Sample Type”.
▪ ALL: all results
▪ OK : results which have been transferred successfully
▪ NG : results which have been failed to be transferred
3.1 Run
3.1.4 Result
3-16
No. Descriptions
(1) Select Test

Specify methods that you want to output for the search result.
Clicking this button and the method select list will be displayed.
Specify the measurement methods (light blue for effective / the background color for ineffective).
Result Output
Specify where to be output.
▪ Monitor: The result will be displayed on the Monitor.
▪ Normal Print: The result will be printed out with normal print format.
▪ Report Print: The results will be printed out with report print format. This format can be chosen
when “Normal”, “STAT” or “Online” sample is specified in “Sample Type”.
▪ File: The result will be printed out to a file. The … button will be available and you can
choose where to be output (saved).
▪ Patient history Print: The results will be printed out with a history print format. This format can be chosen
when “Normal”, “STAT” or “Online” is specified in “Sample Type”.
▪ Host: This can be chosen when “Normal”, “STAT”, “Control” or “Online” is specified in
“Sample Type”. However, when the “Off Line” is selected in the “Host Communication
Mode”, this “HOST” cannot be specified.
Search
This will execute result search.
The mouse pointer will be busy during search.
The search will be suspended if the search targets exceed more than 2,000. Change search condition and
search again.
Delete
Delete measurement results with specified condition.
Click this button and a confirmation message will be shown. Click OK button for implementing the delete, or
Cancel for cancel.
Select Output
Methods selected will be output.
Select measurement result in a Search Result List and this button will be available.
▪ Methods selected in a Search Result List will be output.
▪ Click a measurement result and press Space key, then the measurement result will be “Select” or
“Not Selected”.
▪ Press Ctrl key and click a mouse at the same time, then a measurement result you select will be
“Select” or “Not Selected”.
▪ Press Ctrl key and click a mouse at the same time, it is possible to select all the range between the
line selected in the last and the line selected now
▪ Keep pressing Shift key and click ↑ or ↓ key at the same time, it is possible to change focus line to
the upper / lower line.
(2) Result
It will show the concentration of the measurement results.
Judgment
Normal range judgment selected in Search Result List will be displayed with “H” or “L”.
Range
Technical range judgment selected in Search Result List will be displayed with “<” or “>”.
Flag
The error status of the measurement result selected from Search Result List will be shown.
The error status will be described in four digits consisted of three digits for error flag and one digit for rerun
flag.
E.g.) Error flag of a rerun for AB1 error will be displayed as“AB1r”.
3.1 Run
3.1.4 Result
3-17
No. Descriptions
(2) QC Judgment
This will be available in selecting Control samples and show the QC judgment for the measurement result.
Judgment result will be shown by three items and seven digits.
When there are two or more errors / warnings in QC Judgment, higher priority errors / warnings, up to
three, will be displayed in order from the left side of results.
ABS
The absorbance value of measurement result is shown selected from Search Result List.
This ABS will not be displayed in “Standard” or “ISE Standard” as sample type.
Conc (S)
The concentration value of measurement result is shown selected from Search Result List.
This value will be shown in “Standard” as sample type..
Delete
This will delete the measurement result selected in Search Result List.
Press this button and a confirmation message will be shown. Press OK button for implementing the delete and
Cancel button for cancel.
Output Time Course Graph

This will display time course GRAPH of the measurement result selected in Search Result List.
Output Time Course Print
This will print put time course DATA of the measurement result selected in Search Result List.
Output Time Course File
This will output time course DATA of the measurement result selected in Search Result List to a specified
file with CSV Format.
(3) <Search Result List>

Searched measurement results will be shown here.
Date: Measured Date
Round: Round Number
PID: Patient ID (Control Name for Control sample)
SID: Sample ID
Method: Method Names
Result: Measurement results
You can confirm data in process here.
3.1 Run
3.1.4 Result
3-18
3.1.4.2 Testing Count

L1 and L2 user cannot open this menu.
In the tab menu [Result] of [Run (F5)], when the “Test Number” is selected in the “Sample Type”, the test
counts for all sample types (Normal, Online, STAT, Replicate, Standard, Control, Blank, ISE Calibration, ISE
Cleaning and Reagent Blank) which measuring result have been obtained are listed on the screen.
The testing count data is saved in the system for one year, therefore, past data over one year is
automatically deleted from the system storage when the system becomes “Sleep Mode” or the Shutdown
process starts. And the file name of saved data is created automatically as
“TESTCNT20060309104321.DES”.
TESTCNTyyyymmddhhmmss[n].DES
TESTCNT: Specific characters

yyyy: Year (4 digits numeric number)
mm: Month (2 digits numeric number)
dd: Day (2 digits numeric number)
hh: Hour (2 digits numeric number)
mm: Minute (2 digits numeric number)
ss: Second (2 digits numeric number)
[n]: Division number, if necessary
Refer to (1) of the A) Measurement Result.
Testing count list of each measurement method
Total testing count of measurement method.
Sample count of the sample type
Sample type of measurement
3.1 Run
3.1.4 Result
3-19
3.1.5 [Inventory]:Reagent Remaining Volume

This manages reagents set in Reagent Container Unit (or RCU).
(1)
(2)
No. Descriptions
(1) <Reagent List>

Pos: Click this column and “Pos” column is rearranged by numerical order.
This shows the number of RCU position.
The outer position: 1 – 30 / The middle position: 31 –60
Name: Click this column and “Name” column is rearranged by alphabetical/numerical order.
This shows registered reagent names.
Reagent names will be displayed by RCU scan or a manual input of a barcode.
Type: Click this column and “Type” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This shows a reagent type.
Lot: Click this column and “Lot” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This shows Lot Numbers.
Reagent barcodes which do not include Lot Numbers will be displayed with * (asterisk mark).
3.1 Run
3.1.5 Inventory
3-20
No. Descriptions
(1) Size: Click this column and “Size” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This shows reagent bottle sizes.
The “Pos” number 31 – 60 can be used for 20ml bottle only.
Vol (mL): Click this column and “Vol (mL)” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This displays the remaining volume of the reagent (unit: 0.1mL).
Those lines which reagents have been run short will be display in red.
Remaining volume of reagents registered for the first time will be displayed as the maximum size of an
each bottle.
Tests: Click this column and “Tests” column is rearranged by numerical order.
This shows the number of tests you can measure with each reagent and the number depends on a method
which needs a reagent the most.
This tests number will be displayed in pail color when measurement has not been performed due to
uncertain remaining volume.
Method: Click this column and “Method” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
Reagents names which methods use will be displayed.
If same reagents are used for different methods, methods which use the reagents the most will be
displayed.
It will become blank when “Wash “ is selected in ”Type”.
Total: Click this column and “Total” column is rearranged by numerical order.
Number of tests which is available for measurement will be displayed.
If measurable number of tests is less than 1 (test), the whole line will be displayed in red.
Valid: Click this column and “Valid” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This shows the validation date (Day / Month / Year) for the reagent.
Double click this date and you can change the date.
When barcodes do not specify an expiry date, the expiry date will be proceeded with blank and need to set
an expiry date manually.
Put * (asterisk mark) not to specify valid date.
In case expired, the whole line will be displayed in pink.
Stability: Click this column and “Stability” column is rearranged by numerical order.
This displays remaining days of reagent stability.
This stability check will be available when “Stability Check” of [System] - [Reagent] is set ON and
“Term” is set to more than one day. This Stability is calculated based on “ Valid” and the current date.
Stability 0 (zero) means the last day for stability. When stability day becomes less than 0 (no remaining
days), minus (-) will added to stability day. (-1, -2, -3….)
The whole line will be displayed in yellow when expired.
This stability will be displayed with blank when stability check is not set.
BCR: Click this column and “BCR” column is rearranged by alphabetical / numerical order.
This shows reagent barcode data and can be modified manually.
It is not allowed to enter same barcodes as are registered already.
Remaining volume, stability and tests will be recovered when the same barcodes number is re-entered.
3.1 Run
3.1.5 Inventory
3-21
No. Descriptions
(2) RCU Scan

This button is used to scan bottles set in the RCU. Barcodes of bottles will be read and reagents will be
registered to the analyzer automatically.
RCU Scan will start when you press this button.
Barcodes by entered manually will be overwritten with barcodes by RCU Scan at the same RCU position.
If no reagents have been set in the same position, barcodes entered manually will be remained.
RCU Scan will not delete any reagents.
Automatic RCU Scan (when RCU lid is opened / closed) can be set in the tab menu [Setup] of the job
menu [System (F9)].
Save
This button will save the edited data in this screen.
Cancel
This button will not save the editing data.
Delete
This button will delete the information of selecting position (items).
Press this button and you will see a confirmation massage on the screen. Choose OK button to implement
the delete and Cancel for cancel.
Print
Click this button and the information about reagent inventory is printed out. But this function works only
during ready state (not run state).
Print format example is shown below.
Header is set in the [setup] of [System (F9)] in advance.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 2006/03/09 11:21

Inventory
Size Vol
Pos Name Type Lot (mL) (mL) Tests Method Total Valid STB BCR
01 400RUN R1 999 100 94.8 441 400RUN 441 2007.12.31 50 100012180101200010
02 400RUN R2 100 68.3 1050 400RUN 441 49 100012380101200014
03 SPTS R1 100 94.8 441 SPTS 441 39 100022180108700015
04
Volume Reset
This button will reset reagent’s remaining volume of position selected.
Click this button and you will see a confirmation message on the screen. Click OK button to implement the
reset of the remaining reagent volume and the maximum volume of the registered reagent amount will be
set. Cancel button will cancel the procedure.
Clear added information

Set Reagent Lot Number & Valid Date to the initial value (* mark).
3.1 Run
3.1.5 Inventory
3-22
3.1.6 [Sleep Scheme]:Sleep Conditions

Operations before and after sleep can be defined on this screen.
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) <Start-up time Setting>

Specify time for preparation operations to start each day.
Time
Specify a start-up time. Set the time on 24 hours and this operation will start at the time set.
Prep
Select one operation from 3 types of (Prep1, Prep2 and OFF) in the drop-down menu.
3.1 Run
3.1.6 Sleep Scheme
3-23
No. Descriptions
(2) After Sleep

Specify settings processed in start-up operation.
Prime
Specify number of Prime. (0 - 5 times.)
SPT Wash “(W)”/ “(S)”

Specify number of the SPT cleaning times. “(W)” means the SPT will be washed with system water and
“(S)” means the SPT will be washed with wash solution.
Number of the wash times can be chosen from 0 to 5 and SPT wash will not be executed when zero.
RPT1, or 2 Wash “(W)”/ (“S)”

Specify number of the RPTs cleaning times. “(W)” means the RPTs will be washed with system water and
“(S)” means the RPTs will be washed with wash solution.
Number of wash times can be chosen from 0 to 5 and RPTs wash will not be executed when zero.
Cuvette Wash “(W)”/ (“S)”

Specify number of cuvettes cleaning times. “(W)” means cuvettes will be washed with system and “(S)”
means cuvettes will be washed with wash solution.
Number of wash times can be chosen from 0 to 5 and cuvette wash will not be executed when zero.
RCU Scan
Specify whether or not to implement RCU Scan.
RCU Scan will be executed after Sleep mode is released if RCU lid’s is opened during Sleep mode with
this RCU Scan.
(3) Save
This will save the editing data.
Cancel
This will cancel to save the editing data.
3.1 Run
3.1.6 Sleep Scheme
3-24
3.1.7 [Std QC]:Order for Standard or Control samples

You can register orders for the inner position in ASP.
Orders registered on this screen will not be deleted after measurement or Shut Down.
Samples registered here will be measured prior to samples on [Selection].
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) Pos
Specify an ASP position to place a sample. (I01 – I20)
Type
Specify a sample type.
Select one type on the drop-down menu: Standard / Multi-Standard / Serial Dilution / Control / Blank /
ISE Calibration / ISE Cleaning and SPT Wash.
Specify sample positions of ISE Calibration, ISE Cleaning and SPT Wash and proceed each operation on
[Run (F5)] – [Monitor] or [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence].
No.
This item will be shown when you select a method of calibration curve except Factor at Standard or
Multi-Standard.
Choose number of calibrators when each concentration of calibration curves is registered individually.
Choose “Full” if you register all calibrators.
3.1 Run
3.1.7 Std QC
3-25
No. Descriptions
(2) <Sample>
Select a sample category on the drop-down menu: Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma.
Select sample category and each measurement method that has been registered will be displayed on the order
list.
<Auto>
Measurement will be started automatically in those modes bellow.
This function will be applied for Standard / Multi-Standard / Serial Dilution / Control / Blank samples.
Invalid The measurement of this test order is suppressed.
Start The measurement is automatically performed when the first round of this test order is started.
After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to “Invalid”.
Auto At the time when the lot number of reagent is changed or the time-out period for calibration
goes over, the measurement of this test order is automatically performed. These conditions
should be set in the tab menu [Calibration] – [Reg Calib] in advance.
Start + Auto The measurement of this test order is automatically performed when the first round of this
test order is started or the lot number of reagent is changed or the time-out period for calibration
goes over. These conditions should be set in the tab menu [Calibration] – [Reg Calib] in
advance. After the measurement is completed, this selection is changed to “Auto”.
<Order List>
An order list will be displayed and can be edited to select orders.
This shows orders clicked from the list and these orders will become editing targets.
Pos : ASP position
SID : Sample ID
<Methods>
Methods will be displayed as test orders. These methods can be edited in Standard / Multi-Standard / Serial
Dilution samples. Methods names will not be displayed in ISE Cleaning / SPT Cleaning.
(3) Delete
This button will delete the information of position selected.
Press this button and you can see a confirmation message on the screen. Choose OK button for
implementing the delete and Cancel for cancel.
Delete All
This button will delete information of all positions.
Press this button and you can see a confirmation message on the screen. Choose OK button for
implementing the delete and Cancel for cancel.
Save
Click this button to save editing data.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel to save editing data.
Print
Click this button to print out a list for registered orders by specifying sample numbers.
3.1 Run
3.1.7 Std QC
3-26
3.1.8 [Patient]:Patient Registration Information

The screen of Patient Registration Information
(2)
(1)
(3)
No. Descriptions
(1) <Patient registration information >

Patient ID
You can input patient ID. (Should be less than 20 digits in alphanumeric)
Having been registered the information of the patient, its details will be displayed automatically and the
cursor will move to the target ID.
Patient Name
You can input patient name within 18 digits in alphanumeric.
All space codes are unacceptable.
Classification
Select a class from a drop down menu. Classes need to be defined on [System] – [Define] beforehand.
Ward
Select a ward from a drop down menu. Wards need to be defined on [System] – [Define] beforehand.
Bed No.
Input a bed number within 10 digits in alphanumeric.
Blood Type
Select a blood type from a drop down menu.
3.1 Run
3.1.8 Patient
3-27
No. Descriptions
(1) Medical Chart

Input a medical chart number within 10 digits in alphanumeric.
Social Security #
You can input social security number within 13 digits in alphanumeric.
Date of Birth
Input date of birth.
When Disable check is “ON”, the box will be space.
Age
This is an age calculated automatically based on its birthday.
Sex
Choose one on the drop-down menu from the value, Male / Female / Space (or Non specified).
Race
It can be selected from the drop-down menu.
The registration for your selecting value is available in the tab menu [Define] of the job menu [System
(F9)].
Comments
You can enter comments within 40 digits in alphanumeric.
Reference 1
You can input any comments within 10 digits. The title “Reference 1” will be defined on [System] –
[Define].
Reference 2
You can input any comments within 10 digits. The title “optional 2” will be defined on [System] –
[Define].
(2) <Patient information list>

This displays the information of the registered patients.
In “Record Count”, number of the patients will be shown.
Select a patient and the patient’s information will be shown on the left side.
(3) Save
This will save editing information.
30,000 patients can be registered.
When your register over 30,000 patients, those patients will be deleted who have not had any history in
last 2 years (this will be prior) or who are the oldest in the patient history record.
Cancel
This button will not save editing data.
Delete
Select this button to delete patient data.
Note that this will delete all the information related to the patient such as patient, sample, order and
measurement history.
3.1 Run
3.1.8 Patient
3-28
3.2 [Parameter (F6)]:Setup Menu 1

3.2.1 [Normal]:Chemistry Parameters (1)
You can specify measurement conditions for each method.
(1) (4)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(6)
No. Descriptions
(1) <The specification of the method number>

Method
Specify or input the number of a method. (1 - 60)
You can select methods registered from the list by pressing SPACE key or from the dropdown menu.
When you specify a method number, the method information will be displayed.
Name
Specify or input a method name within 6 digits with alphanumeric and signs.
You can select methods registered from the list by pressing SPACE key or from the dropdown menu.
When you specify the method name, the method information will be displayed.
All method names once registered will be displayed on the list (Max 200 methods).
Print Name
You can specify a method name to print within 15 digits with alphanumeric and signs.
Define a “Print Name” and the name will be printed out as a method name in printing or file outputting. If
not (“Print Name” is space), method name will be printed the same name as registered in “Name”.
Sample
Select a sample category. You can specify Chemistry Parameter depending on its sample category.
Select a sample category from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma on the list.
Select “Common” to set all sample’s conditions as the same.
Unit
Specify a unit used for printing, host communications within 6 digits with alphabets and signs.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.1 Normal
3-29
No. Descriptions
(2) <Photometry settings>

Assay Type
Select a photometry method from “Rate” Method or “End” Method.
Measuring Points
Specify the photometry range by a measuring point number. You can specify 2 photometry ranges
depending on the measurement method, 1 - 34 and 35 - 68.
Photometry ranges will be specified by “Start” and “End” measuring points. “End” point needs to be
bigger than “Start” point.
However, if the measurement is “End” Method, “Start” point = “End” point will be allowed.
Check “Enable” box ON to use “Measurement range 2” and measuring range of Photometry range1 needs
to be smaller than that of Photometry range2.
Wavelength Prim.
Select a main wavelength for measuring. You can select from 12 wavelengths displayed on the dropdown
menu. (340 / 380 / 415 / 450 / 510 / 546 / 570 / 600 / 660 / 700 / 750 / 800)
Wavelength Sec. (Disable)
Select a sub wavelength for measuring.
Check the “Disable” box ON if you don’t use a sub wavelength.
(3) <The setting for sample dispensing>

Specify sampling conditions for samples. Check the “Diluent Check” box ON to use a sample diluent
function. Note that you need to register diluent solutions.
Normal
Specify sampling conditions for the first sample.
Sampling: Specify sample dispense volume from 2 to 35 μL (0.1 μL step)
Dilution: When you dilute the sample, check the box “ON”.
Specify dilute conditions.
Sample (μL): Input an amount of sample diluted from 2 to 35 μL (0.1 μL step)
Diluent (μL): Input an amount of dilute dispensing from 20 to 350 μL (1 μL step)
Rerun (High / Prozone): Define sampling conditions for a high value rerun.
Setting procedure is the same as above “Normal” description.
When you don’t execute the high value rerun, input 0 in a box of “Sample (μL)”.
Rerun (Low): Define sampling conditions for a low value rerun.
Setting procedure is the same as above “Normal” description..
When you don’t execute the low value rerun, input 0 in a box of “Sample (μL)”.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.1 Normal
3-30
NO. Functions
(4) < The setting for reagents dispensing >

Specify dispensing conditions for R1and R2 reagents. Check the “R2 Enable Diluent Check” ON to use R2
reagent.
Reagent Name
Click SPACE key to display reagents list or select a reagent from the dropdown menu.
Reagent (μL)
Specify an amount of reagent consumption.
The range for R1 reagent consumption is from 20 to 350 μL (1 μL step) and that of R2 is from 20 to 250
μL(1 μL step).
Water (μL)
Specify an amount of dispensing pure water to dilute reagents. The range is from 100 to 350 μL (1 μL step).
This box should be blank (space) when reagents are not diluted.
Note that the total volume (sample, R1 / R2 reagents, R1 / R2 dilution) used for measuring should be between
150 and 450 μL.
Diluent Enable
Check the box “ON” to use diluents.
Click SPACE key to display diluents list or select a reagent from the dropdown menu.
Water
Input an amount of pure water to dilute reagents between 100 and 350 μL (1 μL step).
(5) <The setting for display or operational conditions>

Decimal Points
Specify number of decimal points for concentrated value used for display, printing, FD and host computer
output.
Select number from the dropdown menu (0 - 5).
Normal Range
This displays the setting information of Normal Ranges. (Maximum 50 types)
Input minimum and maximum values in Normal Range.
The value should be from 0 to 9,999,999 (number of digits specified in “Decimal Points” will be
effective ).
Min: Flag “L” will be attached with measurement result when its concentrated value is under this
value.
Max: Flag “H” will be attached with the measurement result when its concentrated value is over this value.
This Normal Range check (L / H) will not be available when Min / Max settings are 0 / 0.
Register Range Names at the [System (F9)] – [Range screen].
Settings for age ranges of each generation can be modified on the job menu [System (F9)] – [Setup2].
Technical Range (Conc.)
Input the minimum and maximum range for measurement range (a concentration).
When measurement result exceeds its minimum or maximum, the sign “>” or “<” will be added to the
result.
“Conc.” value specified in this list will be output as its minimum and maximum value and an automatic
rerun will be implemented when you set the automatic rerun function effective.
Technical Range (mAbs. /10)
Technical range set in the job menu [System (F9)] – [Setup2] is displayed.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.1 Normal
3-31
No. Descriptions
(5) SPT Wash

Specify a reagent name for SPT cleaning.
Click SPACE key to display the list or select a reagent from the drop-down menu.
Reagents registered as “Wash” in the job menu [System (F9)] – [Reagent] will be displayed.
Stirring Speed
Specify a stirring speed.
5 levels are available depending on the stickiness of the reagent.
UH: stirring for reagents that are extremely high stickiness.
VH: stirring for reagents that are very high stickiness.
High: stirring for reagents that are high stickiness.
Middle: standard stirring.
Low: stirring for reagents that are low stickiness.
None: stirring OFF
(6) Copy
This will copy settings.
Click copy check box “ON” and specify a destination method to be copied with “Method” or “Name”.
Then press Save button and settings can be copied.
When “Sample” (sample category) of the destination method is “Common”, all sample categories will
be copied.
Save
This button will save editing data.
Cancel
This button will not save editing data.
Delete
This will delete selecting methods.
Press this button and a confirmation message will be shown and then click OK to implement the delete.
Click Cancel to cancel.
Print
Click this button to print out the condition list for methods.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.1 Normal
3-32
Auto Rerun Conditions

Normal, STAT and Online sample types will be implemented auto rerun.
Auto rerun conditions are as follows:
1. Error Flag (LIN, PRO, ABS)
Rerun will be implemented under the condition of “Rerun (High / Prozone)”
2. Technical Range (High)
Rerun will be implemented under the condition of “Rerun (High / Prozone)”.
3. Technical Range (Low)
Rerun will be implemented under the condition of “Rerun (Low)”.
(When two or more error flags (LIN, PRO, ABS) happens simultaneously, a rerun will be executed under
the condition of “Rerun (High / Prozone)”.
Sampling Volume Correction in rerun

You can set different sample volume in rerun from normal round and correction for results in rerun will be
done as follows:
[Results in Rerun after correction] = [Results in Rerun] × [Sample Ratio in Normal Round / Sample Ratio in
Rerun]
Sample Ratio in Normal Round = [S / (S + R1 + R2)]

Sample Ratio in Rerun = [SR / (SR + R1 + R2)]
R1: R1 Volume
R2: R2 Volume
S: Sample Volume in Normal Round
SR: Sample volume in Rerun (High / Prozone or Low)
3.2 Parameter
3.2.1 Normal
3-33
3.2.2 [Normal 2]:Chemistry Parameters (2)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
No. Description
(1) Method
Select method number.
Select a method number from the list to press the SPACE key or choose a number from the drop-down
menu. You can also input a method number directly.
Specify method number and its information will be displayed.
Name
Method name will be displayed when you specify method number.
Sample
Select a sample category.
Choose a sample category from drop-down menu, Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma.
Select “Common” if you do not need to specify a sample category.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.2 Normal 2
3-34
No. Description
(2) <Limit Check>

Duplicate Limit
This is for dispersion check in duplicate / triplicate calibration measurement.
Input a threshold of an absorbance difference value (ΔABS) of each measurement result between 1 and
99,999 (mAbs / 10).
When ΔABS exceeds this threshold, DUP error will be displayed and calibration value will not be
updated.
Sensitivity Limit
This is to check sensitivity in calibration measurement.
Input a threshold of sensitivity range of the ΔABS between 1 and 99,999 (mAbs / 10).
When ΔABS is under this threshold, SEN error will be displayed and the calibration value will not be
updated.
Linearity Limit
This is to check the linearity for a time course in Rate Method.
Input a threshold ratio between 0.1 and 99.9(%) in the left side and input a threshold value between 1 and
99,999 (mAbs / 10) / min in the right side.
Judgment
This judgment is decided by ratio (%) between the slope calculated by the moving average of previous
3 points measurement range and the slope calculated by the moving average of following 3 points
measurement range
.
(a) A span of Measurement range (the number of photometry points) = n (n≥4)
(b) The slope of the moving average 1 – 3, calculated by regression analysis: ΔABSfirst
(c) The slope of the moving average (n - 3) - (n - 1), calculated by regression analysis: ΔABSlast
(e) The slope of the moving average 1 - (n - 1), calculated by regression analysis: ΔABSslope
Linearity Rate will become as follows:
[Linearity Rate] = [ | ΔABSfirst - ΔABSlast | / | ΔABSslope | ] × 100 (%)
When the linearity rate calculated is greater than the threshold, linearity error will be displayed and LIN
Flag will be attached to the result.
Measurement range applied for this linearity check will be the Measurement Range 1 for 1-point Rate
Method and the Measurement Range 2 for 2-point Rate Method.
This Linearity Limit Check will not be applied for following cases.
(a) Not Rate Method
(b) | ΔABSslope | Threshold Value
(c) | ΔABSfirst - ΔABSlast | Threshold Value
(d) Measurement Range of photometry point is under 4 points
(e) Higher priority errors happen
(f) Sample Types are Control / ISE
3.2 Parameter
3.2.2 Normal 2
3-35
No. Descriptions
(2) Prozone Limit

This is to check a decreasing phenomenon (Prozone phenomenon) in high concentration of photometry.
Input a threshold value (limit rate) between 0.00001 and 99.99999 in a ratio of reaction speed.
Specify a value from “Upper” or “Lower” by drop-down menu depending on max or min value in the
“Prozone Limit”.
Specify an absorbance rage and sensitivity;
(a) SL1 - S: the first number of measuring point of Slope Range-1
(b) SL1 - F: the last number of measuring point of Slope Range-1 (SL1S < SL1F)
(c) SL2 - S: the second number of measuring point of Slope Range-2
(d) SL2 - F: the last number of measuring point of Slope Range-2 (SL2S < SL2F)
(e) Sens: a number between 1 and 999,999 (mAbs / 10) for the sensitivity
When a result exceeds this limit, error PRO Flag will be attached to the result.
Prozone check will no be executed in following cases;
(a) Control sample measurement
(b) Sensitivity does not exceed “Sensitivity Limit” value.
Absorbance Limit
This is to check a limit level of absorbance reaction.
This check will be applied to 1- point Rate Method.
Reaction
Specify a value “Increase” or “Decrease” from drop-down menu as reactive trend.
Limit
Input a number between 1 and 999,999 (mAbs / 10) as a threshold value.
Get an absorbance value within bellow conditions;
[Absorbance value of Primary Wavelength] – [Water blank of Primary Wavelength] < [Threshold]
When absorbance value of all measuring points or all points except the first measuring point exceeds this
threshold, error AB1 Flag will be displayed.
When the first two or more points are within this limit and measuring points which exceed this limit are
within 1 minute, result (ΔABS) will be calculated by measuring points within the limit and add an error flag
AB2 to the result.
(3) < Blank measurement >

Blank measurement
Choose a calibration method for reagent blank from the drop-down list.
Disable reagent blank and S1 blank
This does not execute a calibration using a reagent blank or a S1 (zero concentration) blank.
Enable S1 Blank (Factor or Linear)
This executes a calibration using S1 blank.
Enable reagent blank
This will execute a calibration using reagent blank.
Enable reagent blank for S1 (Linear)
This will use reagent blank as S1 sample.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.2 Normal 2
3-36
No. Descriptions
Measurement of Reagent Blank during Run
(3)
Specify time when to run Reagent Blank Measurement.
Choose whether Reagent Blank is executed or not in measurement.
Daily (Everyday)
When there are orders which Reagent Blank Measurement have not been implemented in a day, Reagent
Blank Measurement will be executed. Result of samples will be calibrated with this Reagent Blank.
Next Run (Every time)
Reagent Blank Measurement will be executed at the beginning of measurements of each round.
None (Invalid)
Reagent Blank Measurement will not be executed. (previous blank result will be applied as reagent blank.)
Reagent blank measurement at calibration
Specify whether to use system water as a sample or not on Reagent Blank Measuring.
Reagent blank (no sample)
Reagent Blank Measurement will be executed without sample.
Reagent blank (system water)
Reagent Blank Measurement will be executed with system water.
The number of measurement
Specify number of measurement for Reagent Blank Measurement.
Choose Single / Duplicate / Triplicate from the drop-down menu.
Reagent Blank Limit Checks
This will check the variation of Reagent Blank Measurement when Duplicate or Triplicate is selected.
Enter limit value, absorbance measurement differential (ΔABS), between 1 and 99,999 (mAbs / 10).
(4) Instrument Factor

Specify a slope (a) and intercept (b) to correct measurement result.
(a) is a slope and (b) is an intercept of linear equation, [Y = aX + b].
a: -99.9 to 99.9
b: -999.99 to 999.99
(5) Save
Cancel
Click this button not to save editing data.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.2 Normal 2
3-37
3.2.3 [ISE]:ISE Parameters

You can specify measurement conditions for ISE.
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) Sample
Select one category from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
Select “Common” when all sample categories are the same conditions.
ISE Type
Select one type from drop-down menu.
When sample category is “Common”, select “ISE”, or “ISE (D)”.
When “Serum”, or “Plasma” is selected as sample category, “ISE” should be selected.
When “Urine” is selected as sample category, “ISE (D)” should be selected.
Urine Diluent Reagent Name

Specify ISE diluent to use when “ISE (D)” is specified.
Select a diluent from drop-down menu.
Instrument Factor
Specify a slope (a) and an intercept (b) to correct the measurement result.
To correct the result with a liner equation [Y= aX + b], input slope (a) and intercept (b) of Na, K, and Cl.
a: -99.99 to 99.99
b: -999.99 to 999.99
3.2 Parameter
3.2.3 ISE
3-38
No. Descriptions
(2) Normal Range

Specify Normal Range.
Input the lower limit and the upper limit in normal value for Na, K, and Cl.
Validation Range: Na:0 to 999.9

K : 0 to 99.99
Cl: 0 to 999.9
Min: The flag “L” will be attached with the measurement result when the result is under this value.
Max: The flag “H” will be attached with the measurement result when the result is over this value.
(3) Save
Cancel
Print
Click this button to print out setting list.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.3 ISE
3-39
3.2.4 [SI]:Serum Information Parameters

Define measurement conditions of the serum information.
(2)
(1) (3)
(4)
Criteria
Depending on assay method, high turbidity, hemolysis and bilirubin in serum may affect measurement results.
This analyzer can describe a degree of Turbidity (L), Hemolysis (H) and Icterus (I) of serum by numeric
expression. In addition, it is possible to display SI criteria as numeric value.
No. Descriptions
(1) Factor A to Factor F

Input a numeric value between 0 and 999,999 for Factor A, B, C, D, E and F.
Sampling Volume
Input a volume of dispensing sample (μL).
Instrument Factor (H, L, I)

To correct results with liner equation (Y = aX + b), input each slope (a) and intercept (b) of H, L and
I.
a: - 99.9 to 99.9
b: - 999.99 to 999.99
Input “a=1” and “b=0” when correction is not necessary.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.4 SI
3-40
No. Descriptions
(2) Reagent Type

Select a reagent type from drop-down menu, R1 or Dil.
Reagent Name
Select a reagent name from drop-down menu.
Volume
Input reagent dispense volume between 20 and 350 (μL).
(3) <Abbreviations for SI criteria>

H: setting for Hemolysis judgments.
L: setting for Turbidity judgments.
I: setting for icterus judgments.
(The left side box)
Input an abbreviation of SI criteria. (Within 5 letters)
*Example for Hemolysis) If setting is “ 0 < 1”, the result will be “H0” when hemolysis is lower than
1.
(The right side box)
Input threshold value for SI criteria (between 0 to 999,999).
(4) Save
Cancel
Print
Click this button to print out a setting list.
The serum information will be calculated with following formula:
A, C, D are 10 multiplied values and B, E, F are 10 – 5 multiplied values.

(the value α ,β, γ, δ, ε are considered as λxxx. The λxxx means a value that an absorbance λrxxx of each primary
wavelength is corrected with water blank λwxxx.)
Moreover, you have to divide the value by 10 because units are different between the output of the measured
absorbance and the serum.
Take a 450nm case for an example.
λ450 = (λr450 -λw450) / 10
The default settings are:

α: 600nm
β: 700nm
γ: 570nm
δ: 415nm
ε: 510nm
3.2 Parameter
3.2.4 SI
3-41
3.2 Parameter
3.2.4 SI
3-42
3.2.5 [Calc]:Method-to-Method Calculation

You can define a method-to-method calculation.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
No. Descriptions
(1) No.
Specify number of method.
Numbers for method-to-method calculations are 71 - 80 and 3001 - 3040.
Name
Specify a method name.
Input name with alphanumeric or symbol characters within 6 digits.
Specify a method name and information of the name will be shown.
Print Name
Specify a method name for printing.
Input print name with alphanumeric or symbol characters within 15 digits
This specified name will be printed out as the measurement name in printing or outputting. Method name
which you have defined in “Name” will be printed out if this Print Name is unset.
Sample
Select a sample category from Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
Unit
Specify a unit used for printing or sending result data to host computer with alphanumeric or symbol
characters within 6 digits.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.5 Calc
3-43
No. Descriptions
(1) Decimal Points

Specify number of digits of decimal point of the concentration printed out as measurement result.
Select the number 0 - 5 (digits).
Expression
Input an expression formula.
Up to 10 methods can be used for one formula.
Select methods from a list and double click them, then those methods can be used to expression formula.
Expression formulas will be checked when registering and if there are any errors, the expression cannot be
registered.
(2) <The list of Normal Range>

Input a normal range.
Select the number you want to update from the list and double click it, then the number can be edited. The
lower limit should be less than the upper limit.
When the upper limit is not specified, the upper limit will not be checked and when the lower limit is not
specified, then lower limit will not be checked.
Results which are lower than the lower limit will have “L” and results which are higher than the upper
limit will have “H”.
(3) <The list of method numbers>

“+”, “-”, “*”, “/”, “(”, “)” buttons are available for this calculation.
Click these buttons and the buttons will be entered in the ”Expression” cell.
The list of method numbers
Select a method name or number and double click them, then they will be entered in the expression.
(4) Save
Cancel
Cancel this button not to save editing data.
Print
3.2 Parameter
3.2.5 Calc
3-44
3.2.6 [Profile]:Profile
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) No.
Specify number of a profile. You can register method numbers between 1 and 20. (20 types)
When a number you specified is already registered, profile name and methods will be shown.
Name
Input a profile name with alphanumeric or symbol characters within 6 digits.
Sample
(2) <The list of measurement methods>

The registered measurement method based on selected “Sample” (category) will be displayed.
Select measurement method(s) to apply in the profile and click the check box “ON”.
(3) Save
Cancel
Print
3.2 Parameter
3.2.6 Profile
3-45
3.2.7 [Order]:Measurement Order

You can define measuring orders and print orders.
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) <Measurement Order>

Specify a measurement order.
Drag a target method where you want to move and you can change measurement order.
Same Order
Check “Same Order” check box ON and the print order will be set as the same order as the measurement
order.
(2) <Print Order>

Specify a print order.
Drag a target method where you want to move and you can change print order.
Check “Same Order” check box ON and the print order will be set as the same order as the measurement
order.
(3) Save
Click this button to save editing data
Cancel
3.2 Paramter
3.2.7 Order
3-46
3.2.8 [Wash]:Nozzle Wash Program

This is RPT nozzles wash program.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3) (5)
(6)
No. Functions
(1) <Selecting target methods>

Select numbers of methods and Nozzle Wash Program will be performed between Method1 and
Method2.
Method1
Select a number of Mehod1 and check “ALL check box” if all methods are target.
Method2
Select a number of Mehod2 and check “ALL check box” if all methods are target.
(2) <Reagent setting>

Specify details for R1 (RPT1) and R2 (RPT2).
R1 -> R1
Define details of RPT1 wash program (from R1 to R1 operations).
R2 -> R2
Define details of RPT2 wash program (from R2 to R2 operations).
3.2 Parameter
3.2.8 Wash
3-47
No. Descriptions
(3) <The setting Wash method>

Select a wash solution to use.
Sys. Water
Execute a wash program with system water (pure water).
Wash Bottle
Execute a wash program with wash solution in RCU specified in reagent bottle setting.
(4) <The setting reagent bottles>

Select a reagent bottle for this wash program.
Reagent Type
Select a reagent type from “R1”, “R2”, and “Wash”.
Reagent Name
Select a reagent name from drop-down menu.
(5) <The setting list>

Method list registered will be displayed.
You can select methods in this list and edit them.
(6) Delete
Click this button to delete contents selected.
Select this button and a confirmation message will be displayed. Then press OK button to execute the
delete and press Cancel button to cancel.
Save
Cancel
Print
Click this button to print out a setting list.
3.2 Parameter
3.2.8 Wash
3-48
3.2 Parameter
3.2.8 Wash
3-49
3.3 [Calibration (F7)]:Setup Menu 2

3.3.1 [Reg Calib]:Calibration
You can define a content of calibration for each measurement method.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
No. Functions
(1) Method
Select a method number. Input a method number directly in a cell or get a number form drop-down menu.
Or press a space key and methods registered will be popped up at the center of screen, then you can select
the method from the list.
Name
A selected method name will be displayed.
Sample
Sampling
Select a number of measurements for Standard sample and Blank sample, “Duplicate” or “Triplicate”
from drop-down menu.
Check Interval
Define a validation for a calibration.
Input an interval between 0 and 99 (days). Setting 0 will skip a validation check.
Methods will be red color on [RUN (F5)] - [Selection] and CTO error flag will be added with results
when this valid interval has been passed since the previous calibration date.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.1 Reg Calib
3-49
Chapter 3 Explanation of Menu
No. Functions
(1) Auto (Refer to “3.1.7 [Std QC]”)

Select an automatic measurement condition from drop-down menu shown below.
- Change Lot: When lot numbers of reagents for the calibration are changed, calibration measurement is
executed.
- Timeout: When a valid interval at “Auto Interval” is passed, calibration measurement is executed.
<Type of Automatic measurement for calibration>
Select details of the measurement in a cell beside “Auto” from drop-down menu.
- Blank: Blank measurement
- One: One-point calibration
- Two: Two-points calibration
- Full Calibration: Full calibration
Auto Interval (Refer to “3.1.7 [Std QC])
Input an interval between 0 and 99 (hours) for automatic measurement.
This setting is available when the “Timeout” is selected as automatic measurement conditions.
Type
Select a type for a calibration curve.
Select a type from Factor / Linear / Point To Point / Log-Logit / Spline / Exponential from drop-down menu.
Lot
Select Old / New from drop-down menu as reagent lot.
Each method has two types of calibration results depending on reagetn lot.
“New” is a newer calibration result and “Old” is an older result.
Material Name
You can input a material name for a calibrator with alphanumeric within 8 letters.
(2) S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7

These are concentrations of Standard Samples. You can define Standard Samples up to 7 points. (S1 is the
lowest concentration.)
Conc
Input each concentration value at 7 points of the standard sample.
Valid range: 0 – 9,999,999 (This range should be within 5 decimal places and concentration value should be
S1 < Sn < S7.)
Numbers of standard samples defined here will be numbers of Standard Samples when you registor
Standard Samples on [Run (F1)] – [Selection].
WORK
Measurement results (absorbance value) will be displayed here at a full calibration or re-calibration (a
measurement by 1 point or 2 points) measurement.
MASTER
Measurement results (absorbance value) will be displayed here at a full calibration.
Note that WORK / MASTER can be input manually and these value should be between –999,999 - 999,999
(mABS / 10).
Lot No(S) All
You can input a lot number of a calibrator with alphanumeric within 6 digits.
This input “Lot No (S)” can be seen following screens;
Measurement Result Search Screen, Calibration Result Printing and Result for File Output.
Check “All” check box ON and S1 lot number can be input, then the same lot number as S1 will be
displayed from S2 to S7.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.1 Reg Calib
3-50
No. Functions
(2) K
This value will be available on selecting “Factor “ in “Type” as calibration type.
Input value K Factor between –99,999.999 and 99,999.999 (“0” is not effective).
S1 Blank
This will be available when “Factor” or “Linear” is selected in “Calculation”.
This check box will be available when “Enable S1 Blank (Factor or Linear)” is chosen on [Parameter (F6)] -
[Normal2].
Reagent Blank for S1
This will be displayed when “Linear” is selected in “Calculation”.
This chek box will be ON when “Enable reagent blank for S1 (Linear)” is chosen on [Parameter (F6)] -
[Normal2].
(3) R Lot No (R1) / (R2)

Reagent lot numbers used for calibration will be displayed.
Last
The last date of a full calibration will be displayed.
<Graph display of calibration curve>
Calibration curves will be displayed here.
2 types of calibration curves will be described in 2 colors, blue for “Work” and red for “Master”.
Any results containing an error flag will not be used for a calibration curve.
Reagent blank / Last
The last result of a reagent blank measured without error and its date will be displayed.
Reagent blank value (Delta-ABS) is obtained from conditons of each method based on the last reagent blank
time course and cuvette blank value.
Blank / Last
The last result of a blank sample without error and its date will be displayed.
(4) <Recalculation>
Type
Select a calibration curve used for recalculation from “Work” or “Master” from drop-down menu.
Absorbance
Input an absorbance value to recalculate between –999,999 and 999,999.
Conc
Concentration value recalculated will be displayed from 0 to 9,999,999.
Recalculation
Click this button to execute a recalculation.
(5) Save
Cancel
Click this butoon not to save editing data.
Print
Click this bottun to print out setting details.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.1 Reg Calib
3-51
Processes of reagent lot numbers at calibrations:
Full / Part Lot Numbers Process

Previous calibration result will be stored as “Old” and new calibration will be
Full Different
stored as “New”.
Full Same Previous calibration of the same lot number as new calibration will be overwritten.
Full No Numbers Previous calibration will be overwritten.
Part Different Previous calibration will be overwritten.
Part Same Previous calibration of the same lot number as new calibration will be overwritten.
Part No Numbers Previous calibration will be overwritten.
Full ------ It will update the number currently being displayed.
Part ------ It will update the number currently being displayed.
A calculation for concentrations out of the range of a calibrator:

Concentration Value when
Calibration Concentration Conversion “Disable Extrapolated
Concentration Range OVR Flag
Curve Types Formula Results” is ON
([System (F9)] – [Setup])
Extended Calibration Curve
Factor All Not Added
will be applied.
·Below S1 Extended Calibration Curve
Linear Not Added will be applied.
·Over Sn
Tangent line of a Calibration S1
Spline ·Below S1 Added
Curve at S1 will be applied.
Tangent line of a Calibration Sn
·Over Sn Added
Curve at Sn will be applied.
Extended Calibration Curve S1
Point to Point ·Below S1 Added between S1 and S2 will be
applied.
Extended Calibration Curve Sn
·Over Sn Added between Sn-1 and Sn will be
applied.
·Below S1 Linear Approximation will be S1
Log Logit Added
(S1 concentration=0) applied.
·Below S1 Tangent line of Calibration
Not Added
(S1concentration<>0) Curve at S1 will be applied.
Tangent line of Calibration
·Over Sn Not Added
Curve at Sn will be applied.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.1 Reg Calib
3-52
3.3.2 [Serial Dilut]:Serial Dilution

You can define the setting for auto-dilution calibration.
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) Method
Select a method name from drop-down menu.
Name
Method name selected will be displayed.
Sample
Select a sample category Common / Serum / Urine / Plasma from drop-down menu.
Lot No(S)
This shows a number of a calibrator lot.
When different lot numbers are used in each concentration, lot number of the highest concentration
calibrator registered at [Calibration (F7)] - [Reg Calib] will be shown.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.2 Serial Dilution
3-53
No. Descriptions
(2) Conc
Concentration values of standard samples registered at [Calibration (F7)] - [Reg Calib] will be displayed.
Sample (uL)
Diluent (uL)
The best suite volume calculated by the highest concentration calibrator and specified concentration value
will be displayed as a default.
Approximate value will be in red when a target dilution rate cannot be calculated within the range. You
can edit sample volume within available dispensing range if necessary.
Available dispensing range

Sample: 2 – 35 (0.1 μL step)
Diluent:45 – 350 (1 μL step)
Total amount of dispensing “Sample” and “Diluent” should be between 80 μL and 450 μL.
(3) Reset
Click this button to show the best volume calculated from the target dilution rate.
Save
Cancel
3.3 Calibration
3.3.2 Serial Dilut
3-54
3.3.3 [Multi-Std]:Multi Standard

You can define multi standard samples
(1)
(2)
(3)
No. Functions
(1) Set No.

Select a number of Multi Standard Sample between 1 and 10 from drop-down menu.
Name
Input Multi Standard Set name in alphanumeric within 6 digits.
Sample
(2) <Measurement method>

Select measurement methods to register.
Select methods registered in a list for every Multi Standard Set. Click the check box ON to register.
(3) Save
Cancel
Print
Click this button to print out settings.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.3 Mult-Std
3-55
3.3.4 [ISE]:ISE Calibration Result

You can see the latest ISE calibration result on this screen.
(1)
No. Functions
(1) Date Time

The last measurement date and time will be displayed.
Na (50-66) These values are permissible range of each method. The last measurement results
K (50-63) will be shown on the right side.
When the result exceeded the range, “H” or “L” flag will be added to results in red.
Cl (40-59)
ERROR CODE
The last measurement error code will be shown.
3.3 Calibration
3.3.4 ISE
3-56
Chapter 3 Explanetion of Menus
3.4 [QC (F8)]:QC Menu

The results of Quality Control samples are kept in a database for half a year. Each method of the result can be
displayed in a graph or list.
Click QC (F8) button on the job menu and you can select one of the following on the tab menu.
- Graph (Quality Control graph display)
- Details
- Daily
- Cumulative
- Settings (for judgment criteria)
- Registration (for QC sample)
When the “Enable live QC report” in the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Setup], which is printing setting for
printers, is set to effective, a measurement result (the information of quality control) will be printed out
automatically after a measurement of QC sample was executed.
3.4.1 [Graph]:QC Graph

You can see the measurement data of 3-types of control samples in graph, by selecting a display type from
“Daily” or “Cumulative”.
Click to select the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Graph].
(1)
(5)
(2)
(4) (3)
(6)
3.4 QC
3.4.1 Graph
3-57
No. Descriptions
(1) Method
As for the setting, 3 ways are available. The first one is to click and select a measurement method
number on the list by pressing Space, the second is to select a number displayed on the pull-down
menu, the third is to input a number with the keyboard.
- General Biochemistry (1-60): 60 methods
- ISE (1001-1003): 3(6) methods
- ISE diluent (1005-1007): 3 methods
- SI (2001-2003): 3 methods
- Method to method calculation (3001-3040):
Select one from a sum of 40 methods, 106(109) methods
Some related ISE methods depending on the setting definitions in samples will be displayed.
- Common: 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE and 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE (D)
- Serum, Plasma: 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE
- Urine: 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE (D)
Name 1111
The method name registered on the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Registration] will be displayed in
the cell box when its number was specified.
Sample
Select a sample category from pull-down menu.
- Common
- Serum
- Urine
- Plasma
(2) Date
Specify the starting date for the graph.
You can input the date from keyboard or pull-down menu to display a calendar.
Scroll bars for

Year / Month
(3) Display Type

Select a display type for graph from pull-down menu.
- Daily: Measurement results in a day specified on “Date” will be displayed.
- Cumulative: Cumulative measurement results for recent 30 days from the day you specified
or in a day will be displayed.
(4) Control Name

The registered sample name in the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings] will be displayed from pull-down
menu.
Control name which method number and sample are matched can be selected.
Select a sample to display from up to 3 samples.
(5) Search
Click Search button to start a search and a measurement result of Quality Control sample will
be displayed in graphic.
3.4 QC
3.4.1 Graph
3-58
No. Descriptions
(6) <Graph display>

(E.g.)
Display Type 1Daily1
+3SD line >+3 154.5
+2SD line +2 151.5
+1SD line +1 148.5
Mean value 145.5
-1SD line -1 142.5
-2SD line -2 139.5
-3SD line < -3 136.5
Jun
5 6 7 8
Scrolling available
Display Type 1Cumulative1
+3SD line >+3 154.5

+2SD line +2 151.5
+1SD line +1 148.5
Mean value 145.5
-1SD line -1 142.5
-2SD line -2 139.5
-3SD line < -3 136.5
May Jun
2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2
Scrolling not available
Number of data / Average value / Standard deviation / CV (%)

Number of data, Average value, Standard deviation and CV (%) will be displayed by using the data
calculated automatically from all of the measurement results.
N: Number of data
X: Average value
SD: Standard deviation
CV: Coefficient of variance
Any measurement data determined as an error in the measurement results are removed from
calculation.
For those calculations, the conditions of the graph display are supposed to apply defined in the tab
menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings].
The display color Graph plot
The judgment of the measurement results will be displayed by plotting in colors of the following.
Black symbol: Normal “(plot black)”
Yellow symbol: WARNING “(plot yellow)”
Red symbol: ERROR “(plot red)”
3.4 QC
3.4.1 Graph
3-59
3.4.2 [Details]:QC Results
Records of the judgment of the QC results will be displayed one by one, specifying the measurement methods and
date.
Click to select the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Details].
(1) (2)
ATS
*
(3)
* (4) (5)
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
ATS Cont1
(6)
No. Descriptions
(1) Method
The way of selecting the number of the measurement method is the same as the tab menu
[Graph].
As for the setting, 3 ways are available. The first one is to click and select a measurement
method number on the list by pressing Space, the second is to click a number by means of
pull-down menu, and the third is to input a number with a keyboard typing.
Name nnn
The measurement method name registered will be displayed when its number was specified.
Sample
Select a sample category from pull-down menu;
- Common
- Serum
- Urine
- Plasma
3.4 QC
3.4.2 Details
3-60
No. Descriptions
(2) Result Output

Select the destination for an output from pull-down menu.
- Monitor
- Print
- File
The specification of the output folder: …(
When “File” is selected, a folder will be shown by a click of the …, and you can specify the
destination directory where the extracted result should be placed.
The error messages for search output
When you specified a floppy disc as an output device and a disc is not inserted or an unformatted
disc is inserted,
“Floppy disk is not either inserted or formatted.”
The warning will be displayed.

When there are not enough volume;
“Not enough disk space to copy files.”
The error message will be displayed.
(3) Date From 11 Disable

Specify the starting date for search.
11 Disable
- When the check box “OFF”;
- When the check box “ON”;
This means to search all records in the past and you cannot specify the search starting date.
Round # 111111(
Input the measurement round number for the starting search date between 1 and 99.
Entering asterisks “* ” means all rounds are applied.
To 11 Disable
Specify the ending date for search.
11 Disable
- When the check box “OFF”;
- When the check box “ON”;
This setting is to search all records in the past and you cannot specify a search start date.
Setting date should be [From (the search starting date)] ≤ [To (the search ending date)].
Round # 111111(
Input the measurement round number for the ending search date between 1 and 99.
Entering asterisks “*” means all rounds are applied.
(4) 1Search1
This will search results with specified details.
Click the Search button to start extracting results of the specified details and the term days so
that the measurement result(s) of Quality Control sample will be output in the place you specified.
3.4 QC
3.4.2 Details
3-61
No. Descriptions
(5) Delete
This will execute a delete process.
Clicking the Delete button, a confirmation-warning message will be displayed.
“Warning!
Is this all right if the measurement data is deleted?”
Click OK button to delete the measurement methods and date range of the measurement results.
Click Cancel button to cancel the deleting.
If the search result exceeds more than 1,000 lines, the following message will notify you. You
cannot delete those data though you click Delete button.
“Too many results meet search condition. Narrow the condition any try again.”
Click OK button to change the contents of the search conditions and retry it.
(6) <The result list display for details>

Date
The date of the measurement result will be displayed in the format ”yyyy / mm / dd”.
R#
The round number will be displayed between 0 and 99.
No.
When the result was measured more than one time at the same round, the round number on
which the result was executed will be displayed.
Method
The measurement method name will be displayed in alphanumeric within 6 digits.
Ctrl ID
The Control sample name will be displayed in alphanumeric within 20 digits.
Conc
The measurement result of the control sample will be displayed in 7 digits between -9,999,999
and 9,999,999.
Any invalid values will be displayed with “ ***** ”.
WARNING
If the Control sample is specified for “WARNING” as the judgment criterion in the tab menu
[QC (F8)] – [Settings], the judgment result will be displayed in this column.
A higher priority error should be displayed if more than 2 errors are found in the result.
ERROR
If the Control sample is specified for “ERROR” as the judgment criterion in the tab menu [QC
(F8)] – [Settings], the judgment result will be displayed in this column.
A higher priority error should be displayed if more than 2 errors are found in the result.
Flag
If the measurement result you selected contains any errors, an error flag will be displayed with
the result.
For further details of error flags, refer to “3.4.5 [Settings]”.
3.4 QC
3.4.2 Details
3-62
3.4.3 [Dairy]:QC Results
This will sum up QC measurement data of control samples you specified a day and display them in each
measurement method.
Click the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Cumulative].
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(7) The list of the detail search results
No. Descriptions
(1) Method
How to select the number of the measurement method is the same as the tab menu [Details].
As for the setting, 3 ways are available. The first one is to click and select a measurement
method number on the list by pressing Space, the second is to click a number displayed the
pull-down menu, the third is to input a number with a keyboard typing.
Name
Same as the tab menu [Details], the measurement method will be displayed.
Sample
Same as the tab menu [Details], you can select a sample from pull-down menu.
(2) Result Output

Same as the tab menu [Details], you can specify the output destination and an output folder for
a measurement result.
(3) Control Name

Select a name of Control Samples.
- When Method is blank: Select a Control Name.
- When Method is not blank: Select a control sample name registered in the tab menu [QC (F8)] –
[Settings] from pull-down menu.
3.4 QC
3.4.3 Daily
3-63
No. Descriptions
(4) Date: From 11 Disable / To 11 Disable

Specify the searching date.
11 Disable
- When the check box “OFF”
Click pull-down arrow on the Combo Box and a calendar will be displayed, then you can click
the search date on it to select.
-·When the check box “ON”;
This setting is to search all records in the past and you cannot specify a search start date.
Round # 111111(ラウンド番号)
Input the measurement round number for the ending search date between 1 and 99.
Entering asterisks “* ” means all rounds are applied.
(5) Search(検索)
This will execute the extraction of the result with specified details.
Click this bottun to seach specified Method and control sample results then you can out put all data
to specified field.
(6) Delete(削除)
This will delete data you are editing.
Click Delete button and a confirmation message for the delete notifies you.
“Warning!
Is this all right if the measurement data is deleted?”
The measurement result of Method and the raging dates you specified will be deleted by clicking
OK button, and will stop the delete by clicking Cancel.
(7) <The result list display for details>

Method
The measurement method name will be displayed in alphanumeric within 6 digits.
N
The number of the data samples will be displayed.
Mean (X)
The average concentration calculated from the measurement result will be displayed.
The digit numbers of the fraction part will be displayed in the digit numbers specified at the
“Decimal Points” in the tab menu [Parameter (F6)] – [Normal].
Note that any data that QC judgment resulted in an error are removed.
-2SD
The latest measurement results out of the range of -2SD
The -2SD value calculated from the target measurement result will be displayed with a form of
“-999.999”.
When the calculation is invalid because there is less than 1 point, the value will be displayed in
blank.
+2SD
The latest measurement results out of the range of +2SD
The -2SD value calculated from the target measurement result will be displayed with a form of
“999.999”.
When the calculation is invalid because there is less than 1 point, the value will be displayed in
blank.
3.4 QC
3.4.3 Daily
3-64
No. Descriptions
(7) SD
The standard deviation (or SD) value calculated from the target measurement result will be displayed
with a form of “999.999”.
When the calculation is invalid because there is less than 1 point, the value will be displayed in blank
CV
The coefficient of variance (or CV) value calculated from the target measurement result will be
displayed with a form of “Z9.999”.
When the calculation is invalid because there is less than 1 point, the value will be displayed in blank.
Min
This will show the minimum value of the measurement result.
The digit numbers of the fraction part will be displayed in the digit numbers specified at the “Decimal
Points” in the tab menu [Parameters (F6)] – [Normal].
Max
This will show the maximum value of the measurement result.
The digit numbers of the fraction part will be displayed in the digit numbers specified at the “Decimal
Points” in the tab menu [Parameters (F6)] – [Normal].
Warning/Error
QC judgment results (10 digits) defined on the [Settings] screen as “WARNING” or “ERROR” will be
displayed.
The higher priority result will be displayed if the judgment contains some errors.
Refer to the “3.4.5 QC Settings” as the letters the judgment results for order of priority.
3.4 QC
3.4.3 Daily
3-65
3.4.4 [Cumulative]:QC Results

This will sum up the QC measurement data of control samples you specified the cumulative days and then display
them in each measurement method.
Click to select the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Cumulative].
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(7) The list of the detail search results
No. Descriptions
(1) Method
Selecting the number of the measurement method is the same as the tab menu [Details].
number on the list by pressing Space, the second one is to click a number displayed a pull-down
menu of the Combo Box and the third is to input a number with a keyboard typing.
Name 1 1
The measurement method name registered will be displayed when its number was specified.
Sample
Same as the tab menu [Details], you can select a sample from pull-down menu.
(2) Result Output

Same as the tab menu [Details], you can specify the output destination and an output folder for a
measurement result.
(3) Control Name (Control Sample name)

Same as the tab menu [Daily], you can select a control name.
3.4 QC
3.4.4 Cumulative
3-66
No. Descriptions
(4) Date From 11 Disable

Same as the tab menu Details, you can select a search start date as well.
To 11 Disable
Same as the tab menu Details, you can select a search end date as well.
(5) Search
Same as the tab menu Daily, you can select a control name
(6) Delete
Same as the tab menu Daily, you can execute a delete.
(7) <The result list display for cumulative>

The result list display for details is the same as the result of the Daily.
3.4 QC
3.4.4 Cumulative
3-67
3.4.5 [Settings]:QC Results

You can specify the control name to use and its criteria to determine in each method.
Click the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings].
(1)
(2) (5)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) (10) (11)
No. Descriptions
Method
(1)
number on the list by pressing Space, the second one is to select a number displayed on the pull-down
menu and the third is to input a number with the keyboard.
- General Biochemistry (1-60): 60 methods

- ISE (1001-1003): 3(6) methods
- ISE diluent (1005-1007): 3 methods
- SI (2001-2003): 3 methods
- Method to method calculation (3001-3040): Select one from a sum of 40 methods, 106(109)
methods
Some related ISE methods depending on the setting definitions in samples will be displayed.
- Common : 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE and 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE (D)
- Serum, Plasma : 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE
- Urine : 3 methods (Na, K, Cl) of ISE (D)
Name 1111
The measurement method name registered will be displayed when its number is specified.
3.4 QC
3.4.5 Settings
3-68
No. Descriptions
(2) Sample
Select a sample category on the list from pull-down menu.
- Common
- Serum
- Urine
- Plasma
(3) Interval 1111 Minutes

Input the number of the Quality Control valid interval minutes for the control samples between 0 and
9,999 (min). If you set ‘0’ to the interval minute, valid term will not be checked.
When the valid interval has passed the date from the previous measurement of the control sample.
method name in the tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Selection] will be displayed in yellow and a CXP flag will be
attached to the measurement result.
(4) Auto test Interval 1111 Tests ; (Refer to “3.1.7 [Std QC]”.)
Input the number of QC test count (0 to 9,999). When the QC test has been passed the desiginated
counts since the last QC measurement was performed, the newly QC measurement will be performed.
When 0 (zero) is inputted, the automatic QC measurement is not performed.
Auto test Interval 1111 Minutes; (Refer to “3.1.7 [Std QC]”.)
Input the number of minutes (0 to 9,999). When the time has been passed the desiginated minutes since
the last QC measurement was performed, the newly QC measurement will be performed.
When 0 (zero) is inputted, the automatic QC measurement is not performed.
(5) Mode
Select a calculation method on the list from pull-down menu.
- Mean-R (calculated by a differential from input mean value)
- X-R (calculated by specified one sample)
When you select “Mean-R”, the cell of “No. 1 ” will be masked and QC data will be calculated by a
differential from the values set in the ” Mean Value”.
The mask of No. 111 will be released when you select “X-R”.
“X” is an average measurement result from some previous data to the latest data.
You can deceide how many privious data you apply at No. 111 .
No. 111
Specify target data in the “X-R” mode.
When the “Mean-R” is selected in “Mode”, the cell of “No. 11 ” will be masked. The number
specified in ”X-R” will be displayed here.
When the “X-R” is selected in “Mode”, you can specify how many data to use. Input the number
between No.1 and 99.
(6) Control Name
Select the name of control sample.
You can select the name from control sample names defined in the tab menu [QC (F8)] –
[Registration].
Mean Value
Input the concentration value for the Control sample you specified between “0” and “9,999,999”. This
value represents the center of the Y-axis on the graph chart.
When the “Mean-R” is selected in “Mode”, you can input a value in this cell.
When the “X-R” is selected”, this method will be masked. (In this case, it will display the value of
“Mean Value” specified in “X-R”.)
When this Mean Value is blank, an error message will be displayed and your cursor will jump on
where the error is occurring.
“Input proper values.”
3.4 QC
3.4.5 Settings
3-69
No. Descriptions
(6) SD
Input a standard deviation value, which is the concentration of the measurement for the control
sample you specified, between 0.001 and 999.999 (value 0 is not acceptable.).
When you input SD, its range will be displayed in a dotted line on the Graph.
When this SD is blank, an error message will be displayed and your cursor will jump on where the
error is occurring.
“Input proper values.”
(7) Rules
Current result exceeds 2SD
Select a judgment method for “Current result exceeds 2SD” from pull-down menu;
- INACTIVE (Black symbol): displayed in black on Graph chart.
Any judgment is not performed for the current result of QC sample.
- WARNING (Yellow symbol): displayed in yellow on Graph chart.
When the current result of QC sample exceeds the 2SD, the flag
“1:2S” will be displayed on the column of the “WARNING” in
[Details], [Daily] and [Cumulative] screen..
- ERROR (Red symbol): displayed in red on Graph chart.
If the current result of QC sample exceeds the 2SD, the flag “1:2S”
will be displayed on the column of the “ERROR” in [Details],
[Daily] and [Cumulative] screen.
Select a judgment method for “Current result exceeds 3SD” from pull-down menu.
When the current result of QC sample exceeds 3SD, the flag “1:3S” will be displayed on the
column of the “WARNING” or “ERROR” of each [Details], [Daily] and [Cumulative] screen.
Select a judgment method for “Current result exceeds 4SD” from pull-down menu.
When the current result of QC sample exceeds 4SD, the flag “1:4S” will be displayed on the
Last 2 results exceed 2SD
Select a judgment method for “Last 2 results exceed 2SD” from pull-down menu.
When the last 2 results of QC sample exceeds 2SD, the flag “2:2S” will be displayed on the
2 out of last 3 results exceed 2SD
Select a judgment method for “2 out of last 3 results exceed 2SD” from pull-down menu.
When the 2 out of last 2 results of QC sample exceeds 2SD, the flag “2/3:2S” will be displayed on
the column of the “WARNING” or “ERROR” of each [Details], [Daily] and [Cumulative] screen.
Range exceeds 4SD
Select a judgment method for “The max and min value exceed ±2SD (4SD) within the term (days,
months)” from pull-down menu.
When the judgment result is applied this case, the flag “R:4S” will be displayed on the column of
the “WARNING” or “ERROR” of each [Details], [Daily] and [Cumulative] screen.
Any 3 Results exceed 1SD
Select a judgment method for “Any 3 Results exceed 1SD within the term (days, months)” from
pull-down menu.
When the judgment result is applied this case, the flag “3:1S” will be displayed on the column of
3.4 QC
3.4.5 Settings
3-70
No. Descriptions
(7) Any 4 results exceed 1SD

Select a judgment method for “Any 4 Results exceed 1SD within the term (30 days)” from
pull-down menu. (Under the condition of this setting, the term is determined by the data for a day in
the daily graph and cumulative data, from the measurement day back to 30 days ago, of the
cumulative graph chart.)
When the judgment result is applied this case, the flag “4:1S” will be displayed on the column of
10 results same side of mean
Select a judgment method for “The results is greater or smaller in consecutive 10 points” from
pull-down menu.
When the judgment result is applied this case, the flag “10:X[+]” or “10:X[-]” will be displayed on
7 continue points trend
Select a judgment method for “The results is likely to increase or decrease in consecutive 7 points”
from pull-down menu.
When the judgment result is applied this case, the flag “7:X[+]” or “7:X[-]” will be displayed on
(8) Registered Controls

The display the registration name of the control sample.
The control sample names registered in the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Registration] will be displayed within
40 digits.
(9) Save
Click this bottun to save editing data.
(10) Cancel
Click this bottun not to save editing data.
(11) Print
Click this button to print out the details of editing data.
3.4 QC
3.4.5 Settings
3-71
3.4.6 [Registration]:QC Registration
You can register the name of Quality Control samples (or Control serum) to be used on the list. Maximum 40
types of Control (C1 to C40) can be registered on the list.
Click to choose the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Registration].
(1) (4)
(2)
(3)
The registration list for
methods
(5) (6) (7)
No. Descriptions
(1) Control ID C 1111

Select the number of a method on the list from pull-down menu or input a number between 1 and 40
with keyboard typing.
Name 1111
Input the name of a control sample in alphanumeric within 20 digits.
(2) Sample
Select a sample type of the following on the list from pull-down arrow on the Combo Box.
-Common
- Serum
- Urine
- Plasma
Lot No. 1111
Input the number of a control sample’s lot number in alphanumeric within 6 digits.
(3) Use for methods

The method registered in the tab menu [QC (F8)] – [Settings] will be displayed by its name selected in
the Control ID.
3.4 QC
3.4.6 Registration
3-72
No. Descriptions
(4) Registered Controls

The display for the registration name of the control samples.
Control sample name (C1 to C40) registered in the tab menu [Regisration] will be displayed.
(5) Save
Click this button to save editing settings up to 40 records.
(6) Cancel
Click this button not to save editing settings and this button will become invalid again by clicking
the Cancel button.
(7) Delete
Click this button to delete editing contents.
Click this button then Save and Cancel button will become available. The following warning
message will notify you when you click the [Save] button.
“Warning !
Is it all right if the selected sample informatiion is deleted.”
It will delete your editing contents by clicking the OK button and stop deleting by clicking the
Cancel button.
3.4 QC
3.4.6 Registration
3-73
3.5 [System (F9)]:System Menu

Here, you can setup system configuration, reagent registration, operation for FD / HDD backup and
printing conditions etc.
Click the job menu [System (F9)] and you can select a menu from the following on the tab menu.
- Setup: System Configuration
- Reagent: Registration of Reagent Information
- Login: Login / Logout and Software Version
- Backup: Data Backup
- Setup2: Technical Range
- Define: Editing for Patient Information
- Range: Editing for Normal Range Names
3.5.1 [Setup]:System Settings

On the screen you can define conditions of the system communications, alarm sounds, sample barcodes,
special wash solutions and printing conditions.
Click to select the tab menu [QC (F9)] – [Setup].
(2)
(1)
(5)
(3)
(6)
(4) (7)
(8)
(9) (1)
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-74
No. Descriptions
(1) Host Communication Mode

This will setup a communication mode to the Host computer.
- Off Line
Check this checkbox “ON” and the analyzer will execute measuring along with the orders set in the
PC.
- On Line Batch
Check this checkbox “ON” and the analyzer will execute measuring using the orders transferred by
the Host computer (without inquiring the Host computer), and the measurement result will be
transferred to the Host computer.
- ON Line Real time
Check this checkbox “ON” and the analyzer will read the barcode label of the sample and inquire to
the Host computer each time. The measurement result will be transferred to the Host computer. When
measuremant starts, the analyzer will check the connection setting to the host computer.
The default setting is “Off Line”.
(2) Host Rerun Mode

This will setup the Host Rerun mode. This setup is only available when the checkbox of “On Line Real
time” of “Host Communication Mode” is set “ON”;
- No Re-query
Host Rerun will not be executed.
- Enable Re-query
Host Rerun will be executed only in the case that the Host computer requires rerun.
- Enable Host Rerun
Host Rerun will be executed.
(3) Host Communication

Define the communication configuration methods of the connection to the Host computer from
pull-down menu.
Communication
Communication configuration methods Defaults
configurations
Baud Rate 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 300 bps 19200
Date Bit 7, 8 bits 8 bits
Stop Bit 1, 2 bit(s) 2 bits
Parity Bit None, Even, Odd None
Protocol (E1381) Normal, No Handshake Normal
<Alarm Sound>
(4)
11 Enable Sound Sampling Complete
When you set “ON” the checkbox, the setting will make the alam sound effective after the
completion of the muasurement at the end of the ASP circulation.
The default setting is set “ON”.
Enable Error Level
You can set the level of the alarm sound, making it effective.
Select error levels from pull-down menu.
Levels Select methods Descriptions Alarm Levels

1 Off Ineffective
2 Emergency Stop Emergency stop 2 is effective
3 Sampling Stop Sampling Stop 2,3 are effective
4 Unit Alarm Warning 2,3 and 4 are effective
An alarm sound will be played only in the case that the level of the alarm you selected is emerging.
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-75
No. Descriptions
(4) Alarm Volume

Define the alarm sound volume.
Select the number of volume sound from pull-down menu.
- Off: Speakers “Off”
- 1～9: Volume Sounds (“9” is the maximum )
The default setting is “3”.
(5) <Sample>
Sample number increment
Select an auto generating method of sample numbers.
Select a type of increment from pull-down menu.
- Numeric only:
- Alphanumeric (Upper case)
- Alphanumeric (Upper and lower cases)
Upper sample number Sample Length 1111

Specify the upper digit numbers of the sample barcode and the number of its whole digits.
Based on the specified contents, the setting number will be complemented in the upper digits at order
registration.
The input range (Max 12 digits) will work with the value of Length and blank will be ineffective.
This will complement some digits that the digits of Length were subtracted from the SID digits that
were input order.
(E.g.)
Upper sample number:11234567891 Length: 1121
When the “SID” of the tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Selection] is 001, the barcode will be “123456789001”
because the upper nine digits will be supplied.
[Auto generating digits for sample number] =

[whole digits] – [digits of the upper sample number]
Sample Barcode ○ Enable ○ Disable

Enable;
When this checkbox is set “ON”, the setting will be changed as using ASP’s barcode reader.
When you select this, the barcode type of UPC (JAN), NW7, Code39, ITF and Code128 can be applied.
And it is applicable either with or without sample barcodes.
Disable;
When this checkbox is set “ON”, the setting will be changed as not using ASP’s barcode reader.
This case is only available without sample barcodes.
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-76
No. Descriptions
(5) Barcode type 1-4

Define barcode types to use in samples. (5 types settings are available.)
When the “Enable” checkbox of Sample Barcode is set “ON”, the sample barcode can be
applied.
Select a barcode type from pull-down menu.
Types Selection items Details

Blank Not used
UPC(JAN)
W/ Check Digit Used with check digits
Blank Not used
NW7 W/ Check Digit Used with check digits
W/o check digit Used without check digits
Blank Not used
Code39 W/ check digit Used with check digits
Blank Not used
ITF W/ check digit Used with check digits
Blank Not used
Code128 W/ check digit Used with check digits
When you define barcode types as duplicate, the following message will be pop-upped on Save
button’s click.
“BCR Type is over lapped.”
Then clicking the OK button, it retuns to before.
(6) <Others>
Clot detection sensitivity

Specify the sensitivity level of clot detect function from “0” to “3”.
“0” means invalid and “3” will be the most sensitive.
11 Disable extrapolated results

Specify the conversion method of concentration when the result exceeds the calibration curve.
- When this checkbox is set “ON”, calibration curve will be extended to the range of the S1 or Sn,
and then convert it concentration.
- When this checkbox is set “OFF”, results exceed the calibration curve will be S1 (Min.) or Sn
(Max.).
11 Enable Auto Scan for RCU

Specify whether the RCU scan will be carried out or not.
- When this checkbox is set “ON”, RCU scan will start automatically at the case of the lid of RCU’s
open and close.
11 Enable Check of ASP Temp
- When this checkbox is set “ON”, temperature for ASP will be monitored at a round start.
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-77
No. Descriptions
(6) 11 Enable Check Inventory

- When this checkbox is set “ON”, remaining reagents volume will be cheked at a round start.
The default setting is “ON”.
11 Full compliance with ASTM rules
Specify whether the data transfer format to the Host computer applies to ASTM rules or not.
- When the checkbox is set “ON”, ASTM rules will be applied.
The rerun flags, QC measurement results and QC flags will not be transferred and method-to-method
calculation results will be transferred.
- When the checkbox is set “OFF”, ASTM rules winn not be applied.
The rerun flags, QC measurement results and QC flags wil be transferred.
The default setting is “ON”
11 ASTM ISE Separation
When ordering ISE from the Host computer, select whether ISE orders need to be separated or not.
When the checkbox is set “ON”, ISE orders will be separated to Na, K and Cl.
11 Lamp voltage control off
When this checkbox is set to “OFF”, the halogen lamp voltage is set to “Low” in some mode
(when this checkbox is set to “ON”, the halogen lamp voltage is set to “High”) as follows:
1. start up
2. after measurement
3. after maintenance sequence (at [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence])
4. after “Sleep Mode” (both starting up from “Sleep Mode” & canceling “Sleep Mode”)
11 Initial Result of Rerun
When this check box is set to “ON”, first (initial) results will not be transfferred to Host Computer
in transfferring rerun results.
(7)
Reagent Code for RPT (S)
Specify the reagent code and name of the special wash solutions for 1: RPT1 and 2: RPT2
washing.
Select the reagent from pull-down menu or on the reagent list registered by pressing Space key.
Reagent codes registered on the reagent registration screen of the tab menu [Reagent] will be
displayed on the list box.
Regent Code for CWP
- R1: R1 Reagent
- R2: R2 Reagent
- Wash: Wash Solution
Remaining test calculation: ○ Reagent Code ○ Reagent Lot
When the checkbox is set “ON”, specify the calculation method for number of available measurement.
- Reagent Code: Calculate the number with the sum of remaining per each reagent code.
- Reagent Lot: Calculate the number with the sum of remaining per each reagent lot that
belongs same reagent code.
In the tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Inventory], specify a calculation method for the number of available
measurement tests that is calculated from all of the regents registered on “Total”.
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-78
No. Descriptions
(8) Live Print out
11 Enable
When this Enable checkbox is “ON”, an auto- printing in measuring will be executed.
Select a printing form from pull-down menu.
- Nomal
- Reprt
11 Enable Live QC Report

When the Enable checkbox is “ON”, an auto-printing in QC measuring will be executed.
QC report will be printed out per method for every sample after QC measurement data print out.
Printout Header
1 11111111111 :This header of a list can be edited within 20 digits.
2 : This header of a list can be edited within 50 digits.
3 r : This header of a list can be edited within 50 digits.
4 r : This header of a list can be edited within 50 digits.
Input letters here will be printed on the list as header.
(9)
Save
This Save button will be available when you edit the setting and click this butto to save the data.
After clicing this Save button, this bottun will be masked again.
(10)
Cancel
This Cancel button will be available when you edit the setting and click this button not to save
editing data.
After clicing this Cancel button, this button will be masked again.
3.5 System
3.5.1 Setup
3-79
3.5.2 [Reagent]:Reagent Registration

You can register the reagent codes to use in the analyzer on this screen.
Click to select the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Reagent].
(1)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(2) The list of the

registration reagents
No. Descriptions
(1) Reagent Code 111111111111

Input a regent code in five numeral digits.
Detail information of the code will be displayed when the code you input matches one of the codes in
the reagent list.
When a new code is input, all setting items will be initialized.
Reagent Name 11111111111
Input a reagent name in alphanumeric within 6 digits.
(2)
<The list of the reagent registration>
Code, Name
Reagent names and codes registered will be displayed.
3.5 System
3.5.2 Login
3-80
No. Descriptions
(3) Specify whether you use each reagent bottle (R1, R2, Wash solution, and Dilution) or not.
Input the initial volume of the each bottle.
To make the bottles effective, you need to check the “ Enable” checkbox for R1 / R2 / Wash / Dil .
Input full volume of each bottle as an initial volume (mL).
Stability Check
11 Enable
- When the checkbox is set “ON”;
stability check willl be effective for the reagent.
Reagents will be considered as “expired” when reagents are used over this stability term.
- When the checkbox is set “OFF”;
stability check will not be effective.
Tem
Input the number of the days in 11111 for a regent stability term (days) between “0” and “99”
(4) Save
Click this button to save editing details.
When you edit setting, this Save button will be available. After clicking Save button, this button is
masked again.
Note that you need to save those settings for each reagent one by one.
(5) Cancel
When you edit setting, this Cancel button will be available. After clicking Cancel button, this
button is masked again.
(6) Delete
Click this button to delete settings.
Click the item that you want to delete on the registration list and then click this Delete button so that
selecting item will be deleted.
When you click Save button, the following warning message will be displayed. (For specifying a delete,
you have to save the setting.)
“Warning! Selected reagent is deleted.

the information of reagents on the Run-Inventory screen is also deleted. OK?”
It will execute the delete by clicking the OK button, and stop the delete by clicking the Cancel button.
3.5 System
3.5.2 Login
3-81
3.5.3 [Login]:Login / Logout and Program Versions
This tab screen will serve you the operation of login and logoff, and show the program versions on each CPU used
in the analyzer.
There are four levels of the privileges of access to enter the analyzer such as Level1 (L1), Level2 (L2), Level3
(L3) and Engineer level (EL). (Refer to “3.6.8 [Password]”.)
Proper password is necessary to login. Passwords can be definable depending on login levels.
- General User (L1): For the routine measurement work consisting of test order settings, normal
sample measurement, QC measurement, calibration measurement, registration
of patients, registration of print orders, display / printing of measurement
results, report printing, etc.
- Supervisor (L2): For the general User (L1) work and moreover the settings of reagent / analysis
conditions, setup the Calibration / QC, test order setting, deletion of
measurement results, etc.
- Manager (L3): For the supervisor (L2) work and moreover the access of [Sequence], [Sensor]
and [Perform] of [Mainte (F10)].
- Engineer (EL): For the maintenance work consisting of management of total times, unit
adjustment, dispensing correction, temperature adjustment, etc.
And also this level user is allowed to access all menus.
(- Non-login: Basically, this level user is only possible to view the contents of each menu.)
As for the program versions, this analyzer will not work properly unless those program versions are not displayed
on the screen. Therefore, you are requested to look up those versions and confirm them.
(The version numbers shown on the screen may be different according to the programs installed.) Click the
tab menu [System (F9)] – [Version] to confirm versions.
(1)
(2)
3.5 System
3.5.2 Login
3-82
No. Descriptions
(1) Login / Logout

Username 111 11
Password 111 11
Input Username and Password and click Login button to login to the analyzer. After that, Login button
will be ineffective and Logout button will become effective.
<Program version>
(2) UI Main
Number of version of software for user I/F processing will be displayed.
UI UC
Number of version of software for communications processing both of the PC and the analyzer will be
displayed.
UI PRT
Number of version of software for live printing processing will be displayed.
UI LIS
Number of version of software for communication processing both of the Host computers and the
communications processing will be displayed.
Unit Main
Number of version of main software for the analyzer will be displayed.
Unit LIQ
Number of version of software for a process of detecting of the liquid level will be displayed.
Unit DTR
Number of version of main software for photometric processing will be displayed.
Unit SPT
Number of version of main software for SPT will be displayed.
3.5 System
3.5.2 Login
3-83
3.5.4 [Backup]:Backup
You can save measurement conditions, data and parameters to HDD or external devices such as FDD or
USB memory.
This function will backup databases of the analyzer in HDD and restore those databases to the HDD.
Click the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Backup] for this function.
(1) (2)
3.5 System
3.5.4 Backup
3-84
No. Descriptions
(1) <System Parameters backup>

Save Parameters Save
This will backup a database for system parameters. Depending on the database volume, the database will
be saved on multi FDs.
Click Save button and the following warning message will be displayed.
“Warning!
Overwriting FD with system parameter.”
Click OK button to save the parameters on FD.

If the backup is saved on several FDs, the following message will be displayed.
“This FD has been full. Please insert a new FD.”
Insert another floppy disk and click OK button, then the rest of the parameters will be nsaved.
Load Parameters Load

This will restore the parameters from the backup FD.
The following warning message will be displayed after clicking Load button.
“Warning!
Loading system parameters from FD will overwrite the settings in the analyzer.”
Click OK button to start to restore parameters to the PC.
If the multi backups FDs are used, the following message will notify you.
“Please insert the next FD.”
Insert the FD and click OK button, then the rest of the parameters will be saved.
Format FD Format
This will initialize FD.
Insert FD in the PC to initialize and click Format button, then the following warning message will be
displayed.
“Warning!
Formatting the FD will delete all contents stored in the FD.”
Initializing the FD will start when you click OK button.
Directory ...
Specify directory to save and load.
Click ... button and select the saving destination directory or the load directory (“DBBack”).
- Click Save button and the “DBBack” file will be created in the directory you selected and then the
data will be saved.
- Click Load button and all of the data will be loaded from the directory in which they are kept as the
“DBBack” file.
3.5 System
3.5.4 Backup
3-85
No. Descriptions
(2) <Data backup (HD)>

Save Data Save
This will backup a database for the analyzer on the HDD.
Click Save button and the database will be checked whether the database contains any damage.
- When DB check is “OK”, the following warning message will be displayed;
“Warning!
any data to existing be over written. OK?”
Click OK button to execute the backup.

- When DB check is “NG”, the following warning message will be displayed and will cancel save
process;
“Warning!
a database is corrupted. Recovery with backup data required.”
Load Data 1Load1

This will restore backed up data to the analyzer.
Click Load button and the following warning message will be displayed;
“Warning!
Retrieving the data will over write existing data. OK ?”
Click OK button and all of the data will be loaded from a directory selected.
Directory ...
Specify a directory to save and load.
Click ... button and select a directory to save and the load (“DBBack”).
- Click Save button and the “DBBackupsave” file will be created in a directory selected, then the
data will be saved.
- Click 1Load1 button and all of the data will be loaded from the directory in which they are kept
as the “DBBackupsave” file.
3.5 System
3.5.4 Backup
3-86
3.5.5 [Setup 2]:Technical Range and the Registration for Patient Generations
You can define Default setting for reagent bottle types, the limit ABS for technical range, the ages for
patient 3 generations and titles of “Reference 1” & “Reference 2” on [Run (F5)] – [Patient].
Click the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Setup2] for these settings.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
No. Descriptions
(1) Default setting for reagent bottle types
Define default setting for reagent bottle types. This will work for a default setting of
“Reagent bottle types” on [System] – [Regant].
(2) MIN-MAX ABS -999999 - -999999
Define the limit ABS for technical range.
Define the upper and lower limit for the technical range, which is photometry, to be able to
confirm of credibility for its result.
Input the value between –999,999 and 999,999.
(3) Generation G1 < -9999 < G2 < -9999 < G3
Define the ages for patient 3 generations.
Input the ages for the patient’s 3 generation (G1, G2, G3) within 1 to 99.
(4) Optional Field
Define titles of “Reference 1” & “Reference 2” on [Run (F5)] – [Patient] in
alphanumeric within 10 digits.
(5)
Save
When you edit the setting, this button will be available and the editing data will be saved.
(6)
Cancel
It will restore the data as before.
3.5 System
3.5.5 Setup2
3-87
3.5.6 [Define]:Patient Information (Attending Physician and Location) Define

You can input some comments on the information of patients such as attending physicians, addresses or
races.
Click the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Define] for these settings.
(1)
(2) The list of the registered

names
(3) (4) (5)
Input Names
(7) (8)
3.5 System
3.5.6 Define
3-88
No. Descriptions
(1) <Physician / Department / Race / Sample Comment / Ward / Classification>

Type
You can select the following edit items from pull-down menu. When you select one of them,
the selecting item will be displayed on the list of the registered names.
- Physician
- Department
- Race
- Sample Comment
- Ward
- Classification
(2) <The list of the registered names>
Contents of registered names selected at Type will be displayed.
(3) Add
Click this Add button and a mask of the input name cell will be released, and you can add a
record.
(4) Edit
Click the number of the line you are going to edit on the list and click this Edit button so that a
mask of the name input cell will be released and then you can edit in it.
(5) Delete
Click the number of the line you are going to delete on the list and click this Delete button so
that the selecting lines will be deleted.
3.5 System
3.5.6 Define
3-89
3.5.7 [Range]:Registration of Normal Range Names

Fixed range names for each generation and an optional edit list will be displayed and you can edit range
names in optional edit (No. 7-50).
Click the tab menu [QC (F9)] – [Range] for these settings.
(1) The list of the range names
The edit cell for a range name
(2) (3)
No. Descriptions
(1) No. (Registration Numbers) / Range Name

Each generation of a range name will be displayed and you can edit as an option.
No. Range Name
01 Male-G1
02 Male-G2
03 Male-G3 Fixed
04 Female-G1
05 Female-G2
06 Female-G3
07 XXXXXXX
↨ Optional
50 XXXXXXX
Regarding the optional edit (No. 7-50), click the number of the line you are going to edit on the
list and you will see the edit cell for the range name in the blow so you can input the name in the
cell, 11111111111 , in alphanumeric within 10 digits.
(2) Save
(3)
Cancel
3.5 System
3.5.7 Range
3-90
3.6 [Mainte (F10)]:Maintenance Menu

3.6.1 [W Blank]:Result of Water Blank
L1 and Non-login user is not allowed full access in this menu. (Refer to “3.6.8 [Password]”.)
Clean level of each cuvette can be seen based on the result from the water blank measurement.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
No. Descriptions
(1) Wave Length
Select a wavelength to display the result of water blank measurement.
(2) Date time
Select a measurement date of water blank measurement for display. The latest 20 times can be stored.
(3) <Water blank data>
You can confirm a value of water blank at a selected wavelength of each cuvette.
Data that exceed the threshold value at the selected wavelengths will be displayed in red and data which
exceeds that of other wavelengths will be displayed in yellow.
(4) <Graph for water blank data>
Click water blank value of each cuvette and its water blank data in the latest 20 times will be displayed in
graph chart. (X axis: the number of times and Y axis: the absorbance value)
(5) Cuvette No.
Specify the number of the cuvette for display in the data graph for water blank between 1 and 90.
(6) Auto
When this check box is “ON”, an Auto scale will be applied for the graph.
When this checkbox is set to “OFF”, input a value in Max and Min. as the range of Y-axis values.
This checkbox is set to “ON” as default.
(7) Judgment Value
Specify a threshold value (or judgment value) for the selecting wavelength between –999,999 and 999,999.
Click Save button to save its judgment value and click Cancel button to restore previous judgment value.
(8)
Print
Click this button to print out displayed water blank calue.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.1 W Blank
3-91
3.6.2 [Work Hour]:Operation Check for Parts

L1 and Non-login users are not allowed full access in this menu. (Refer to “3.6.8 [Password]”.)
This will administrate work hours for each unit. You can check operation time for periodic replacement parts.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
No. Descriptions
(1) Total Working Hours
This will display the total of power-on hours on the analyzer.
(2) Total Test

This will display the total number of test on the analyzer.
(3) Halogen Lamp

This will display remainig hours of the Halogen Lamp. The calculation of the remaining hours is
subtracted from 1,000 hours until 0 hours. When the remainig hours goes under 0 hours, the value will be
displayed in red and after that the value will be displayed in minus.
Click RESET button and the remaning hours will be cleared to the initial value. (Initial value: 1,000H and
lower limit value: -9,999H)
3.6 Mainte
3.6.2 Work Hour
3-92
No. Descriptions
(4) Diaphragm Pump
This will display remaning hours of the Diaphragm Pump. The calculation of the remaining hours is
subtracted from 1,000 hours until 10 hours. When this remaining hours goes under 10 hours, the value will
be displayed in yellow.
When this hours goes under 0 hours, the value will be displayed in red and after that the value will be in
minus.
Clicking RESET button and the remaining hours will be cleared to the initial value. (WU : 1,000 hours,
others : 500 hours)
WU: Working hours of WU drainage pump (Select the WU number between 1 and 8 from pull-down
menu.)
RPT: Working hours of RPT Trough supply water (Select the RPT type, 1-T or 2-T from pull-down
menu.)
SPT-T: Working hours of SPT Trough supply water
MIX: Working hours of MIX Trough supply water (Select the MIX type, 1-T or 2-T from pull-down
menu)
(5) Microsyringe Tip

This will display the remaning hours of the Microsyringe Tip. The calculation of the remaining hours for
RPP, RPPW, SPP, and PPW is subtracted from 150 hours and for WPP is subtracted from 400 hours.
When this remaining hours goes under 10 hours, the value will be displayed in yellow.
When this remaninng hours goes under 0 hours, the value will be displayed in red and after that the value
will be in minus.
Click RESET button and the remaining hours will be cleared to the initial value.
RPP: RPP Syringe Tip working hours (Switch over 1 or 2 from pull-down menu.)
RPP: RPPW Syringe Tip working hours (Switch over 1W or 2W from pull-down menu.)
SPP: SPP Syringe working Tip hours
SPPW: SPPW Syringe working Tip hours
WPP: WPP Syringe Tip working hours (Switch over between 1 and 8 from pull-down menu.)
(6) Check
This will display the remaining days for 6 months (half-a year) or 1-year (annual) regular maintenance.
The calculation of this remaining days is subtracted from 6 months (or 180 days) or 1 year (or 360 days;
one month as 30 days).
When this remaining days goes under 0 days, this value will be displayed in red and after that the value
will be displayed in minus.
Click RESET button and the remaining days will be cleared to the initial value.
(7) Working Hours of ISE

Pump Cassette: This will show remaining days for the ISE pump cassettes.
Calibrant A: This will show remaining volume of the solution Calibrant A.
Electrodes: This will show remaining days / tests for ISE electrodes.
- 180D: Subtracted from 180 days. When this remaining days goes under 0 days, this value will be
displayed in red and after that this value will be displayed in minus
- 10000S: Subtracted from 10,000 tests. When this remaining tests goes under 0 tests, this value will
be displayed in red and after that this value will be displayed in minus
Click RESET button and the remaining days and tests will be cleared to the initial value.
(8) Print
Click this button to print out the information of working hours.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.2 Work Hour
3-93
3.6.3 [Sequence]:Unit Tests

L1, L2 and Non-login users are not allowed full access in this menu. (Refer to “3.6.8 [Password]”.)
This will execute the operation check and nozzle washing for this analyzer and each unit.
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
No. Descriptions
(1) <Sequence operation>
Initialization
Click this button and each unit will return to the home position.
Prime
Click this button and tube will be filled with system water. This prime will be executed by the number of
times specified in the .
ISE Prime
Click this button and tube in the ISE unit will be filled with Calibrant A. This ISE prime will be executed
by the number of times specified in the .
ISE Calibration
2-point calibration with the ISE calibrator (Calibrant B) will be executed. This operation should be
executed before measurement in a day.
ISE Cleaning
Click this button and ISE electrodes’ sample paths and tubing will be cleaned with the ISE cleaning
solution. This operation will be usually executed after measurements once in a day.
Also this ISE cleaning is recommended to execute in every 50 samples a day.
When there are more than 50 samples in a day, this ISE Cleaning is recommended to execute in every 8
hours.
If you want to continue measuring, you need to execute ISE Prime more than 10 times and take more than
30 minutes interval for next measurement.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.3 Sequence
3-94
No. Descriptions
WU1,3 Rinse
Click this button to fill the WU1 and WU3 lines by system water because wash solutions’ crystals may
adhere inside of tubing, nozzles and filters. Those lines will be filled with system water automatically at the
end of every round.
Cuvette Check
Click this button to execute a water blank measurement and determine whether a condition of the cuvette
is OK or NG.
All cuvettes will be measured with all wavelengths and you can see the result in the tab menu [W Blank].
Cuvette Wash
Click this button to execute the cuvette wash.
Cuvette Water Placement
Click this button to fill system water or wash solutions in cuvettes.
You can prevent cuvettes from adhering dusts or garbage before system suspension. (Select “Sys. Water”
or “Wash Bottle” on the pull-down menu.)
Cuvette Water Displacement
Click this button to drain wastewater or wash solutions from cuvettes.
WU Ascend / WU Descend
Click this button and WU unit moves to upper direction after initialization of each unit and the button will
become “WU Descend”. Then you can easily practice the WU nozzles cleaning.
After cleaning, click the button WU Descend to return WU Unit to initial position.
Round Rrep Skip

When this check box is set to “ON”, the analyzer will skip preparation process at the round start.
(2) <Nozzle washing sequence>

SPT
Click this check box and you can select “Water” or “Special” for the SPT wash.
RPT1
Click this check box and you can select “Water” or “Special” for the RPT1 washes.
RPT2
Click this check box and you can select “Water” or “Special ” for the RPT2 wash
Exec
Click this button and nozzle wash sequence will start.
When any one of the checkboxes of SPT, RPT1 and RPT2 is “ON”, the Exec will be effective.
When any one of the “Special” of SPT, RPT1 and RPT2 is “ON”, press Exec button and a message
“Requires approximately 13 minutes to complete the wash”
will be displayed and select OK or Cancel.
Press OK button to execute a wash program and press Cancel button not to execute a wash program.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.3 Sequence
3-95
No. Descriptions
When both “Water” and “Special” are “ON” and then you press the Exec button, a massage
“Specify either water or wash solution”
will notify you and wash program will not be executed.
Special washing for SPT nozzle;

Washing solution for SPT nozzle should be registered in the tab menu [Run (F5)] – [Std QC] in
advance.
Special washing for RPT nozzles;

Washing solutions for RPT nozzle should be registered in the tab menu [System (F9)] – [Setup] in
advance.
When any reagent codes and types are not defined, a message
“The bottle code for wash solution is “0”.”
will notify you on pressing Exec button and a special washing for RPT nozzles will not be executed.
When the remaining volume of reagent is not enough, a message
“Not enough wash solution inventory”
will notify you on pressing Exec button and a special washing for RPT nozzles will not be executed.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.3 Sequence
3-96
(3) Pump Test

Select any of the checkboxes that you are going to execute pump units for tests.
When you check more than two checkboxes, the test will be executed in order.
Time :
Input an execution time for pump test between 1 and 99 for the cell . (Measurement unit: seconds)
Exec:
Click this button and pump test will start.
(4) Move Unit

This will run each unit as a single operation and you can check each unit movement.
Motor:
Select a motor to be run from pull-down menu. When you select a motor, its corresponding “Mode” and
“Position” will be switched over.
01: MIX1R MIX1 revolving motor 11: SPTR SPT revolving motor
02: MIX1U MIX1up-and-down motor 12: SPTU SPT up-and-down motor
03: MIX2R MIX2 revolving motor 13: WU WU up-and-down motor
04: MIX2U MIX2 up-and-down motor 14: IRU IRU revolving motor
05: MIX1S MIX1 stirring motor 15: WPP WPP washing syringe
06: MIX2S MIX2 stirring motor 16: SPP SPP sample syringe
07: RPT1R RPT1 revolving motor 17: ASP ASP revolving motor
08: RPT1U RPT1 up-and-down motor 18: RCU RCU revolving motor
09: RPT2R RPT2 revolving motor 19: RPP1 RPP1 reagent syringe
10: RPT2U RPT2 up-and-down motor 20: RPP1W RPP1W pure water syringe
21: RPP2 RPP2 reagent syringe
22: RPP2W RPP2W pure water syringe
23: SPPW SPP pure water syringe
Mode:
Select a mode from Search (Search for origin) / Move (Move to the specified position) / Check (Check for
drive) from pull-down menu.
Position:
This will be available when Move (Move to the specified position) is selected and a position map of a
motor selected in Motor can be selected from pull-down menu.
Origin Sensor:
This will display information of detection for Origin sensor. (ON: Origin, OFF: Not Origin)
Exec:
Click this button to run sequences.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.3 Sequence
3-97
3.6.4 [Sensor]:Sensor Tests

This will execute operation tests on each sensor on the analyzer.
(1)
(2)
No. Descriptions
(1) <The select the measurement methods>
Select a type of sensor to read its condition from pull-down menu. For example, when you select "Sensor"
on the menu, the condition of sensors will be displayed on the screen.
When you select other items on the menu, the value of a selected measurement pulse sensor will be
shown on the cell box next to the pull-down menu.
Names Meanings
Sensor All photo sensors
SPT_PULSE Detection sensor for the SPT liquid level
RPT1_PULSE Detection sensor for the RPT1 liquid level
RPT2_PULSE Detection sensor for the RPT2 liquid level
WU1_PULSE WU1 overflow sensor
<The result of pulse measurements>

Result of measurement pulses will be displayed in the .
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-98
No. Descriptions
(2) <The display the sensor conditions>
Select “Sensor” in measurement items and press Read Start button and sensor status will be displayed.
Read Start button will be changed to Stop.
Press Stop to terminate reading sensor status.
When the sensor status is ON, a mark beside each sensor will be displayed in red.
When the sensor status is OFF, a mark beside each sensor will be displayed in gray.
All sensor conditions will be repeatedly displayed in 500ms intervals
Names and meanings of each sensor will be shown on the following list.
Sensor Names Unit Names Meanings

(Sensor Number)
ASP_Zero_Pos The zero position of ASP’s turn table
ASP
(101) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Red (ON)
RCU_Zero_Pos The zero position of RCU’s turn table
RCU
RPP1R_Up_Zero_Pos RPP1 The zero position of RPP1R’s syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
(103) (Reagent) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Gray (Off)
RPP1W_Up_Zero_Pos RPP1 The zero position of RPP1W’s syringe（The upper limit of Syringe）
(104) (Washing) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Gray (Off)
SPARE_SENSR1
Not Used
SPARE_SENSR2
ASP_COVER_F Detecting the cover of ASP emergency samples
(107) Red (ON): Found the cover Disconnecting state: Gray (Off)
ASP
ASP_COVER_B Detection of cover for ASP Normal samples
ASP_COVER_C Not Used
RCU_COVER_F RCU cover detection
RCU
RCU_YOBI Not Used
ISE_COVER ISE cover detection
ISE
LEAK_RCU_YOBI Not Used
Not Used
LEAK_RPP1
RPP1 Detection of RPP1 leaking
(115)
Red (ON): Found a leaking Disconnecting state: Gray (Off)
Not Used
LEAK_ASP
ASP Detection of ASP leaking
(116)
Red (ON): Found a leaking Disconnecting state: Gray (Off)
+12_RCU_PE DC 12V monitor (Peltier power supply for RCU cooler)
RCU
(117) Red (ON): 12V
+12_ASP_PE DC 12V monitor (Peltier power supply for ASP cooler）
ASP
(118) Red (ON): 12V
+24_MON_RCU DC 24V monitor (RCU power supply)
RCU
(119) Red (ON): 24V
DC 24V monitor (ASP power supply)
+24_MON_ASP
ASP Red (ON): 24V
(120)
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-99
Sensor Names Unit Names Meaning

(Sensor Number)
ASP_TRAY
Not Used
SPARE_SENSE4
Radiating fan for RCU peltier-1 cooler (Rotation stop detecting
RCU_PE1_FAN
function)
(125)
Gray (ON): Rotate Stop state: Red
RCU_PE2_FAN
function)
(126)
RCU
RCU_PE3_FAN
function)
(127)
RCU_PE4_FAN
function)
(128)
Radiating fan for ASP peltier-1 cooler (Rotation stop detecting
ASP_PE1_FAN
function)
(129)
ASP
Radiating fan for ASP peltier-2 cooler (Rotation stop detecting
ASP_PE2_FAN
function)
(130)
SPARE_FAN3
Not Used
SPARE_FAN4
WPP_Up_Zero_Pos The zero position of WPP syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
WPP
SPP_Up_Zero_Pos SPP The zero position of SPP syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
(134) (Samples) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Red (ON)
The zero position of SPPW syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
SPPW_Up_Zero_Pos SPPW
Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Red (ON)
(135) (Washing)
SUBTANK1_ENP
(136) Detecting empty in Sub tank R
SUBTANK1_FLL Red (ON): Found pure water Gray (OFF): Not found pure water
Sub-Tank
(137)
(R)
Detecting Sub tank R
SUBTANK1_SET
Red (ON): Found sub tank R Gray (OFF): Not fitted sub tank R
(138)
SWU1-1 leaking liquid
LEAK_SPP
SPP Detecting SPP leaking liquid
(139)
Red (ON): Found leaking liquid Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
LEAK_SWU_1
SWU1-2 leaking liquid
(140)
BOT1_EMP Detecting empty for pure water tank
(141) Yellow (ON): Liquid found (Not empty)
BOT2_EMP Detecting empty for wash solution tank -1
BOT3_EMP Detecting empty for wash solution tank -2
BOT4_ENP External tanks Detecting full of water for the Low-concentrated waste water tank
(144) Yellow (ON): Empty
BOT5_FULL Detecting full of water for the High-concentrated waste water tank
(145) Yellow (ON): Empty
Detecting empty for wash solution tank -3
BOT6_FULL
Yellow (ON): Liquid found (Not empty)
(146)
SPARE_SENSE5
Not Used
SPARE_SENSE6
LEAK_SWU2 SWU2 Detecting SWU2 leaking liquid
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-100
Sensor Names Unit Names Meaning

(Sensor Number)
(149) Red (ON): Leaking found Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
+24_MON_SWU_DRV1 DC 24V monitor (SWU-DRV1 power supply)
(150) Red (ON): 24V
SWU
(151) Red (ON): 24V
CSE_FAN1
SPARE_FAN2 Not Used
SWU_FAN
MIX1U_Zero_Pos The zero position for MIX1’s up-and-down operation (The upper limit)
(165) Yellow (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Yellow (ON)
MIX1 The zero position of MIX1’s rotating operation
MIX1R_Zero_Pos
Yellow (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Yellow (ON)
(166)
MIX2U_Zero_Pos The zero position of MIX1’s up-and-down operation (The upper limit)
(167) Yellow (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Yellow (ON)
MIX2 The zero position of MIX1’s rotating operation
MIX2R_Zero_Pos
Yellow (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Yellow (OFF)
(168)
RPT1U_Zero_Pos The zero position of RPT1’s up-and-down operation (The upper limit)
(169) Yellow (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Yellow (OFF)
RPT1 The zero position of RPT1’s rotating operation
RPT1R_Zero_Pos
(170)
RPT2U_Zero_Pos The zero position of RPT2’s up-and-down operation (The upper limit)
RPT2 The zero position of RPT2’s rotating operation
RPT2R_Zero_Pos
(172)
SPTU_Zero_Pos The zero position of SPT’s up-and-down operation (The upper limit)
SPT The zero position of SPT’s rotating operation
SPTR_Zero_Pos
(174)
The zero position of cuvette turn table in the IRU
IRU_Zero_Pos
IRU Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Red (ON)
(175)
WU nozzle’s point of origin (The upper limit)
WU_Zero_Pos
WU Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Red (ON)
(176)
RPT1RCU RPT1 position
RPT1
(177) ON: RPT1 is on the RCU. OFF: RPT1 is not on RCU.
RPT2 position
RPT2RCU
RPT2 ON: RPT2 is on the RCU. OFF: RPT2 is not on RCU.
(178)
SPT position
SPTASP ON: SPT is on the RCU. OFF: SPT is not on RCU.
SPT
(179) Note that it will be ON when SPT turns to ISE unit also.
MIX1R_TS The tough position of MIX1’s stirring paddle

MIX1
(181) Red (ON): the paddle is at trough. Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
The tough position of MIX2’s stirring paddle
MIX2R_TS
MIX2 Red (ON): the paddle is at trough. Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
(182)
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-101

(Sensor Number)
The position of trough discharging for RPT1 rotating operation
RPT1R_TS
RPT1 Red (ON): RPT1 is at the discharging position in trough.
(183)
Gray (OFF): Disconnecting state
The position of trough discharging for RPT2 rotating operation
RPT2R_TS
RPT2 Red (ON): RPT2 is at the discharging position in trough.
(184)
Gray (OFF): Disconnecting state
The position of trough discharging for SPT rotating operation
SPTR_TS Red (ON): SPT is at the discharging position in trough.
SPT
(185) Gray (OFF): Disconnecting state
Note that it will be ON when SPT turns to ISE unit also.
IRU_READY
SPARE_SENSE9 Not Used
SPARE_SENSE10
RPT1U_DL The lower limit where RPT1 moves up and down (The lower limit)
RPT1
(189) Red (ON): The lower limit Disconnecting state: Gray (ON)
The lower limit where RPT2 moves up and down (The lower limit)
RPT2U_DL
RPT2 Red (ON): The lower limit Disconnecting state: Gray (ON)
(190)
The lower limit where SPT moves up and down (The lower limit)
SPTU_DL
SPT Red (ON): The lower limit Disconnecting state: Gray (ON)
(191)
WU_COVER Not Used
TRGH1_EKIMEN Detecting the liquid level of trough chamber
TR
(197) ON: Found liquid OFF: Liquid not found
TRGH2_EKIMEN Not Used
Leaking WPP part
LEAK_IRU
WPP ON: Found leaking OFF: Not found leaking
(199)
R1PTU_EKIMEN Detecting the liquid level of RPT1
RPT1
(205) This cannot check in sensor mode.
R2PTU_EKIMEN Detecting the liquid level of RPT2
RPT2
Detecting the liquid level of SPT
S1PTU_EKIMEN
SPT This cannot check in sensor mode.
(207)
WU1_EKIMEN Detecting the liquid level of WU1
(216) WU This cannot check in sensor mode.
Detecting the liquid level of WU7
WU7_EKIMEN
This cannot check in sensor mode.
(219)
DC 24V monitor (SWU-DRV1 power supply)
+24V_MON_IRU
IRU Red (ON): 24V
(229)
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-102

(Sensor Number)
DTR_FAN Detecting DTR fan stop
DTR
(230) Gray (ON): rotation Condition Stopping: Red
+24V2_MON_IRU
IRU ON: Power ON OFF: Power OFF
(231)
SPARE_SENSE7
Not Used
SPARE_SENSE8
LEAK_RPP2 Detecting RPP1, 2 leaking (common in rpp1, 2)
RPP2
(261) Red (ON): Found leaking Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
RPP2R_UP_ZERO_POS RPP2 The zero position of RPP2R syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
(269) (Reagents) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
RPP2W_UP_ZERO_POS RPP2 The zero position of RPP2W syringe (The upper limit of Syringe)
(270) (Washing) Red (ON): Zero position Disconnecting state: Gray (OFF)
YOBI1_SENSE_A
YOBI2_SENSE_A
Not Used
YOBI3_SENSE_A
YOBI4_SENSE_A
SWU
(277) Red (ON): 24V
YOBI1_SENSE_B
YOBI2_SENSE_B Not Used
YOBI3_SENSE_B
YOBI4_SENSE_B Not Used
SUBTANK2_ENP
(285) Detecting empty sub tank L
SUBTANK2_FULL Sub-Tank Red (ON): Found pure water Gray (OFF): No pure water
(286) (L)
SUBTANK2_SET Detecting sub tank L
(287) Red (ON): Found sub tank
Heating-release fan -1 for Power supply unit (Rotation stop
POW_FAN1
detecting function) Multi power supply unit
(293)
Gray (ON): Rotation Condition Stop: Red
Radiating fan-2 for Power supply unit (Rotation stop detecting
POW_FAN2
Power supply unit function)
(294)
Radiating fan-3 for 24V and 12 V Power supply units (Rotation
POW_FAN3
stop detecting function)
(295)
POW_FAN4
POW_FAN5
POW_FAN6
Not Used
POW_FAN7
DTR_SPARE_IN1
DTR_SPARE_IN2
RCU_BCR_OK
RCU Not Used
RCU_BCR_NG
ASP_BCR_OK
ASP Not Used
ASP_BCR_NG
ISE_READY ISE Not Used
CSE_FAN5
(317) Stop the fan attached to the back of CSE
CSE
CSE_FAN6 ON: Stop OFF: Rotating
(318)
SPARE_SENSE11
SPARE_SENSE12 Not Used
3.6 Mainte
3.6.4 Sensor
3-103
3.6.5 [Perform]:Temperature and DTR Conditions

Conditions of main performance of this analyzer and gain control of photometry unit can be observed here.
Note that these monitors will be updated at a stand-by mode but not during measurement. (The measuring
temperature will be displayed on the operation monitor, [Run (F5)] – [Monitor].)
(1) (2)
(a)
(c)
(d)
(b)
No. Descriptions
(1) Temperature Control
This will monitor the temperature for 6 points in IRU and the temperature of RCU and ASP.
Temperature of IRU will be displayed in numeric and in a graph (with Red, Orange, Green, Light Blue,
Violet, and Lime). The temperature of RCU and ASP will be displayed only in numeric. Those will be
available in a stand-by mode and not available during measurement.
(a) IRU temperature graph monitor X axis: past time (the current time on the right edge)
Y axis: temperature
(b) IRU Temp: displays calibrated IRU temperature
Offset: displays IRU calibrating
(c) RCU Temp: displays RCU temperature
Offset: displays calibrated RCU temperature.
(d) ASP Temp: displays ASP temperature
Offset: displays calibrated ASP temperature.
Save: Click this button to save calibrated parameters.

Cancel: Click not to save calibrated parameters.
These calibrating parameters have been adjusted before shipment at factory.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.5 Perform
3-104
No. Descriptions
(2) Detector Performance Monitor

You can check Auto Gain Function of the photometry unit.
This Auto Gain will be performed at every round start.
Gain Measuring wavelengths (12 wavelengths)

Voltage Voltage (within 9.0±0.5V)
Absorbance Absorbance at Gain control voltage (1mAbs)
Automatic Auto Gain control
Check Lamp Click this button to execute Halogen lamp check.

The result will be shown on the Voltage and when the voltage exceeds a
threshold value, it will be displayed in red.
<Threshold values for
Define a threshold value for the result of Check Lamp (0~999).
lamp check>
Save Click this button to save editing data.
Cancel Click this button not to save editing data.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.5 Perform
3-105
3.6.6 [Adjust]:Correction of Dispensing Volume

L1, L2 and Non-login users cannot access this menu. (Refer to “3.6.8 Setup Password”.)
You can specify correction values for dispensing volume for each pipette.
Parameters adjusted at factory will be displayed.
(2)
(1)
No. Descriptions
(1) Volume Adjustment
SPP Input the measurement volume at 2 uL and 20 uL.
RPP1
Input the measurement volume at 20 uL and 100 uL
RPP2
(2) ISE Volume Adjustment

Sample Input the measurement volume at 70 uL.
ISE Calibrator A Input the measurement volume at 100 uL.
ISE Diluted Sample 1 Input the first dilution volume at 70 uL.
ISE Diluted Sample 2 Input the second dilution volume at 70 uL.
ISE Diluted Sample 3 Input the third dilution volume at 70 uL.

ISE Calibrator B1 Input the first volume of Calibrant B in 70 uL.
ISE Calibrator B2 Input the second volume of Calibrant B in 70 uL.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.6 Adjust
3-106
3.6.7 [DTR Pos]:DTR Optical Axis Auto-Calibration

L1, L2 and Non-login users cannot open this menu. (Refer to “3.6.8 [Password]”.)
This is an automatic calibration of optical axis and this calibration will choose the best photometry point for
each cuvette.
This operation will be executed after such maintenance as cuvettes exchange.
No. Descriptions
(1) <DTR calibrating position>
Calibrating positions for photometry measurement for 90 cuvettes will be displayed.
Exec Click this button to execute a calibration and then results will be displayed.
Click this button to output calibrating positions for photometry measurement displayed on
File the screen at the file specified. (CSV format)
Specify a folder where to output data.
… If there is not enough space, the following error message will notify you;
“Not enough disk space to copy files.”
Print Click this button to print out the calibrating positions for photometry measurement.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.7 DTR Pos
3-107
3.6.8 [Password]:Setup Password

L1, L2 and Non-login users are not allowed full access in this menu.
User name for each user level and its password can be defined here.
Numbers of user names can be defined are shown below;
- L 1 (Level1: General user) : 20
- L2 (Level2: Supervisor): 10
- L3 (Level3: Manager): 5
(1)
(2)
No. Descriptions
(1) User Name

Input a user name to register.
You can select a registered user name form drop-down menu.
User level
Select a suitable user name for “L1”, “L2” and “L3” from drop-down menu.
Password
Input the password of specified user name in order to delete or create.
Old Password: Input an old (current) password.
New Password: Input a new password.
New Password Check: Input the same password you entered as a new password above.
(2) Save Click this button to save a changed password.

Cancel Click this button not to save a changed password.
Delete Click to delete a apecified password.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.8 Password
3-108
<The following table shows the relevant to the menu screen and password level.>
V: View only, FA: Full accessible, PA: Partial accessible, NA: Not accessible (Invisible)
Tab Menu or Display Non General Supervisor Manager Engineer
Job Menu
or Function Login User (L1) (L2) (L3) (EL)
<Initial Screen> Display of the client's logo FA FA FA FA FA
Run Monitor V FA FA FA FA
Round V FA FA FA FA
Selection V FA FA FA FA
Result V PA (*1) PA (*2) FA FA
Inventory V PA (*3) FA FA FA
Sleep Scheme V V FA FA FA
Std QC V FA FA FA FA
Patient V PA (*3) FA FA FA
Parameter Normal V V PA (*4) PA (*4) FA
Normal 2 V V PA (*5) PA (*5) FA
ISE V V FA FA FA
SI V V PA (*6) PA (*6) FA
Calc V V FA FA FA
Profile V V FA FA FA
Order V V FA FA FA
Wash V V FA FA FA
Calibration Reg Calib V V FA FA FA
Serial Dilut V V FA FA FA
Multi-Std V V FA FA FA
ISE V V FA FA FA
QC Graph V FA FA FA FA
Details V PA (*7) FA FA FA
Daily V PA (*7) FA FA FA
Cumulative V PA (*7) FA FA FA
Settings V V FA FA FA
Registration V V FA FA FA
System Setup V V FA FA FA
Report V V FA FA FA
Reagent V V PA(*8) PA (*8) FA
Login FA FA FA FA FA
Backup V V FA FA FA
Setup 2 V V FA FA FA
Define V V FA FA FA
Range V V FA FA FA
Maintenance W Blank V V FA FA FA
Work Hour V V PA (*9) PA (*9) FA
Sequence V V V PA (*10) FA
Sensor V V V FA FA
Perform V V V PA (*11) FA
Adjust NA NA NA FA FA
Password V V V FA FA
DTR Pos NA NA NA FA FA
Operation Logs NA NA NA NA FA
Shutdown/Sleep Shutdown/Sleep Operation NA FA FA FA FA
<Alarm> Display of alarm information V V V PA (*12) FA
[Alarm] Alarm screen selection FA FA FA FA FA
[Start (F1)] Measurement start button NA FA FA FA FA
[Sstop (F2)] Sampling stop button NA FA FA FA FA
[STAT (F3)] Sample addition button NA FA FA FA FA
[Cntrl]+[F2] Emergency stop FA FA FA FA FA
3.6 Mainte
3.6.8 Password
3-109
Note:
*1: L1 user is not allowed to access the Delete button and to specify the “Test Number” of “Sample Type”.
*2: L2 user is not allowed to specify the “Test Number” of “Sample Type”.
*3: L1 user is not allowed to access the Delete button.
*4: L2 and L3 user are not allowed to set/modify the chemistory parameters of method applied the close
reagent and to select the “None” of “Stirring Speed”.
*5: L2 and L3 user are not allowed to set/modify all items in this menu exept the selecting “Method”.
*6: L2 and L3 user are not allowed to set/modify the “Sampling Volume”, “Reagent Type”, “Reagent Name”
and “Volume”.
*7: L1 user is not allowed to access the Delete button.
*8: L2 and L3 user is not allowed to register any code of close reagent into the syatem.
*9: L2 and L3 user is allowed to access only the Reset button for “Working Hour of ISE”.
*10: L3 user is not allowed to make available the “Round Prep Skip”, but “Search” mode in the “Move Unit” is
only available.
*11: L3 user is not allowed to modify the temparature parameter for IRU, RCU and ASP, but the “Detector
Performance Monitor” is allowed to fully access .
*12: L3 user is not allowed to access the Alarm clear button.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.8 Password
3-110
3.6.9 [Operation Logs]:Records of the Operational Logs

L1, L2, L3 and Non-login users cannot open this menu.
Operation records are saved in the system as the operational logs. Saving period of data is for two years,
therefore, data which are more than two years old is automatically deleted from the system at the time when
the system enters in the sleep mode or system starts the shutdown..
You can extract operational logs that meets the sorting condition.
<Sorting condition>
- User Name: Define user name and Engineer level.
- Date: Define starting and ending date.
(2)
(1)
(3)
No. Descriptions
(1) User Name
Specify a user name to be extracted from drop-down menu.
User Level
Specify a user level to be extracted from drop-down menu.
Date From Disable
Specify the starting date from drop-down menu (Calendar).
Click the check box “Disable” to make invalid the starting date.
Date From Disable
Specify the ending date from drop-down menu (Calendar).
Click the check box “Disable” to make invalid the ending date.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.9 Operation Logs
3-111
No. Descriptions
(2) Result Output
Specify the destination of retrieved data from drop-down menu.
- Monitor: Retrieved data will be displayed on the screen.
- File: Click the box … and select the directory to save the retrieved data.
File name will be created as “yymmddnnOperationLog.csv”.
yy: 00 to 99 (Year)
mm: 01 to 12 (Month)
dd: 01 to 31 (Day)
nn: 01 to 99 (Serial number)
Search
Click this button to start retrieving log data and the retrieved data will be outputted to the destination
(Monitor or file).
(3) <Retrieved Data>

Date Time
Operational date and time will be displayed in this column.
User Name
User name logged in will be displayed in this column.
Screen
Names of menu operators had handled will be displayed in this column.
Content
What operator had done will be displayed in this column.
3.6 Mainte
3.6.9 Operation Logs
3-112
3.7 Print out

3.7.1 Live Print Out
It is available to print out such as measurement results or the information of measuring settings, by
connecting with a printer to the analyzer.
To define the printing, go to the [System (F9)]-[Setup] screen.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(1) Live Print out

Live Print out will run when you check the “Enable” box ‘ON’
Select a form for Live Print out either “Normal” or “Report”.
E.g.1) Normal form print out

2007/06/15 13:27
Sno.:001011 ID: Date:2007/06/15 Round No:10

AST ALT LDH G-GTP AMY
00046.0 00042.0 00235.0 00036.0 00125
IU/L 22 23 IU/L 59 60 IU/L 11 12 IU/L 91 92 IU/L 75 76
TP ALB CRE
00005.2 00003.5 00001.25
g/dl 38 39 g/dl 66 67 mg/dl 51 52
R1/R2 Lot No.
E.g2) Report form print out

PrintDate: 2007/07/04 PrintTime 13:39
Name : Furuno
ID : 20070704017 Date : 2007/07/04
SID.: 003012 Time: 13:32
Sample : Common Sex: : Male
Comment : none Age : 64
Physician : abcd SSNo. :
Department : efg Race :
MedicalChart : 123-456 Ward :
Classification : VW-XYZ BloodType :
BedNo. : 987-012 Reference 1 :
CollectionDate : 2007/07/04 Reference 2 :
Method Units Results Flag Rlot1 Rlot2 Normal Range

TP g/dl000 0 5.2 SS 229 429 0.0- 6.5
CHO Mg/dl 18.2 SS 30 20 0.0- 199.0
3.7 Print out

3-113
(2) Printout Header

If you input a header, it can be printed as header for the list as well.
The header can have 5 lines. The first line is 20 digits with 20-font point. From 2 to 5 line is 50digits with
normal font (10-font point).
In addition, the line 2 to 5 of the page is applied to the “Report” form only, and the first line of the header in
other pages is printed with flush left.
E.g.3) The Repot form Header printing sample (Output)
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
abcdefghijklmaopqrstuvwxyz123456789012345678901234
12345678901234567890abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234
abcdefghijklmaopqrstuvwxyz123456789012345678901234
12345678901234567890abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234
Header
PrintDate:2007/07/04 PrintTime 13:39
Name : Furuno
ID : 20070704101 Date : 2007/07/04
SID : 00301 Time : 13:32
Sample : Common Sex : Male
Comment : none Age : 64
Physician : abcd SSNo. :
Department : efg Race :
MedicalChart : 123-456 Ward :
Classification : VW-XYZ BloodType :
CollectionDate : 2007/07/04 Reference 2 :
Method Units Results Flag Rlot1 Rlot2 Normal Range

TP g/dl000 0 5.2 SS 229 429 0.0- 6.5
CHO Mg/dl 18.2 SS 30 20 0.0- 199.0
(3) Patient history Print Form
PrintDate: 2007/07/04 PrintTime 13:39
Name : Furuno
ID : 20070704017
Sex: : Male
Sample : Common Age : 64
Comment : none SSNo. :
Physician : abcd Race :
Department : efg Ward :
MedicalChart : 123-456 BloodType :
Classification : VW-XYZ Reference 1 :
Method Units Results Flag Rlot1 Rlot2 Normal Range Date

CHO Mg/dl 16.7 30 20 0.0- 199.0 07/07/01
CHO Mg/dl 18.2 30 20 0.0- 199.0 07/07/04
TP g/dl000 4.7 52 248 0.0- 6.5 07/06/10
TP g/dl000 4.5 113 375 0.0- 6.5 07/06/21
TP g/dl000 4.9 229 429 0.0- 6.5 07/07/01
TP g/dl000 5.2 229 429 0.0- 6.5 07/07/04
3.7 Print out

3-114
(4) Enable Live QC Report

When you check the “Enable” box “ON”, a QC report will be printed out with the measurement result of the
Quality Control sample.
QC report printing sample
Method Units Results Flag RLot1 Rlot2 Normal Range

Test01 mg/dl 12.0 462 162
Test02 mg/dl 5.0 497 197
QC Report Date : 2007/06/15 Time : 17:31
Control:C12 QCL3 RoundNo:2
Method Conc Unit Set Mean Set –2SD Set +2SD Warning Error
Test01 12.3 mg/dl 12.0 10.0 14.0
Test02 5.6 mg/dl 5.0 4.5 5.5 1:2S
Control: Control number/ Control name

RoundNo: Round number
Method: Method name
Conc: The result concentration
Unit: Unit for concentration value
Set Mean: The mean concentrated value of the QC sample that has been input
Set –2SD: The value calculated by the SD that has been input.
Set +2SD: The value calculated by the SD that has been input.
Warning:
Error: Current result exceed 2SD: 1:2S
Current result exceed 3SD: 1:3S
Current result exceed 4SD: 1:4S
Last 2 results exceed 2SD: 2:4S
2 out of last 3 results exceed 2SD: 1/3:2S
Range exceeds 4SD: R:4S
Any 3 result exceed 1SD: 3:1S
Any 4 result exceed 1SD: 4:1S
10 results same side of mean (increasing): 10:X[+]
10 results same side of mean (decreasing): 10:X[-]
7 continue points trend (increasing) 7:T[+]
7 continue points trend decreasing) 7:T[-]
3.7 Print out

3-115
3.7.2 Print of the Setting Items

(1) Print sample of the tab menu [Selection] of the job menu [Run (F5)].
The order list is printed out.
The title is printed as “Std QC Test Selection” and this print format is also applied to the tab menu
[StdQC] screen.
2007/06/15 17:31
Test Selection
Pos.:01 SID: 123456789012 ID: PATIENT01234 R:03 S:Common
TEST01 TEST02 TEST03 TEST04 AST ALT
Pos.:02 SID: 123456789013 ID: PATIENT01235 R:02 S:Common
TEST01 TEST02 TEST03 TEST04 AST ALT
Pos.: Sample position

SID: Sample ID
ID: Patient ID
R: Recognition numbers of standard values
S: Sample type
3.7 Print out

3-116
(2) Print sample of the Chemistry parameters (1): [Normal]

The defined values of assay criteria in measurement methods are printed out.
2007/06/15 17:31
No Name Print Name Unit Assay Wave DP

01 AST AST IU/L Rate 0340 415 1
Sample Sample Pre Reagent Vol Water Speed Point

Common N 03.0 - R1 AST 180 200 Middle 48-64
H 02.0 - R2 AST 090 -
L 03.0 -
D1
W
Photometry
point
Technical Range (Conc.) Technical Range (mAbs/10)
0000.00-0600.00 -035000- 035000
Normal Range
01 Male-G1 0000.00- 0000.00 11 0000.00-
02 Male-G2 0000.00- 0000.00 12 0000.00-
03 Male-G3 0000.00- 0000.00 13 Standard Value
0000.00-
04 Female-G1 0000.00- 0000.00 14 0000.00-
05 Female-G2 0000.00- 0000.00 15 0000.00-
06 Female-G3 0000.00- 0000.00 16 0000.00-
| |
49 0000.00-
50 0000.00-
Dup 00050
Sen 00350
Lin 30.0 00060
Pro 0.00500000 U 01-02 03-04 000250 Settings of “Normal2”
ABS I 025000
Blank
Type Disable
WHEN None
Sample No Sample
MNum 3
Dup -
Inst Factor a: 01.00 b: 000.00
3.7 Print out

3-117
(3) Print sample of the ISE Parameters: [ISE]
2007/06/15 17:35
Name Reagent
ISE DI ISE(D)
Method
criteria
Type ISEType
Common ISE(D)
Normal Range
Na K Cl
01 Male-G1 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
02 Male-G2 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0 Standard value setting
03 Male-G3 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
04 Female-G1 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
05 Female-G2 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
06 Female-G3 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
07 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
08 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
000.0| 00.00| 000.0|
000.0| 00.00| 000.0|
49 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
50 000.0-000.0 00.00-00.00 000.0-000.0
Inst Factor Na a: 01.00 b: 00.00

K a: 01.00 b: 00.00 Correction Value
Cl a: 01.00 b: 00.00
3.7 Print out

3-118
(4) Print sample of the Serum information parameters: [SI]
2007/06/15 17:31
Name Sampling Reagent Type Vol Factor

SI 02.0 148 A 000001
B 000001
C 000001 Factor Value
D 000001
E 000001
F 000001
Normal Range
H L I
0 < 000001 0 < 000001 0 < 000001
1 < 000002 1 < 000002 1 < 000002 Judge strings
2 < 000003 2 < 000003 2 < 000003 /judging standard
3 < 000004 3 < 000004 3 < 000004
4 4 4
Inst Factor H a: 01.00 b: 000.00

L a: 01.00 b: 000.00 Correction value
I a: 01.00 b: 000.00
(5) Print sample of the Method-to-Method calculation: [Calc]
2007/06/15 17:35
No Name Print Sample Unit DP

1 Calc1 Calc1 Common 1
Expression
({11}/({11}+{12}))*100 Calculating formula
Normal Range
01 Male-G1 0000.0-0000.0 11 0000.0-

02 Male-G2 0000.0-0000.0 12 0000.0-
03 Male-G3 0000.0-0000.0 13 0000.0-
04 Female-G1 0000.0-0000.0 14 0000.0-
05 Female-G2 0000.0-0000.0 15 0000.0-
06 Female-G3 0000.0-0000.0 16 0000.0-
07 000.0-000.0 17 0000.0-
08 000.0-000.0 18 0000.0-
0000.0| 0000.0|
0000.0| 0000.0|
49 000.0-000.0
50 000.0-000.0
3.7 Print out

3-119
(6) Print sample of the Profile: [Profile]
2007/06/15 17:31
Profile
Name : Prof01 Sample : Common
TEST01 TEST02 TEST03 TEST04 AST ALT ISE
Name : Prof02 Sample : Common
TEST06 TEST07 TEST08 TEST09 CRP ISE
Name: Profile name

Sample: Sample type
Method names are printed out in serial order of method.
(7) Print sample of the Wash program: [Wash]

The setting condition of wash program is printed out.
2007/06/15 17:32
Wash Programs
Reagent
Method - Method Type Name
- AST R1-R1 Wash - AST
- AST R2-R2 000005 - Water
Method: Method names are printed out. The mark “*” will be printed out if all methods are
the targets.
R1-R1 (R2-R2): Each target reagent by reagent
Type: Washing reagent by reagent (It will be blank if pure water washing is applied. In
this case, “Water” is printed out as reagent name.)
Name: Washing reagent name
3.7 Print out

3-120
(8) Print sample of the Calibration: [Reg Calib]

Details of calibration are printed out with method by method.
The setting values of [Sirial Dilut] are printed out as well.
2007/06/15 16:15
Name Sample Interval Sampling Auto Formula

Test04 Common 01 3 Lot Change Full 00 Factor
Material
Auto Interval value
NEW
0R1Lot: R2Lot:
0DateTime:
Conc Work Master LotNo Sample Diluent

S1 0000.00 000000 000000
S2 1000.00 010000 010000 Calibration curve data (New)
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
K 00001000
OLD
0R1Lot: R2Lot:
0DateTime:
Conc Work Master LotNo Sample Diluent

S1 0000.00 000000 000000
Calibration curve data (Old)
S2 1000.00 010000 010000
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
K 00001000
Reagent Blank
Blank
3.7 Print out

3-121
(9) Print sample of the QC reports: [Details]
2007/06/15 17:32
QC Report
Name Unit Sample

Test01 IU/L Common
Data From: 2007/07/25 RoundNo:02

Data To : 2007/07/25 RoundNo:02
Data Control Name Control Name

Round No. Conc Warning Error Conc Warning Error
2007/07/25 Ctrl1 Ctrl2
1 1 30.5 1:2S 45.2 1:3S
Name Measurement method name

Unit: Unit
Sample: Sample type
Date From: Search period
Date To: Search period
Round No: Round number
Control Name: Control name
Conc: Measurement result
Warning Error: Warning/Error strings
Three control results of “Control Name “to “Warning/Error strings” are printed out abreast.
3.7 Print out

3-122
(10) Print sample of the Daily: [Daily]
2007/06/15 17:32
Daily QC List
Control:C01 Ctrl01
Date:2007/07/24 Round No. : 1
Method N Mean -2SD SD CV Min Warn/Err

+2SD Max
Test01 3 45.0 -5 2.5 1.0 40.0
5 50.0
Test02 3 22.0 -2 1.0 2.5 20.0

2 24.0
Control: Control number and name

Date: Search starts date and end date
Round: Round number
Method: Method name
N: The number of the search data
Mean: The value -2SD calculated by the target measurement results
+2SD: The value +2SD calculated by the target measurement results
SD: The value SD calculated by the target measurement results
CV: The value CV calculated by the target measurement results
Min: The minimum value calculated by the target measurement results
Max: The maximum value calculated by the target measurement results
Warn/Err: Error or warning strings
3.7 Print out

3-123
(11) Print sample of the QC report: [Cumulative]
2007/06/15 17:32
Cumulative QC List
Control:C01 Ctrl01
Date From:2007/07/24 To:2007/07/26
Method N Mean -2SD SD CV Min Warn/Err

+2SD Max
Test01 1 162.9 -13.3 6.7 4.09 157.0 1 : 2S
5 173.0
Test02 1 93.54 -9.30 4.65 5 88.00

9.30 105.00
Control: Control number and name

Date From To: Search start date and end date
Method：: Method name
N: The number of the search data
Mean: Mean value of concentration calculated by the target measurement results
-2SD: The value -2SD calculated by the target measurement results
+2SD: The value +2SD calculated by the target measurement results
SD: The value SD calculated by the target measurement results
CV: The value CV calculated by the target measurement results
Min: The minimum value calculated by the target measurement results
Max: The maximum value calculated by the target measurement results
Warn/Err: Error or warning strings
3.7 Print out

3-124
(12) Print sample of the QC setting: [Setting]
2007/06/15 16:15
QC Settings
Name Sample Interval Auto

Test04 Common 000 Tests :0000 Min:0000 Mode:MEAN-R No.:-
Control Name Mean SD

1 Ctrl1 5.00 1.00
2 Ctrl2 10.00 2.00
3 Ctrl3 15.00 3.00
Current result exceeds 2SD WARNING

Current result exceeds 3SD ERROR
Current result exceeds 4SD INACTIVE
Last 2 results exceed 2SD INACTIVE
2 out of last 3 results exceed 2SD INACTIVE
Range exceeds 4SD INACTIVE
Any 3 result exceed 1SD INACTIVE
Any 4 result exceed 1SD INACTIVE
10 results same side of mean INACTIVE
7 continue points trend INACTIVE
Name: Method name

Sample: Sample type
Interval: Check interval
Mode: Mode for calculation
With a calculation mode, either “MEAN-R” or “X-R” can be printed out.
No.: Data number
It will be printed out when the calculation mode is “X-R”.
“No.” will be put “-” when the mode is “MEAN-R”.
Control Name: Control Name
Mean: Mean value
SD: Standard Deviation
3.7 Print out

3-125
3.7 Print out

3-126
Chapter 4 Alarm
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.1 Alarm Overview
Information of abnormalities, which occur during operation, is displayed as alarm messages. These
abnormalities are detected mechanically, electrically or by software. When an error occurs, the [Alarm (F4)]
button at the bottom of the screen starts blinking in red. Pressing the [F4] key switches the current screen to
“Alarm screen” which displays the error code and error description. (6)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No. Explanation
(1) Alarm No.

Alarm number for the current alarm event is displayed.
Refer to “4.2 User Interface Alarm” and “4.3 Unit Alarm”.
(2) Date Time : Date and time when the alarm occurs is displayed. <Assigned alarm file name>
almyymmddnn.csv
(3) Message : Alarm contents are displayed. alm: Fixed name
yy: Year (00 to 99)
(4) Alarm Message Details : Alarm detail description is displayed. mm: Month (01 to 12)
dd: Day (01 to 31)
(5) Clear All : When click on this button, deletes all alarms in the list. nn: Number (01 to 99)
(6) File : When click on this button, saves all alarms into the destination directory.
… : When click on this button, you can designate the destination directory where is saved alarm file.
And the alarm file’s name is automatically assigned by system.
4.1 Alarm Overview
4-1
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.1.1 Alarm Type
Last two digits of the error code are defined as follows;
Definition of last
Level Alarm type Description
two digits
The analyzer emergently stops the operation due to
1 Emergency stop “00” ~ “49”
a fatal error.
Sampling operation for new samples stops.
2 Alarm 1 “50” ~ “74” The measurement for the already dispensed samples
will be continued.
Only the message is displayed, the measurement
3 Alarm 2 “75” ~ “99”
operation continues.
4.1.2 Alarm Output Destination
Alarm messages are normally output on the screen of the operational PC. Evaluation flags for the
measurement results are printed out at the printer. cf. op. cit., [3.1.2 Round (Error Flags)] for detail.
4.1.3 Alarm Code Numbering System
Alarm code, which is a combination of unit number and error number, is assigned to each error event. This
4-digit code consists of 2-digit unit number and 2-digit error number. (Ex. 1310 etc.)
4.1 Alarm Overview

4.1.1 Alarm Type/ 4.1.2 Alarm Output Destination/ 4.1.3 Alarm Code Numbering System
4-2
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.2 User Interface Alarm

Code Message Explanation and Action
The measurement result(s) could not be converted into concentration.

6002 Concentration calculation error. Check the setting details on the [Calibration] screen and also verify if the calibration is
performed correctly.
Full calibration was not performed appropriately. The concentration value input on the
6003 Full calibration failed. [Calibration] screen may be wrong or standard sample may not be placed in the ASP
appropriately. Check and try again.
Full calibration, one-point or two-point calibration failed. The concentration value

6004 Full, one point or 2-point calibration failed. input on the [Calibration] screen may be wrong or standard sample may not be placed in
the ASP appropriately. Check and try again.
Printer output failed. Verify if the cable is connected appropriately or the printer is in
6005 Printer output failed.
the [Ready] state.
Standard sample whose concentration value has not been set was found. Make sure to
6008 Invalid standard sample found.
input the concentration value for the standard sample which you calibrate.
Input concentration values are less than 3. Input 3 or more concentration values for the
6009 Concentration information not available.
standard sample to be calibrated.
6011 Data reception error. Received invalid data from the Host. Check with the Host.
6012 Software interrupted. Overflow or zero divide error occurred during concentration conversion.
Bcc error occurred during host Bcc error occurred during host communication. Check the communication setting
6013
communication. details on the [System setting] screen.
No response from the Host. Verify if the communication cable to the Host is
Time out error occurred during host
6014 appropriately connected. Check the communication setting details on the [System setting]
communication.
screen.
Data was resent to the Host, however, no response. Verify if the communication cable
Re transmission error occurred during host
6015 to the Host is appropriately connected. Check the communication setting details on the
communication.
[System setting] screen.
Reagent blank data has been deleted automatically due to expiration of storage period.
6016 Unable to display time course data. Reagent blank data for the selected measurement has been deleted. Unable to display
time course data.
Database update failure.

6030
Database insertion failure.

6031
Database may be corrupt or damaged. Contact our customer service section for technical
Database deletion failure. support.
6032
Database SelectOpen failure.

6033
There are less than 30 good cuvettes and Conduct cuvette cleaning. If you still have an error, replace no-good cuvette(s) with
6100
testing cannot begin. good cuvette(s).
4-3
Chapter 4 Alarm
Not enough reagent inventory to initiate the The amount of the required reagent(s) for the measurement shown bellow is not
6101
run. sufficient. Replace reagent bottle(s) with new ones.
Calibrant A remaining volume is running

6102 Remaining amount of Calibrant A is insufficient. Replace the bottle with new a one.
short.
Possible shortage of reagent for Following reagent remaining amount required for the measurement may be running
6103
measurement. short.
As the sensor has detected an error, the measurement cannot be started. Check the
situation.
6104 Error detected
Press [Ctrl] + [F2] for emergency stop and click [F4] to confirm error status.
Follow [3.6.4 Sensor] to identify sensor number.
Factor computation is included among the placed standard samples. Check the
6120 Standard has been set for “Factor” assay.
situation.
Found calibrators other than S2. As Blank

Even if the selection of “Enable reagent blank as S1” is set, a calibrator (standard
6121 Measurement is set to enable reagent blank
sample) other than S2 is placed. Check the situation.
as S1, only S2 can be used for calibration.
Found series dilution calibrators. As Blank

Even if the selection of “Enable reagent blank as S1” is set, a standard sample except
6122 Measurement is set to enable reagent blank
for S1 is placed. Check the situation and place S2 standard sample.
as S1, only S2 can be used for calibration.
Calibration is performed due to lack of

6123
calibration curve for method.
Check the sample number and method number:
Measurement is not performed due to lack
6124
of calibration curve for method.
There is no agreed reagent lot numbers with the measurement result data. Try again
6125 Disagreed reagent lot number.
after check.
6201~ RCU bottle barcode number (1~60) is not Check if there are any smears and/or damages on the barcode label applied to the
6260 usable. reagent bottles
6301~ RCU bottle number (1~60) barcode has The barcode is already assigned for the bottle that has been already placed in other
6360 already been assigned. position.
6401~ RCU bottle number (1~60) reagent code is

Check the reagent registration status at the [System] screen.
6460 not registered.
The process has been interrupted due to

6500 Contact our customer service section for technical support.
mechanical interference.
Check the halogen lamp. Perform automatic gain adjustment. If fault returns, contact
6501 Automatic gain adjustment failed.
our customer service section for technical support.
While dealing with the emergency stop situation, an emergency stop occurred in the
6502 Restart failed.
main analyzer. Hardware problems may be occurring. Check the situation.
Sensor detects the error. Check the sensor and sensor number.
6510 Error detected
Follow [3.6.4 Sensor] to identify sensor number.
4-4
Chapter 4 Alarm

IRU temperature is less than 36.5 degrees.
6520 The temperature in the IRU must be kept within a range of 36.5 °C to 37.5°C (not
including 37.5°C). Observe the temperature monitor on the [Mainte]-[Perform] screen
IRU temperature is more than 37.5 degrees. and contact our customer service section for technical support.
6521
Temperature in the RCU must be kept at 15°C or lower. Observe the temperature
6522 RCU temperature is more than 15 degrees. monitor on the [Mainte]-[Perform] screen and contact our customer service section for
technical support.
The temperature in the ASP must be kept at 10°C or lower. Observe the temperature
monitor on the [Mainte]-[Perform] screen and contact our customer service section for
6523 ASP temperature is more than 10 degrees.
technical support.
Order registrations for the following position numbers and sample numbers have not
Omitted order registration of position and
6600 been performed yet. Check the orders.
sample numbers.
Measurement cannot be performed because the order registrations for the following
Measurement is not performed due to
6601 sample numbers are overlapped. Check the orders.
overlaps of sample numbers.
Existing order for a sample has been

6602
overwritten with new order by ASP Scan.
As a new order was sent by the ASP Scan to the existing sample, the existing order has
been renewed into the new order.
Existing order for a sample has been
7001
overwritten with new order from host.
Communication error occurred during

7002 Verify that the communication cable to the Host is connected appropriately. Perform an
order reception from host.
order inquiry to the Host again. If you still have an error, contact our customer service
Communication error occurred during section for technical support.
7003
result transmission to host.
Received order(s) with following reagent shortage method(s). Add a new reagent and
Received order with short reagent received
7004 perform an order inquiry to the Host again.
from host.
Sample number with invalid character Because the sample number other than normal sample is received, following orders
7005 received from host and discarded it. were discarded. Check the correct order with the Host.
Check the memory capacity of the PC, and stop the unnecessary applications, then
Failed to allocate memory for result
7006 resend the result(s) to the Host.
transmission.
Communication protocol may not be set appropriately. Check the communication

7007 Host transmissions retry time over error. setting details on the [System setting] screen.
Check the memory capacity of the PC, and stop the unnecessary applications, then
Failed to allocate memory for order
7008 perform an order inquiry to the Host again.
acquire.
Sample number with invalid character

7010 As an unregistered sample number is received, the following orders were discarded.
received from host and discarded.
Reboot the PC. If you still have an error, contact our customer service section for
Failed to allocate memory while acquiring
7011 technical support.
QC data.
Either the serum information definition file does not exist or the file format is not
7030 Failed to read serum indices setting file. correct. Contact our customer service section for technical support.
Received more orders from host than the Received more orders than the maximum sample numbers (1,000) for order
7051
analyzer can handle. registration. Check with the Host.
Registration of calibrator B to the standard sample tray position is required to execute

7052 ISE calibrator B is not registered. the calibration.
Registration of wash solution to the standard sample tray position is required to

7053 ISE wash solution is not registered.
execute the ISE wash.
4-5
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3 Unit Alarm

Code Message Action
System file cannot be found. Contact
0075 System file is not recognized. our customer service section for
technical support.
4.3.1 Reagent Pipette 1 (RPT1)

Reagent Pipette’s Rotation Movement (RPT1R)
Code Level Message Location of Problem & Cause Action
Reagent pipette (RPT1) rotation
0102 1 Nozzle position is out of the IRU side
sensor is on after rotation.
normal movable area.
0103 1 sensor is on before rotation. (while Rotary drive unit
not at its origin)
Turn off the power, and verify if the
Nozzle position is out of the RCU side
Reagent pipette (RPT1) rotation RPT1 Unit can move smoothly within its
0104 1 sensor is off after returning to its normal movable area.
Rotary drive unit
origin.
RPTR origin sensor
Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if
Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit. it recovers correctly.
Reagent pipette (RPT1) up sensor is The nozzle cannot return to its origin due
0106 1 off at initiation of rotation to an external force. If you still have an error, contact our
command. Up-down driving mechanism customer service section for technical
Upper origin sensor support.
The nozzle cannot return to its origin due
Reagent pipette (RPT1) up sensor is
to an external force.
2 off at initiation of rotation
0156 Up-down driving mechanism
command. (while not at trough or
Upper origin sensor
RCU position)
Reagent Pipette’s Vertical Movement (RPT1U)

Reagent pipette (RPT1), up origin Up-down driving mechanism
0201 1
sensor, is off before descent. Upper origin sensor
Reagent pipette (RPT1), up origin Turn off the power, and verify if the
0202 1 Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit.
sensor, is still on after descent. RPT1 Unit can move smoothly within its
Up-down driving mechanism
Reagent pipette (RPT1), ascent to Upper origin sensor normal movable area.
0203 1
origin sensor, is on before ascent.
Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if
Reagent pipette (RPT1), ascent to The nozzle cannot return to its origin due it recovers correctly.
0204 1
origin sensor, is off after ascent. to an external force.
Upper origin sensor If you still have an error, contact our
customer service section for technical
Reagent pipette (RPT1) origin support.
Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit.
sensor is not off at the initiation of
0205 1 Up-down driving mechanism
movement command. (from a
Upper origin sensor
position other than its origin)
IRU Unit can move smoothly within its
normal movable area. Reinitialize the
IRU safety sensor is off at reagent Positional relation between IRU and RPT1
analyzer, and check if it recovers
0206 1 pipette (RPT1) movement IRU Drive unit
correctly.
command. IRU Ready position sensor
If you still have an error, contact our
support.
RPT1 Unit can move smoothly within its
normal movable area. Reinitialize the
Reagent pipette (RPT1) is not above
RPT1R Origin sensor analyzer, and check if it recovers
0209 1 IRU at initiation of the pipette up or
RPT1R Rotary drive unit correctly.
down command.
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-6
Chapter 4 Alarm

Reagent pipette (RPT1) up position Turn off the power, and verify if the
0251 2 sensor is off at initiation of reagent RPT1 Unit can move smoothly within its
pipette downward command. normal movable area.
it recovers correctly.
Reagent pipette (RPT1) up position If you still have an error, contact our
0253 2 sensor is on at initiation of reagent RPT1U Drive unit customer service section for technical
pipette upward command. support.
Reagent pipette (RPT1) up sensor is

on at initiation of reagent pipette up
0255 2
or down command. (from a position Turn off the power, and verify if the
other than its origin) RPT1 Unit can move smoothly within its
Reagent pipette (RPT1) safety normal movable area.
RPT1 nozzle position at the RPT 1
sensor is off at initiation of the Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if
0257 2 Trough.
pipette up or down command at it recovers correctly.
RPT1U Drive unit
RCU. If you still have an error, contact our
Reagent pipette (RPT1) position RPT1 nozzle position at the RCU reagent customer service section for technical
sensor for RCU is off at initiation of aspiration point. support.
0258 2
the pipette up or down command at RPT1U Drive unit
RCU. RPT1 Ready position sensor
Wipe the pipette nozzle with alcohol.
Check if the liquid level detection
mechanism of the RPT1 has been
inhibited.
Reagent shortage While holding the pipette arm, verify
Reagent pipette (RPT1) crash
if the nozzle can be moved vertically by
detection sensor is on before reagent
0275 3 Lower limit sensor a few millimeters with hands.
pipette has reached the bottom of
RCU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
the RCU.
RPT1U Drive unit recovers correctly.
support.
Reagent shortage Verify if there is enough reagent

Reagent pipette (RPT1) cannot
0276 3 Liquid level sensor quantity in the reagent bottle(s) placed in
detect RCU liquid level.
RCU Drive unit the RCU. If there is enough reagent
quantity in the bottles, then verify the
vertical movement of the RPT1.
inhibited. While holding the pipette arm,
verify if the nozzle can be moved
vertically by a few millimeters with
Reagent pipette (RPT1) hardware is hands.
0278 3
functioning abnormally. Wipe the pipette nozzle with alcohol.
Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.
Reagent If you still have an error, contact our
Liquid level sensor customer service section for technical
support.
Check the condition of the reagent

bottle(s) placed in the RCU. Remove the
bubbles, if any, on the surface of
reagent.
RPT1 liquid level detection at RCU;
0279 3 Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if
Liquid level not detected.
support.
When the RPT1 descended, the IRU
did not stop at the center. Check if there
Reagent pipette (RPT1) crash are any plays in the IRU Drive system.
IRU Drive system
0281 3 detection sensor is on at initiation of If you still have an error, contact our
RPT1R Rotary drive system
dispensation command at IRU. customer service section for technical
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-7
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump for Reagent Pipette 1 (RPP1)

Reagent syringe pump (RPP1)

RPP１Origin sensor
0301 1 origin sensor is off at initiation of
aspiration command. RPP1Drive unit
RPP１Drive unit
RPP1 Piping section
Reagent syringe pump (RPP1) Solenoid valve
0302 1 origin sensor is still on although Syringe tip
syringe has left its origin. Upper origin sensor
Installation position of the gobo for the
Upper origin sensor is too high.
RPP１Drive unit This indicates that the RPP1 syringe is

Reagent syringe pump (RPP1) RPP1 Piping section not located appropriately. Visually check
0303 1 origin sensor is on before Solenoid valve the syringe movement.
dispensation command. Syringe tip
Upper origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.

Reagent syringe pump (RPP1) customer service section for technical
origin sensor is still off although the support.
0304 1
reagent syringe has returned to its
origin.
RPP１Drive unit
Reagent syringe pump (RPP1) RPP1 Piping section
origin sensor is not off at initiation Solenoid valve
0305 1
of reagent pump movement. (while Syringe tip
reagent syringe is not at its origin) Upper origin sensor

aspiration command.
Clean the RPT1 nozzle with

0352 2 RPT1 nozzle is clogged. RPT1 nozzle is clogged
the nozzle-cleaning jig.
Reagent syringe pump (RPP1)origin

0353 2 sensor is on at initiation of
dispensation command.
RPP１Drive unit This indicates that the RPP1 syringe is
RPP1 Piping section not located appropriately. Visually check
Solenoid valve the syringe movement.
Reagent syringe pump (RPP1)origin Syringe tip
sensor is not off at initiation of Upper origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0355 2 reagent pump movement. (while
recovers correctly.
reagent syringe is at trough or RCU
position)
support.
0356 2 safety sensor is off at initiation of RPT1 Safety sensor
dispensation command.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-8
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump of Water for Reagent Pipette 1 (RPP1W)

Reagent syringe pump for wash

(RPP1W ) origin sensor is off at RPP1W Origin sensor
4001 1
initiation of aspiration at origin. RPP1W Drive unit
(Trough or RCU)
RPP1W Drive unit

RPP1W Piping section
Solenoid valve
(RPP1W) origin sensor is on
4002 1 Syringe tip
although the syringe has left origin.
Upper origin sensor
(at initialization)

(RPP1W) origin sensor is on before
4003 1 initiation of the syringe movement
command. (from fully dispensed
position)
This indicates that the RPP1W syringe

Reagent syringe pump for wash is not located appropriately. Visually
(RPP1W) origin sensor is still off check the syringe movement.
4004 1 although the syringe has returned to
origin. (at initialization) Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.
At the initiation of movement the If you still have an error, contact our
reagent syringe pump for wash customer service section for technical
4005 1 support.
(RPP1W) origin sensor is not off
although the syringe is not at origin. RPP1W Drive unit
Solenoid valve
Reagent syringe pump for wash Syringe tip
(RPP1W) origin sensor is off at Upper origin sensor
4051 2
initiation of aspiration at origin.
(Trough or RCU)

position) (Trough or RCU)
At the initiation of movement the

reagent syringe pump for wash
4055 2 (RPP1W), the origin sensor is not
off although the syringe is not at
origin.

Reagent pipette (RPT1) safety
sensor is off before initiation of Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4056 2 RPT1 Safety sensor recovers correctly.
RPP1W movement command. (from
fully dispensed position)
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-9
Chapter 4 Alarm

Reagent Pipette’s Rotation Movement (RPT2R)
4102 1
sensor is on after rotation. Nozzle position is out of the IRU side
Reagent pipette (RPT2) rotation normal movable area.
4103 1 origin sensor is on at initiation of Rotary drive unit
return to origin command. Turn off the power, and verify if the
Reagent pipette (RPT2) rotation Nozzle position is out of the RCU side RPT2 Unit can move smoothly within its
origin sensor is still off although the normal movable area. normal movable area.
4104 1
RPT2 has returned to origin. (at Rotary drive unit
initialization) RPT2R Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if
Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit. it recovers correctly.
Reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin The nozzle cannot return to its origin due to
4106 1 sensor is off at initiation of RPT2 an external force. If you still have an error, contact our
rotation command. Up-down driving mechanism customer service section for technical
Reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin The nozzle cannot return to its origin due to
sensor is on at initiation of RPT2 an external force.
4156 2
rotation command. (Trough or Up-down driving mechanism
RCU) Upper origin sensor
Reagent Pipette’s Vertical Movement (RPT2U)

Reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin
sensor is off at initiation of the Up-down driving mechanism
4201 1
pipette descent from origin Upper origin sensor
command.
4202 1 sensor is on although the RPT2 has Turn off the power, and verify if the
left up origin. (at initialization) Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit. RPT2 Unit can move smoothly within its
Up-down driving mechanism normal movable area.
Reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin Upper origin sensor
4203 1 sensor is on at initiation of return to
origin command.
recovers correctly.
Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit
The nozzle cannot return to its origin due If you still have an error, contact our
sensor is still off although the RPT2
4204 1 to an external force. customer service section for technical
has returned to up origin. (at
initialization)

Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit.
reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin
4205 1 Up-down driving mechanism
sensor is not off although the RPT2
Upper origin sensor
is not at up origin.
IRU safety sensor is off at initiation Positional relation between IRU and RPT2
4206 1 of the reagent pipette (RPT2) up or IRU Drive unit
recovers correctly.
down command. IRU Ready sensor position
support.
Reagent pipette (RPT2) is not above
RPT２R Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4209 1 IRU at initiation of the pipette up or
RPT２R Rotary drive unit recovers correctly.
down command.
support.
MIX2 must be located above its trough
Mixer2 is not above its trough at at initiation.
4210 1 initiation of movement command. MIX2 is not located above its trough. Turn off the power, and move the MIX2
(at initialization) to above its trough.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-10
Chapter 4 Alarm

sensor is off at initiation of the
4251 2
pipette descent from origin
command. (at trough or RCU)
4253 2 sensor is on at initiation of return to RPT2U Drive unit Turn off the power, and verify if the
origin command. (Trough or RCU) RPT2 Unit can move smoothly within its
At the initiation of movement, the
reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin
4255 2 Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
sensor is not off although the RPT2
recovers correctly.
is not at up origin. (Trough or RCU)
Reagent pipette (RPT2) safety RPT2 nozzle position at the RPT 2 If you still have an error, contact our
sensor is off at initiation of the Trough. customer service section for technical
4257 2
pipette up or down command at RPT2U Drive unit support.
Reagent pipette (RPT2) position RPT2 nozzle position at the RCU reagent
sensor for RCU is off at initiation of aspiration position.
4258 2
the pipette up or down command at RPT2U Drive unit
Reagent pipette (RPT2) crash Reagent shortage vertically by a few millimeters with
detection sensor is on before reagent Lower limit sensor hands.
4275 3
pipette has reached the bottom of RCU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
the RCU. RPT2U Drive unit recovers correctly.
support.
Reagent shortage Check if the reagent amount in the

RCU liquid level has not been
4276 3 Liquid level sensor reagent bottle placed in the RCU is
detected by reagent pipette (RPT2).
RCU Drive unit sufficient. If there is enough amount of
reagent in the bottle, check the vertical
movement of the RPT2.
Level detection of RCU with vertically by a few millimeters with
4278 3 reagent pipette (RPT2) indicated hands.
erroneously H/W. Wipe the pipette nozzle with alcohol.
recovers correctly.
Reagent If you still have an error, contact our
Liquid level sensor customer service section for technical
support.
Check the condition of the reagent

bottle(s) placed in the RCU. Remove the
bubbles, if any, on the surface of reagent.
RCU liquid level has not been Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4279 3 detected by reagent pipette (RPT2) recovers correctly.
at retrial. If you still have an error, contact our
support.
When the RPT2 descended, the IRU

did not stop at the center. Check if there
Reagent pipette (RPT2) crash are any plays in the IRU Drive system.
IRU Drive system
4281 3 detection sensor is on at initiation of If you still have an error, contact our
RPT2R Rotary drive system
dispensation command at IRU. customer service section for technical
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-11
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump for Reagent Pipette 2 (RPP2)


RPP２Origin sensor
aspiration at origin. RPP２Drive unit
RPP2 Drive unit

RPP2 Piping section
Solenoid valve
origin sensor is on although the
4302 1 Syringe tip
syringe has left origin. (at
Upper origin sensor
initialization)

origin sensor is on before initiation
4303 1
of the syringe movement command.
(from fully dispensed position)
Reagent syringe pump (RPP2) This indicates that the RPP2 syringe is
origin sensor is still off although the not located appropriately. Visually check
4304 1 the syringe movement.
syringe has returned to origin. (at
initialization)
recovers correctly.
reagent syringe pump (RPP2) origin customer service section for technical
4305 1
sensor is not off although the support.
syringe is not at origin. RPP2 Drive unit
RPP2 Piping section
Solenoid valve
Reagent syringe pump (RPP2) Syringe tip
origin sensor is off at initiation of Upper origin sensor
4351 2
aspiration at origin. (at trough or
RCU)

origin sensor is on before initiation
4353 2 of the syringe movement command.
(Trough or RCU)

reagent syringe pump (RPP2) origin
4355 2
sensor is not off although the
syringe is not at origin.

sensor is on before initiation of
4356 2 RPT2 Safety sensor
RPP2 syringe movement command.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-12
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump of Water for Reagent Pipette 2 (RPP2W)

Reagent syringe pump of water

(RPP2W) origin sensor is off at RPP2W Origin sensor
4401 1
initiation of aspiration at origin. RPP2W Drive unit
(Trough or RCU)
RPP2W Drive unit

Solenoid valve
(RPP2W) origin sensor is on
4402 1 Syringe tip
although its syringe position has left
Upper origin sensor
origin. (at initialization)

4403 1 initiation of syringe movement
position)
Reagent syringe pump for wash This indicates that the RPP2W syringe
(RPP2W) origin sensor is still off is not located appropriately. Visually
4404 1 although its reagent syringe has check the syringe movement.
returned to origin. (at initialization)
recovers correctly.
reagent syringe pump for wash customer service section for technical
4405 1 (RPP2W) origin sensor is not off support.
although the syringe position is not
RPP2W Drive unit
at origin point.
Solenoid valve
Syringe tip
Reagent syringe pump for wash Upper origin sensor
(RPP2W) origin sensor is off at
4451 2
initiation of aspiration at origin.
(Trough or RCU)

4453 2 initiation of syringe movement
position) (Trough or RCU)

reagent syringe pump for wash
4455 2 (RPP2W), the origin sensor is not
off although the syringe position is
not at origin.

sensor is off before initiation of Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4456 2 syringe of RPP2W movement RPT2 Safety sensor recovers correctly.
position) If you still have an error, contact our
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-13
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.3 Sample Pipette （SPT）
Sample Pipette’s Rotation Movement (SPTR)

Sample pipette (SPT) origin rotation
0402 1 sensor is still on although the pipette Nozzle position is out of the IRU side
has left its origin. normal movable area.
Sample pipette (SPT) origin rotation
0403 1 sensor is on before rotation to its SPTR Drive unit Turn off the power, and verify if the
origin. SPT can move smoothly (vertical &
rotational movement) within its normal
Nozzle position is out of the RCU side
Sample pipette (SPT) origin rotation movable area.
0404 1 sensor is still off although the
SPTR Drive unit
pipette has returned to its origin. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
SPTR Origin sensor
recovers correctly.
Nozzle position is beyond the lower limit.
Sample pipette (SPT) up origin The nozzle cannot return to its origin due If you still have an error, contact our
0406 1 rotation sensor is off at initiation of to an external force. customer service section for technical
pipette rotation command. SPTR Drive unit support.
SPTU Origin sensor
Sample pipette (SPT) origin sensor
SPTU Drive unit
0456 2 is off at initiation of pipette rotation
Upper origin sensor
command.
Sample Pipette’s Vertical Movement (SPTU)

Sample pipette (SPT) up origin
SPTU Drive unit
0501 1 sensor is off at initiation of pipette
Upper origin sensor
descent from origin command.
Sample pipette (SPT) up origin Turn off the power, and verify if the
0502 1 SPT can move smoothly (vertical &
sensor is on after pipette descent. Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit.
SPTU Drive unit rotational movement) within its normal
Sample pipette (SPT) up sensor is
Upper origin sensor movable area.
0503 1 on at initiation of pipette return to
origin command.
Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit. recovers correctly.
SPT ascend to origin; SPTU origin
The nozzle cannot return to its origin due
0504 1 sensor (SPTU_ZERO) is off after
to an external force. If you still have an error, contact our
ascend. (At initialization)
Upper origin sensor customer service section for technical
Sample pipette (SPT) up origin support.
sensor is not off at initiation of Nozzle position is beyond the upper limit.
0505 1
pipette movement. (the pipette is not Upper origin sensor.
at its origin)
IRU safety sensor is not on at the Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
IRU Drive unit
0506 1 sample pipette (SPT) up or down recovers correctly.
IRU Ready position sensor
command. If you still have an error, contact our
support.
MIX1 must be located above its trough

MIX1 is not above trough at when starting initialization.
MIX1 is not located above its trough when
0510 1 initiation of movement. (at Turn off the power and move the MIX1
initializing the SPT.
initialization) to its trough.

SPT can move smoothly (vertical &
Sample pipette (SPT) rotation origin movable area.
sensor is off at initiation of the SPTR Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0511 1 recovers correctly.
pipette up or down command at SPTR Rotary drive unit
IRU. If you still have an error, contact our
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.3 Sample Pipette (SPT)
4-14
Chapter 4 Alarm

0551 2 is off at initiation of pipette
downward movement.
0553 2 is on at initiation of upward SPTU Drive unit
movement. Upper origin sensor
is not off at initiation of pipette
0555 2
movement. (the pipette is not at its
origin)
Sample pipette (SPT) safety sensor Nozzle position is out of the normal SPT can move smoothly (vertical &
0557 2 is off at initiation of the pipette movable area. rotational movement) within its normal
upward command at ASP. T/S Position sensor movable area.
Sample pipette (SPT) position Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it

sensor for ASP is off at initiation of SPTASP Sensor recovers correctly.
0558 2
the pipette upward command at SPTR Rotary drive unit
ASP. If you still have an error, contact our
Sample pipette (SPT) trough sensor customer service section for technical
SPT_TS Sensor support.
0559 2 is on at initiation of the pipette up or
SPTR Rotary drive unit
down command at ASP.
Sample pipette (SPT) trough sensor
SPT_TS Sensor
0561 2 is not on at initiation of the pipette
up or down command at the trough.
Sample pipette (SPT) trough sensor
SPT_TS Sensor
0562 2 is off at initiation of the pipette up
or down command at ISE.
SPT position sensor for ASP is off at
SPT_TS Sensor
0563 2 initiation of the pipette up or down
command at ISE.
SPT nozzle clotting

0570 2 SPT clot detected while aspirating.
Sample clotting
SPT nozzle clotting Check sample condition.

0571 2 SPT clot detected while dispensing. Shut down the analyzer and clean SPT
Sample clotting
nozzle if necessary.
If you still have this error, contact our

SPT nozzle clotting
0572 2 SPT clot detected while washing. customer service for technical support.
Sample clotting
Communication error for SPT clot ASP Drive unit

0573 2
detection. SPT Clot Detecting unit

mechanism of the SPT has been inhibited.
Sample shortage While holding the pipette arm, verify if

Sample pipette (SPT) crash sensor is the nozzle can be moved vertically by a
Lower limit sensor
0575 3 on but the pipette is not at the few millimeters with hands. Reinitialize
ASP Drive unit
bottom of the ASP. the analyzer, and check if it recovers
SPTU Drive unit
correctly.

support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-15
Chapter 4 Alarm

Sample tube may not exist in the ASP slot
or the sample amount in the tube may not be Check the amount of the sample placed
Sample pipette (SPT) cannot detect
0576 3 sufficient. in the ASP. If the sample amount is
the liquid level at ASP.
Liquid level sensor sufficient, check the vertical movement of
ASP Drive unit the SPT.

While holding the pipette arm, verify if
the nozzle can be moved vertically by a
few millimeters with hands.
Sample pipette (SPT) crash sensor is Cuvette condition is abnormal.
0578 3 on but the pipette has not reached Reagent has not been dispensed yet. Wipe the SPT nozzle with alcohol.
the bottom of the cuvette. Lower limit sensor. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.

support.
Check the presence of the reagent

(Reagent R1) in the cuvette. If Reagent
R1 is present in the cuvette, check the
vertical movement of the SPT.

Cuvette condition is abnormal. While holding the pipette arm, verify if
Sample pipette (SPT) cannot detect the nozzle can be moved vertically by a
0579 3 Reagent has not been dispensed yet. few millimeters with hands.
liquid level at IRU.
Liquid level sensor. Wipe the SPT nozzle with alcohol.
recovers correctly.

support.
Check the amount of the sample placed

in the ASP. If the sample amount is
sufficient, check the vertical movement of
the SPT.

Sample pipette (SPT) liquid level SPTU Drive unit the nozzle can be moved vertically by a
0581 3 few millimeters with hands.
hardware is abnormal at ASP. Liquid level sensor
Wipe the SPT nozzle with alcohol.

recovers correctly.

support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-16
Chapter 4 Alarm
Check the presence of the reagent

(Reagent R1) in the cuvette. If Reagent
R1 is present in the cuvette, check the
vertical movement of the SPT.

Sample pipette (SPT) liquid level the nozzle can be moved vertically by a
0582 2
hardware is abnormal at IRU. few millimeters with hands.
Wipe the SPT nozzle with alcohol.

recovers correctly.
Liquid level sensor
support.
Check the condition of the sample

placed in the ASP. Remove the bubbles, if
any, on the surface of sample. Reinitialize
SPT liquid level detection at ASP; the analyzer, and check if it recovers
0583 2 Liquid level not detected at correctly.
duplicate detection.
support.
0590 2 SPT clot detected while aspirating. Check sample condition. Shut down the
0591 2 SPT clot detected while dispensing. analyzer and clean SPT nozzle if
necessary.
SPT clotting If you still have an error, contact our
0592 2 SPT clot detected while washing. SPT clotting sensor customer service for technical support.
Communication error for SPT clot
0593 2 Contact technical support.
detection.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-17
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump for Sample Pipette (SPP)

SPP Drive unit

Sample syringe (SPP) origin sensor SPP Piping section
0601 1 is off at initiation of aspiration Solenoid valve
instruction. Syringe tip
Upper origin sensor
SPP Drive unit

SPP Piping section
Sample syringe (SPP) origin sensor Solenoid valve
0602 1 is still on after the syringe has left Syringe tip
its origin. Upper origin sensor This indicates that the SPP is not
Installation position of the gobo for the located appropriately. Visual check the
Upper origin sensor is too high. syringe movement.
Sample syringe (SPP) origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
is on before initiation of syringe recovers correctly.
0603 1
movement command to discharge.
Sample syringe (SPP) origin sensor SPP Drive unit customer service section for technical
is still off after syringe has returned SPP Piping section support.
0604 1
to its origin. Solenoid valve
Syringe tip
Sample syringe (SPP) origin sensor Upper origin sensor
is not off at initiation of syringe
0605 1 movement command. (the syringe is
not at its origin)
SPP Drive unit

0651 2 is off before Aspiration. (at trough Solenoid valve
or ASP position) Upper origin sensor
SPT nozzle is clogged. Clean the SPT nozzle with the

0652 2 SPT nozzle is clogged.
nozzle-cleaning jig.
SPP Drive unit

0653 2 is on before dispensation. (at trough Solenoid valve
or ASP) Upper origin sensor
This indicates that the SPP is not
located appropriately. Visual check the
SPP Drive unit syringe movement.
Sample syringe pump (SPP) origin
SPP Piping section
sensor is on at initiation of the Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0655 2 Solenoid valve
syringe movement command recovers correctly.
Syringe tip
although the syringe is not at origin.
Upper origin sensor
Sample pipette (SPP) safety sensor support.
is off before initiation of SPP
0656 2 movement command. (from fully SPT Safety sensor
dispensed position)
This indicates that the SPP syringe is

not located appropriately. Visually check
the syringe movement.
Sample pipette (SPP) position
sensor for ASP is on before Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0657 2 initiation of the sample syringe SPTASP Upper sensor recovers correctly.
pump (SPP) movement command.
(from fully dispensed position) If you still have an error, contact our
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-18
Chapter 4 Alarm
Syringe Pump of Water for Sample Pipette (SPPW)

SPPW Drive unit

Sample syringe pump for wash
SPPW Piping section
(SPPW) origin sensor is off at
4501 1 Solenoid valve
initiation of aspiration at origin
Syringe tip
point.
Upper origin sensor
SPPW Drive unit

SPPW Piping section
Solenoid valve
(SPPW) origin sensor is on although
4502 1 Syringe tip
the syringe position has left origin.
Upper origin sensor
(at initialization)

(SPPW) origin sensor is on before
4503 1 initiation of the syringe pump
movement command. (from fully
dispensed position)
This indicates that the SPPW syringe is
SPPW Drive unit not located appropriately. Visually check
Sample syringe pump for wash SPPW Piping section the syringe movement.
(SPPW) origin sensor is still off Solenoid valve
4504 1
although the syringe has returned to Syringe tip Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
origin. (at initialization) Upper origin sensor recovers correctly.

At the initiation of movement the customer service section for technical
sample syringe for wash (SPPW) support.
4505 1
origin sensor is not off although the
syringe position is not at origin.
Sample syringe for wash (SPPW)

origin sensor is off at initiation of
4551 2
aspiration at origin. (at trough or
RCU)
SPPW Drive unit
SPPW Piping section
Solenoid valve
Sample syringe pump for wash Upper origin sensor
(SPPW) origin sensor is on before
position) (Trough or ASP)
SPPW Drive unit

SPPW Piping section
sample syringe pump for wash
Solenoid valve
4555 2 (SPPW) origin sensor is not off
Syringe tip
although the syringe position is not
Upper origin sensor
at origin.
Sample pipette (SPT) safety sensor

is off before initiation of SPPW Turn off the power, and verify if the
4556 2 SPT Safety sensor
movement command. (from fully SPT can move smoothly (vertical &
dispensed position) rotational movement) within its normal
movable area.
Sample pipette (SPT) position Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it

sensor for ASP is on before recovers correctly.
4557 2 initiation of the sample syringe of SPTASP Upper sensor
water (SPPW) movement command. If you still have an error, contact our
(from fully dispensed position) customer service section for technical
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-19
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.4 Mixer Unit 1 (MIX-1)

IRU safety sensor is off at initiation
0701 of Mixer1 stirring paddle rotation Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1 IRU Rotary drive unit recovers correctly.
command.
(Mixer1 is not above IRU position.)
support.
Mixer1 arm rotation origin sensor is

MIX1R Origin sensor
0702 1 off at initiation of the stirring paddle
MIX1R Rotary drive unit
rotation command.
Mixer1 safety sensor is off at

MIX1_TS Sensor
0703 1 initiation of the stirring paddle
rotation command.
Mixer1 up origin sensor is on at

0706 1 initiation of the stirring paddle MIX1U Drive unit
rotation command.

on at initiation of the stirring paddle
rotation command for paddle MIX1R Drive unit
0751 2
washing. Rotation origin sensor
(Mixer1 is not at trough position for
paddle washing.)
MIX1 can move smoothly within its
initiation of the stirring paddle MIX1R Drive unit
0752 2
rotation command for paddle MIX1 Safety sensor
washing.
recovers correctly.

initiation of the stirring paddle MIX1U Drive unit
0753 2 support.
rotation command for paddle Origin sensor MIX1U_Zero
washing.
Mixer 1 up origin sensor is off at MIX1U Drive unit

0801 1
initiation of descent command. Origin sensor
Mixer 1 up origin sensor is still on

0802 1
although mixer 1 has left its origin.
MIX1U Drive unit
Mixer 1 up origin sensor is on at Origin sensor
0803 1 initiation of return to origin
command.
Mixer 1 up origin sensor is still off Mixing stirrer cannot return to its origin
0804 1 although the mixer has returned to due to an external force.
its origin. Origin sensor
Mixing stirrer cannot return to its origin

1 due to an external force.
0805 mixer 1 origin sensor is on although
MIX1U Drive unit
the mixer is not at its origin point.
Origin sensor
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-20
Chapter 4 Alarm
Code Level Message Location of Problem &Cause Action

IRU safety sensor is off at initiation IRU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0806 1
of Mixer1 descent command. IRU Ready position sensor recovers correctly.

support.

MX1R Origin sensor
0807 1 off at initiation of the mixer
MIX1 Rotary drive unit
downward command above IRU.

MIX1_TS Sensor
0808 1 initiation of the mixer downward
command above IRU.
Mixer1 up origin sensor is off at

MX1U Origin sensor
0851 2 initiation of the mixer descent
MX1 Up-down driving mechanism Turn off the power, and verify if the
command.
MX1R Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
0852 2 on at initiation of the mixer
MIX1 Rotary drive unit recovers correctly.
downward command above trough.
MX1U Origin sensor support.
0853 2 initiation of the mixer downward
MX1 Up-down driving mechanism
movement above tough.
At the initiation of movement

MX1U Origin sensor
0854 2 Mixer1 up origin sensor is on
although the mixer is not at origin.

MX1U Origin sensor
0855 2 initiation of return to origin
command.
Mixing Unit 1 Rotary Drive Unit (MIX1R)


MX1U Origin sensor
4601 1 initiation of the mixer movement
MX1 Up-down driving mechanism Turn off the power, and verify if the
command.
MX1R Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4602 1 still off although the mixer has
MX1U Origin sensor support.
4651 2 initiation of the mixer movement
command.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-21
Chapter 4 Alarm

IRU safety sensor is off at initiation
of Mixer2 stirring paddle rotation
0901 1 IRU Rotary drive unit it recovers correctly.
command.
(Mixer2 is not above IRU position.)
support.
Mixer2 rotation origin sensor is off

MIX1R Origin sensor
0902 1 at initiation of the stirring paddle
rotation command.

MIX1_TS Sensor
0903 1 initiation of the stirring paddle
rotation command.
Mixer2 origin sensor is on at

MIX2 Drive unit
0906 1 initiation of stirring paddle rotation
Origin sensor
command.
Mixer2 arm rotation origin sensor

is on at initiation of the stirring
paddle rotation command for MIX2 Drive unit
0951 2
paddle washing. Rotation origin sensor
(Mixer2 is not at trough position
for paddle washing.)
Mixer2 safety sensor is off at Turn off the power, and verify if the
initiation of the stirring paddle MIX2R Drive unit MIX2 can move smoothly within its
0952 2
rotation command for paddle MIX2 Safety sensor normal movable area.
washing.
initiation of the stirring paddle MIX2U Drive unit If you still have an error, contact our
0953 2
rotation command for paddle Origin sensor customer service section for technical
washing. support.
Mixer2 up origin sensor is off at MIX2 Drive unit

1001 1
initiation of descent command. Origin sensor
Mixer2 up origin sensor is still on

1002 1
although mixer has left its origin. Mixing stirrer cannot return to its origin
due to an external force.
Mixer2 up origin sensor is on at MIX2 Drive unit

1003 1 initiation of return to origin Origin sensor
command.

Mixer 2 up origin sensor is still off
1004 1 although the mixer has returned to
Origin sensor
its origin.
1005 1 Mixer2 origin sensor is on although
MIX2 Drive unit
the mixer is not at its origin point.
Origin sensor
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-22
Chapter 4 Alarm

IRU safety sensor is off at initiation IRU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1006 1
of Mixer2 descent command. IRU Ready position sensor recovers correctly.

support.
Mixer2 arm rotation origin sensor is Turn off the power, and verify if the
MIX2R Origin sensor
1007 1 off at initiation of the mixer MIX2 can move smoothly within its
downward command above IRU. normal movable area.

recovers correctly.
MIX2_TS Sensor
1008 1 initiation of the mixer downward If you still have an error, contact our
command above IRU. customer service section for technical
support.

1051 2 MX2U Origin sensor
initiation of the mixer descent
MIX2 Up-down driving mechanism
command.
Mixer 2 arm rotation origin sensor

1052 2 MIX2R Origin sensor
is on at initiation of the mixer
MIX2 Rotary drive unit Turn off the power, and verify if the
downward command above tough.
1053 2 MX2U Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
initiation of the mixer downward
MIX2 Up-down driving mechanism recovers correctly.
command above tough.
1054 2 MX2U Origin sensor support.
Mixer2 up origin sensor is on
although the mixer is not at origin.

1055 2 MX2U Origin sensor
initiation of return to origin
command.
Mixing Stirrer Unit 1 Rotary Drive unit (MIX2R)


MIX2U Origin sensor
MIX2 Up-down driving mechanism Turn off the power, and verify if the
command.
MIX2R Origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
4702 1 still off although the mixer has
MIX2U Origin sensor support.
command.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-23
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.6 Wash Unit (WU)

Wash unit origin sensor is off at WU Drive unit
1101 1
initiation of descent command. Upper origin sensor
Wash unit origin sensor is still on WU position is beyond the upper limit. WU can move vertically and smoothly
1102 1 although the wash unit has left its WU Drive unit within its normal movable area. (Remove
origin. Upper origin sensor the WU cover behind the SPT.)
Wash unit origin sensor is on at WU position is beyond the upper limit.
1103 1 initiation of wash unit return to WU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
origin command. Upper origin sensor recovers correctly.
Wash unit origin sensor is still off
WU Drive unit
1104 1 although the wash unit has returned If you still have an error, contact our
Upper origin sensor
to its origin. customer service section for technical
WU ascend/descend at off-origin; support.
WU Drive unit
1105 1 WU origin sensor (WU_ZERO)
Upper origin sensor
should be off before action but not.
IRU safety sensor is off at WU
1106 1 IRU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
movement command.
recovers correctly. If you still have an
error, contact our customer service section
for technical support.
WPP aspiration; WPP origin sensor

WPP Drive unit
1201 1 (WPP_ZERO) is off before
Upper origin sensor This indicates that the WPP syringe is
aspiration.
not located appropriately.
Wash pump syringe origin sensor is
WPP Drive unit
1202 1 still on although the wash pump has
Upper origin sensor Visually check the syringe movement.
left its origin.
Wash pump syringe origin sensor is
recovers correctly.
on before initiation of wash pump WPP Drive unit
1203 1
movement command. (from fully Upper origin sensor
dispensed position)
Wash pump syringe origin sensor is support.
WPP Drive unit
1204 1 off although the unit has returned to
Upper origin sensor
its origin.
This indicates that the WPP syringe is
not located appropriately. Visually check
WPP aspiration/dispensation at
off-origin; WPP origin sensor WPP Drive unit
1205 1 recovers correctly.
(WPP_ZERO) is not off before Upper origin sensor
movement.
support.
Wipe the WU1 nozzle with alcohol.

Make sure that the inline filter is not
clogged and/or damaged.
WU1 has detected excess water in a Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
Inline filter for the WU1 wastewater line.
1206 1 cuvette. (WU1_EKIMEN=1) recovers correctly.
WU1 Wastewater line pump
(During Prime)
support.

WU2 has detected excess water in a Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
Inline filter for the WU2 wastewater line.
1207 1 cuvette. (WU2_EKIMEN=1) recovers correctly.
WU2 Wastewater line pump
(During Prime)
support
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-24
Chapter 4 Alarm

WU3 has detected excess water in a
Inline filter for the WU3 wastewater line. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1208 1 cuvette. (WU3_EKIMEN=1)
WU3 Wastewater line pump recovers correctly.
(During Prime)
support
(During Prime)
support
(During Prime)
support
(During Prime)
support.
(During Prime)
support.
IRU safety sensor is off at WU Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it

1213 1 IRU Drive unit
movement command. recovers correctly.

support.
WU can move vertically and smoothly
within its normal movable area. (Remove
the WU cover behind the SPT)
WU Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1214 1 WU, the origin sensor is on
Upper origin sensor recovers correctly.
although the WU is not at origin.
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-25
Chapter 4 Alarm

Wash syringe pump (WPP) origin
WPP Drive unit This indicates that the WPP syringe is
1251 1 sensor is off at initiation of
Upper origin sensor not located appropriately. Visually check
aspiration at origin.
Wash syringe pump (WPP) origin
sensor is on before initiation of WPP Drive unit
wash pump movement command. Upper origin sensor
recovers correctly.
wash pump syringe (WPP), the WPP Drive unit
1255 1 customer service section for technical
origin sensor is not off although Upper origin sensor
support.
WPP is not at origin.
WU1 has detected excess water in a Inline filter used for the WU1 wastewater
1256 1 cuvette. (WU1_EKIMEN=1) line.
recovers correctly.
(During run) WU1 Wastewater line pump
support.
recovers correctly.
support.
recovers correctly.
support.
recovers correctly.
support.
recovers correctly.
support.
WU6 has detected excess water in a Inline filter used for the WU6 wastewater Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1261 2 cuvette. (WU6_EKIMEN=1) line. recovers correctly.
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-26
Chapter 4 Alarm

recovers correctly.
support.

IRU safety sensor is off at the wash Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1263 2 IRU Drive unit
unit (WU) movement command. recovers correctly.

support.

WU can move vertically and smoothly
within its normal movable area. (Remove
the WU cover behind the SPT)
At the initiation of movement of
wash unit (WU), the origin sensor is WU Drive unit
not off although the WU is not at Upper origin sensor
recovers correctly.
origin.
support.

cuvette. (WU1_EKIMEN sensor WU1 Wastewater pump
1276 3
=1) (During run) Inline filter

1277 3

1278 3
Waste pump may be damaged or the
filter is clogged. Contact customer service
section for technical support.
1279 3
Since the cuvette issued alarm is
omitted from the measurement, analytic
operation continues.
1280 3

1281 3

1282 3
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-27
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.7 Incubation Reaction Unit (IRU)
Code Level Message Location of Problem &Cause Action

IRU origin sensor is on although the IRU Drive unit
1301 1
IRU has left origin. Origin sensor Waste pump may be damaged or the
filter is clogged. Contact customer service
IRU origin sensor is still on Rotary encoder
1302 1 section for technical support.
although the IRU has left its origin. IRU Drive unit
ACK signal cannot be received after
1303 1 IRU origin search command has
been given to DTR control CPU.
Cannot electrically communicate with
the sub CPU.
1304 1 IRU rotation stop instruction has Communication with the DTR control
been given to DTR control CPU. CPU
Contact our customer service section
request command for number of
1305 1
pulses has been given to DTR
control CPU.
IRU can be rotated smoothly with hands.
IRU origin sensor is on after Rotary encoder Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
1306 1
origin-centered process. IRU Drive unit recovers correctly. If you still have an
Cannot electrically communicate with

Number of drive pulses cannot be
Communication with the DTR control the sub CPU. Contact our customer
1307 1 received from DTR control CPU
CPU service section for technical support.
after origin-centered process.
This indicates that the SPT is located
above the IRU during the IRU rotation.

SPT can move smoothly within its normal
Sample pipette (SPT) rotation origin
SPT Origin sensor movable area.
1308 1 sensor is on at initiation of IRU
SPTR Drive unit
rotation command.
recovers correctly. If you still have an
This indicates that the RPT1 is located


RPT can move smoothly within its normal
movable area.
RPT1 Origin sensor
1309 1 origin sensor is on at initiation of
RPTR Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
IRU rotation command.
recovers correctly.

support.


RPT can move smoothly within its normal
movable area.
RPT2 Origin sensor
1310 1 origin sensor is on at initiation of
RPT2R Drive unit Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
IRU rotation command.
recovers correctly.

support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-28
Chapter 4 Alarm
This indicates that the MIX1 is located


MIX can move smoothly within its
Mixer1 rotation origin sensor is on normal movable area.
MIX1R Origin sensor
1311 1 at initiation of IRU rotation
MIX1R Drive unit
command. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.

support.
This indicates that the MIX2 is located


MIX can move smoothly within its
Mixer2 rotation origin sensor is on normal movable area.
MIX2R Origin sensor
1312 1 at initiation of IRU rotation
MIX2R Drive unit
command. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.

support.
This indicates that the WU is located


WU can move smoothly within its normal
movable area.
Wash unit origin sensor is off at WU Drive unit
1313 1
initiation of IRU command. WU Origin sensor
recovers correctly.

support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-29
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.8 Reagent Container Unit (RCU)

RCU sensor is on although the RCU RCU Origin sensor
1402 1
has left its origin. RCU Drive unit Turn off the power, and verify if the
RCU can be rotated smoothly with hands.
RPT nozzle cannot return to its origin due
RCU origin sensor is on at initiation recovers correctly.
1404 1 to an external force.
of return to origin command. If you still have an error, contact our
RPT Upper origin sensor
support.

above the RCU during the RCU rotation.
Verify if the RPT can move smoothly
Reagent pipette (RPT1) up origin RPT1 nozzle cannot return to its origin (vertical and rotational movement) within
1406 1 sensor is off at initiation of RCU due to an external force. its normal movable area.
rotation command. RPT1 Upper origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.
support.

above the RCU during the RCU rotation.
Verify if the RPT can move smoothly
Reagent pipette (RPT2) up origin RPT2 nozzle cannot return to its origin (vertical and rotational movement) within
1407 1 sensor is not on at initiation of RCU due to an external force. its normal movable area.
rotation command. RPT2 Upper origin sensor Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
recovers correctly.
support.
This indicates that the RCU failed to

rotate appropriately. Turn off the power,
and then verify if the RCU can be rotated
RCU origin sensor is still off RCU cannot return to its origin due to an smoothly with hands.
1454 1 although the RCU has returned to its external force. Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
origin. RCU Origin sensor recovers correctly.
support.
4.3.9 Detector Unit (DTR)

Program number cannot be received
1501 1
from DTR control CPU.
There is no response to transmission
of photometric position
1502 1
compensation from DTR control
CPU.
There is no response to rotary
1503 1 photometric command from DTR
control CPU. Cannot electrically communicate with
Communication with the DTR control
There is no response to inquiry the sub CPU.
CPU
1504 1 command for photometric data from
DTR control CPU. Contact our customer service section
Photometric data is not sent from for technical support.
1505 1
DTR control CPU.
There is an anomaly in reception of
1506 1 photometric data from DTR control
CPU.
There is an anomaly in transmission
1507 1
of offset voltage.
Negative absorbance occurs.
1508 1 Halogen lamp (light intensity shortage)
Automatic gain is requested.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.8 Reagent Container Unit (RCU)/ 4.3.9 Detector Unit (DTR)
4-30
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.10 Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)

movable area.
sensor is on at initiation of ASP SPTU Origin sensor
rotation command with SPT being SPT Up-down driving mechanism
recovers correctly.
above ASP.
support.
ASP rotation origin sensor is on ASP Origin sensor Turn off the power, and verify if the
1602 1
although the ASP has left its origin. ASP Rotary drive unit ASP can be rotated smoothly with hands.

recovers correctly.
ASP rotation origin sensor is off
ASP Origin sensor
1604 1 although the ASP has returned to its If you still have an error, contact our
ASP Rotary drive unit
origin. customer service section for technical
support.

SPTU Origin sensor
1605 1 sensor is off at initiation of ASP
SPT Up-down driving mechanism Turn off the power, and verify if the
rotation command.
movable area.
1606 1 sensor is not on at initiation of ASP
rotation command. SPT nozzle position is beyond the lower
recovers correctly.
limit.
SPT nozzle cannot return to its origin due
Sample pipette (SPT) up origin to an external force.
sensor is off at initiation of ASP SPT Upper origin sensor
1651 2 support.
rotation command with SPT being
above ASP.

ASP can be rotated smoothly with hands.
ASP rotation origin sensor is off Reinitialize the analyzer, and check if it
ASP Origin sensor
1654 2 although the ASP has returned to recovers correctly.
ASP Rotary drive unit
origin.
support.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-31
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.11 Ion Selectable Electrode Unit (ISE)
There is an anomaly in response to

1775 3 Cannot electrically communicate with
Serum Sample inquiry.
the ISE.

There is an anomaly in response to ISE
1776 3 for technical support.
Urine Sample inquiry. ISE Communication cable
ISE result measurement data is not Refer to the “error flag” added to the
1777 3
available. ISE measurement results.
ISE
No acknowledge from ISE module Check the possibility of disconnection
1780 3 ISE Communication cable
for "Electrode Exchange" command. or faulty contact of the communication
cable.
ISE
No acknowledge from ISE module
for "Prime" command. If you still have an error, contact our
ISE
No acknowledge from ISE module support.
for "Cleaning" command.
Failed to detect the liquid level of the
SPT special cleaning solution.
Failed to detect cleaning solution for Cleaning solution shortage
1790 3
S.P.T (S) Liquid level sensor Set the specified cleaning solution in
place.

RPT special cleaning solution.
1791 3
R.P.T (S) Liquid level sensor Set the specified cleaning solution in
place.

ISE cleaning solution.
Failed to detect ISE cleaning Cleaning solution shortage
1792 3
solution Liquid level sensor Set the specified cleaning solution in
place.
Failed to detect ISE Calibrant-B liquid

level.
Calibrant-B shortage
1793 3 Failed to detect Calibrant-B for ISE
Liquid level sensor
Set the ISE Calibrant-B in place.
Failed to detect cleaning solution for

the SPT nozzle.
1875 3
S.P.T (S) Liquid level sensor
Set the cleaning solution in place.

the RPT nozzle.
1876 3
R.P.T1 (S) Liquid level sensor

the RPT nozzle.
1877 3
R.P.T2 (S) Liquid level sensor

Cuvette Water Placement (detergent).
1878 3
Cuvette Water Placement. Liquid level sensor
4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.11 Ion Selectable Electrode Unit (ISE)
4-32
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.12 Tank
Fill the purified water tank with

Purified water shortage
2605 1 Purified water supply is low. purified water, and then execute the
Sensor
prime.
Wash solution 1 shortage Fill the wash tank 1 with the liquid and
2606 1 Wash solution 1 is low.
Sensor then execute the prime.
Sensor then execute the prime.
Waste tank for low-concentrated Drain the (low-concentrated)

2608 1 Waste tank 1 is full to capacity.
wastewater is full. wastewater in the waste tank.
Waste tank for high-concentrated Drain the (high-concentrated)

Purified water shortage Fill the purified water tank with

2655 3 Purified water supply is low.
Sensor purified water, and then execute prime.
Fill the wash tank 1 with the liquid and

2656 3 Wash solution 1 is low. Wash solution 1 shortage
then execute prime.
Fill the wash tank 2 with the liquid and

2657 3 Wash solution 2 is low. Wash solution 2 shortage
then execute prime.


Purified water shortage Fill the purified water tank with

2675 3 Purified water supply is low.
Sensor purified water, and then execute prime.
Sensor then execute prime.
Sensor then execute prime.


4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.12 Tank
4-33
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.13 Sensor Status

ASP Lid is not closed properly.
2701 1 ASP lid is open. Make sure to set the ASP Lid.
ASP Lid sensor
RCU Lid is not closed properly.
2702 1 RCU lid is open. Make sure to set the RCU Lid.
RCU Lid sensor.
ISE Maintenance lid is not closed properly.
2703 1 ISE maintenance lid is open. Make sure to set the ISE Lid.
ISE Maintenance lid sensor
(ASP) Sample insertion lid is not closed properly. Make sure to set the ASP sample
2704 1 ASP sample insertion lid is open.
(ASP) Sample insertion lid sensor insertion lid.
Cannot drain water.
Trough piping section
2720 1 Trough chamber overflows. External piping section
Check if the drain line at the right
Trough overflow sensor
side of the analyzer is clogged or not.
The sub-tank has not been set on
Sub-tank L has not been set.
2731 1 Sub-tank L is not existent. the left side of the analyzer. Make sure
Sensor
to set the sub-tank.
Sub-tank R has not been set.
2732 1 Sub-tank R is not existent. the right side of the analyzer. Make
Sensor
sure to set the sub-tank.
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank
L does not give OFF signal after
2733 1
a lapse of given time.
Full capacity sensor of the sub-bank
Sensor is abnormal. Contact our customer
service section for technical support.
R does not give OFF signal after
2734 1

L does not give ON signal after
2735 1
feed water of given time.
Water supply capacity of the
Water supply pressure is insufficient.
purified water generator is
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank Sensor
insufficient.
R does not give ON signal after
2736 1
2737 1 Sub-tank L sensor is in trouble. Full capacity sensor and/or empty

sensor of the sub-bank are abnormal.
Sensor
2738 1 Sub-tank R sensor is in trouble. Contact our customer service
Sub-tank L has not been set.
2751 2 Sub-tank L is not existent. the left side of the analyzer. Make sure
Sensor
to set the sub-tank.
Sub-tank R has not been set.
2752 2 Sub-tank R is not existent. the right side of the analyzer. Make
Sensor
sure to set the sub-tank.
L does not give OFF signal after
2753 2
Full capacity sensor of the sub-bank
Sensor is abnormal. Contact our customer
service section for technical support.
R does not give OFF signal after
2754 2

L does not give ON signal after
2755 2
Water supply capacity of the
Water supply pressure is insufficient.
purified water generator is
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank Sensor.
insufficient.
R does not give ON signal after
2756 2

Sub-tank L has not been set. the left side of the analyzer. Make sure
2775 3 Sub-tank L is not existent.
Sensor to set the sub-tank.

Sub-tank R has not been set. the right side of the analyzer. Make
2776 3 Sub-tank R is not existent.
Sensor sure to set the sub-tank.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-34
Chapter 4 Alarm

Full capacity sensor of sub-tank L
2777 3 does not give OFF signal after a Sub-tank full capacity sensor is
lapse of given time. abnormal.
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank R Sensor
does not give OFF signal after a Contact our customer service section
2778 3
lapse of given time. for technical support.
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank L

2779 3 does not give ON signal after feed
water of given time.
Water supply pressure is insufficient. Water supply capability of the purified
Full capacity sensor of sub-tank R
Sensor water generator is insufficient.
does not give ON signal after feed
2780 3
water of given time.
Cannot drain water.

Trough piping section
2781 3 Trough chamber overflows. External piping section of the analyzer.
Check if the drain line on the right side
Trough overflow sensor
of the analyzer is clogged.
ASP lid.
Sample addition lid on ASP is While sample addition work is not Check the ASP lid and close the sample
2782 3
opened. preceded, ASP small lid for sample addition addition lid.
is opened in spite of during run.
Water leakage is detected under the

2801 1
middle WPP
2802 1
middle RCU.
2803 1
middle ASP.
2804 1
middle SPP. Contact our customer service section
Water leakage
Water leakage is detected under the for technical support.
2805 1
middle RPP.
2806 1
middle RPP2.
Water leakage is detected at the
2807 1
lower SWU.
Water leakage is detected at SWU2.
2808 1
2851 2
middle WPP
2 Water leakage is detected under the
2852
middle RCU.
2853 2
middle ASP.
2854 2
Water leakage
2855 2
middle RPP.
2856 2
middle RPP2.
2857 2
lower SWU.
2858 2
2875 3
middle WPP.
2876 3
middle RCU.
2877 3
middle ASP.
2878 3
Water leakage
2879 3
middle RPP.
2880 3
middle RPP2.
2881 3
lower SWU.
2882 3
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-35
Chapter 4 Alarm

Fan motor1 for power supply is at
2951 2
rest.
2952 2
rest.
2953 2 Power supply fan
rest.
2954 2
rest.
2955 2
rest.
Fan motor at the bottom of
right-hand side of cabinet is at rest.
Fan motor in the top of right-hand

2957 2
side of cabinet is at rest.
Cabinet fan
Fan motor at the bottom of left-hand
2958 2
Fan motor in the top of left-hand

2959 2
Fan motor 1 for RCU Peltier is at
2960 2
rest.
2961 2
rest.
2962 2
rest. Contact our customer service section
Peltier fan
Fan motor 4 for RCU Peltier is at for technical support.
2963 2
rest.
Fan motor 1 for ASP Peltier is at
2964 2
rest.
2965 2
rest.
2975 2
rest.
2976 2
rest.
Fan motor3 for power supply is at Contact our customer service section
2977 2 Power supply fan
rest. for technical support.
2978 2
rest.
2979 2
rest.
Fan motor at the bottom of
2980 2
right-hand side of cabinet is at rest.
Fan motor in the top of right-hand

2981 2
Cabinet fan
Fan motor at the bottom of left-hand
2982 2
Fan motor in the top of left-hand

2983 2
2984 2
rest.
2985 2
rest.
2986 2
rest.
Fan motor 4 for RCU Peltier is at Peltier fan
rest.
2988 2
rest.
2989 2 rest.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4-36
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3.14 Temperature
IRU Heater 1 During measurement, the temperature

IRU Slip ring in the IRU must be kept within a range of
IRU temperature is less than 35
3051 2
degrees.
IRU_DRV PC board 35 °C to 39°C.
IRU Thermal fuse for Heater 1
Fuse F1 on the IRU_CN2 PC board Observe the temperature monitor
display of “Maintenance” at the standby
time, and contact our customer service
IRU temperature is more than 39 IRU Slip ring
3052 2 section for technical support.
degrees. IRU_DRV PC board
During measurement, the temperature

in the RCU must be kept at 15 °C or
lower.
RCU temperature is more than15 RCU Peltier
3053 2
degrees. RCU Peltier fan Observe the temperature monitor
During measurement, the temperature

in the ASP must be kept at 15 °C or lower.
ASP temperature is more than 15 ASP Peltier
3054 2 Observe the temperature monitor
degrees. ASP Peltier fan
4.3.15 Others
Reagent barcode reader;

5001 1 Wipe the reading window of the
Initialization error.
barcode reader with alcohol.
Connection
BCR main body If you still have an error, contact our
Sample barcode reader;
5002 1 customer service section for technical
Initialization error.
support.

5051 2 Order buffer is full to capacity.
More than 30 contaminated cuvettes are

5052 2 The analyzer is lacking in cuvettes. Cuvette contamination present. Perform cuvette cleaning at the
cuvette cleaning of the “Maintenance”.
Sample barcode could not be read Abnormal character that is out of the Examine the barcode label attached to
5075 3
due to character out of specification. specifications. the sample tube.
4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.14 Temperatur/ 4.3.15 Others
4-37
Chapter 4 Alarm
4.3 Unit Alarm

4.3.14 Temperatur/ 4.3.15 Others
4-38
5.1 Actions to be taken at trouble
If something goes wrong with the analyzer, there are the following measures that the operators should check.
1. The preparation of reagent and the check of the method of storing.

2. The preparation of samples and the check of handling.
3. The check of the operation method of the analyzer.
4. The check of maintenance work.
When it seems that the problem relates to electrical system or the mechanical system, do not perform the
inside check of the analyzer etc. by yourself. Contact our sales representatives (promoter).
5.1.1 Details When You Contact Our Servicing

When you contact our service division about the problem of the measurement results or the equipment,
prepare the following information.
Problem that relates to analysis;

1. Equipment number
2. Method for measurement with the problem
3. Explanation about the problem
4. Manufacturer's serial number and the lot number of the reagent, the standard sample, the quality
control sample that you are using
5. Some results of calibration that were performed recently.
6. Some recent measurement results of the quality control samples
7. The measurement results
Problem about the equipment

1. Equipment number
2. Version number of software used
3. The contents of the alarm that relates to problem and the explanation of problem
4. Information that relates to other equipment or the maintenance
5.1 Action to be taken at trouble

5.1.1 Details When You Contact Our Servicing
5-1
5.2 Abnormality of Power On

When you can not turn on the power, check the situation according to the following procedure.
1. Check that the main switch on a left side of the analyzer is on.
2. Check whether the main fuse of the main analyzer has not been burned out.
3. Check whether the breaker of the electrical system with which the analyzer is connected has not been
thrown.
<Check method of the main fuse>

∙ Be sure to turn off the main power switch of the main analyzer.
∙ Unplug the power cable from the cable entry point of the main analyzer.
∙ Pull out the fuse holder as shown in the figure below (two places).
∙ Replace the fuse pulled out with the new fuse included in the auxiliaries.
∙ Return the new fuse according to the reverse procedure to detaching the old fuse.
∙ Place the power cable in the cable entry point of the main analyzer.
∙ Turn on the main power switch of the main analyzer, and make sure that the main analyzer is powered.
The main fuse can be checked by the above-mentioned work.
5.2 Abnormality of Power On
5-2
5.3 Abnormality of Measurement Results

The error concerning the analysis can be found by the error flag or by the unpredictable result having come
out.
In the following the error, the troubleshooting is needed.
1. The error flag of calibration result

2. The error flag of measurement result of the quality control sample or the normal sample
3. The result of the quality control sample measurement is outside the standard value range.
Check that the calibration result or the result of quality control samples or the result of normal samples
applies to which of the following conditions and execute the check that relates to the conditions.
4. The measurement result of a certain method is high about all samples.

5. The measurement result of a certain method is low about all samples.
6. The wrong measurement result comes out at random.
7. Two or more abnormal measurement results
__All method
__No pattern
5.3.1 Preparation Check of Reagent, Standard Sample and QC Sample

To ascertain the cause why measurement result is high or why measurement result is low or why the
variations is caused, first of all, check the following matters and confirm about the reagent or the standard
sample or the quality control sample.
When the reagent, the standard sample, the quality control sample are prepared, be sure to read the appended
description, and follow the instruction matter.
About the reagent preparation

1. Was not the reagent changed?
2. When is the expiration date of the prepared reagent?
3. Was the reagent prepared by the right procedures?
4. Was the reagent prepared with fresh deionized water without bacteria or the appropriate diluent?
About the preparation of the quality control sample

1. The quality control sample was prepared by right amount to prepare it.
2. The quality control sample had been stored by the recommended storing method.
3. When is the expiration date of the quality control sample before the quality control sample was
prepared?
4. Did you prepare the quality control sample by using the pipette whose capacity had been corrected?
5. Is the lot of the quality control sample within the expiration date?
6. Did you prepare by using proper diluent?
About the preparation of the standard sample

1. Was not the lot number changed?
2. Did you prepare standard sample by right amount to prepare it.
3. The standard sample had been stored by the recommended preservation method.
4. When is the expiration date of the standard sample since the standard sample was prepared?
5. Did you prepare the standard sample by using the pipette whose capacity had been corrected?
6. When is the expiration date of the lot of the standard sample?
7. Did you prepare by using proper diluent?

5.3.1 Preparation Check of Reagent, Standard Sample and QC Sample
5-3
5.3.2 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Higher for All Samples
Factor Action
The calibration result is not correct. Check the preparation of the standard sample.
Check whether the calibration setting is appropriate.
If necessary, perform the calibration again.
Incubation temperature is too high. Check the temperature displayed on "active monitor "
screen.
Contact our service division when the temperature is
outside 37±0.3°C.
The reagent has not been appropriately Check the preparation of the reagent.
prepared.
The standard sample has not been Check the preparation of the standard sample.
appropriately prepared.
5.3.3 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Lower for All Samples
Factor Action
The expiration date of the reagent has Refer to instruction in the kit about stability of the
passed. prepared reagent.
The reagent has not been appropriately Check the preparation of the reagent.
prepared.
The reagent has not been appropriately Refer to instruction in the kit about appropriate storing
stored. method.
Incubation temperature is too low. Check the temperature displayed on "active monitor "
screen.
outside 37±0.3°C.
The standard sample has not been Check the preparation of the standard sample.
appropriately prepared.
The amount of reagent to dispense is too Check the liquid leakage and the fluid dripping at the
much. junction of the reagent dispensing system
5.3.4 Wrong Measurement Results Come Out at Random

Factor Action
SPT or RPT are dirty. Perform Nozzle Washing by [Mainte(F10)]-[Sequence]
(on the screen) and make sure that wash water of Nozzle
has been discharged enough at the trough.
Fibrins are generated in the specific Clean the SPT nozzle. Remove fibrins in samples
sample tube or the sample cups.
Water supply and liquid supply from the Make sure that the tube for water supply and liquid
external tanks are insufficient. supply of each external tank has been correctly inserted
below the liquid level. If there are problems, contact our
service division.
The stir is insufficient. Check that the stirrer rotates at the correct speed at the
center of the cuvette Make sure that the abnormal noise is
not generated because the stirrer hits the cuvette and make
sure that the stirrer rotates.

5.3.2 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Higher for All Samples /
5.3.3 When Measurement Results of a Certain Method are Lower for All Samples /
5.3.4 When Measurement Results Come Out at Random
5-4
5.3.5 Measurement Results of One Sample Show Abnormal Value for All Methods
Factor Action
The reagent has not been appropriately Refer to the instruction for use in the kit and prepare a
prepared. new reagent.
The reagent expiration date of the Refer to the instruction for use in the kit and prepare a
reagent has passed. The reagent has been new reagent
contaminated The reagent is discolored.
5.3.6 Multiple Abnormal Measurement Results

Factor Action
The leakage has happened in dispensing Check the tube connection of the nozzles and syringes.
system of SPT or RPT.
Incubation temperature is abnormal. Check the temperature displayed on "Run Monitor "
screen.
outside 37±0.3°C.
The stir is insufficient. Check that the stirrer rotates at the correct speed at the
center of the cuvette (the abnormal noise is not generated
because the stirrer hits the cuvette).

5.3.5 Measurement Results of One Sample Show Abnormal Value for All Methods /
5.3.6 Multiple Abnormal Measurement Results
5-5
5.4 Malfunction of Analyzer

About the troubleshooting of the analyzer, do only the range described in this manual. When the problem is
more complex than the range described in this manual, it might be difficult to address it by the user, and so
contact our service division in that case.
5.4.1 Detection of Mechanical Problem

As for all mechanical functions, the control supervision is being done by the computer of the analyzer.
When a mechanical problem occurs in the analyzer, the computer immediately recognizes it and the error
message is displayed to inform that a specific problem occurred.
When the problem influences the performance of the analyzer, Sampling stop or Emergency Stop is
performed. When Sampling stop mode, the analyzer continues the processing of the samples that the trouble
doesn't influence and completes the measurement.
When the problem influences whole sample measurement, Emergency Stop is immediately executed.
5.4.2 Error Messages of Each Unit

Refer to "Chapter 4 Alarm".
5.4 Malfunction of Analyzer

5.4.1 Detection of Mechanical Problem / 5.4.2 Error Messages of Each Unit
5-6
This chapter explains the cleaning procedure of each unit.
6.1 Cleaning and Decontamination
WARNING: Wear medical rubber gloves so that the liquid does not
adhere directly to the skin.
Be sure to turn off the main analyzer before starting the work.
In the case of using ethanol, should not be close to fire or high temperature parts/units, because the
ethanol is flammable liquid.
6.1.1 External Tank

1. Detergent tank (5L)
· Dispose the wash solution and put pure water in the detergent tank and wash it enough. After that, put diluted
solution “Furunoclean C-1” (this cleaning solution should be diluted to 100 times (1% concentration) with pure
water) in the detergent tank and keep this state (for 10 minutes).
· Dispose this diluted solution and put pure water in the tank, and wash it enough before using it.
6.1.2 Piping and Internal Tank

Make sure this 100 times diluted solution (C1 Solution) used in this cleaning procedure should not be mixed with
other detergents (the solution for wash) and understand the following procedures well then execute washing.
A. Cleaning procedure
1. Preparation Preparation :
Tank with Pure Water (approx. 1 L)
Tank with C1 Solution (approx. 2L)
Clean gauze
Syringe (more than 30 mL volume)
1. Connect Wash-1 / 2 tubes to Pure Water

2. Perform Prime
3. Close a valve of the purified water generator and release the pressure in
the tubes.
4. Power OFF the system.
5. Take off maintenance covers.
2. Subtanks
C1 Cleaning 6-8. Take out Subtanks from the analyzer.
9. Take out vinyl tubes and level sensors form Subtanks.
10. Wash Subtanks with C1 Solution.
11. Put C1 Sulution to Subtanks.
12-13. Install vinyl tubes, level sensors and Subtanks to the analyzer.
6-1 Cleaning and Decontamination

6.1.1 External Tank / 6.1.2 Piping and Internal Tank
6-1
14. Connect Wash-1 / 2 tubes to C1 Solution.

15-16. Take off Pure Water Supply Line tube and connect the syringe to
3. Feed Water
the analyzer instead.
. Line 17. Power ON the system.
C1 Cleaning 18-22. Dispense C1 Solution ti the analyzer with the syringe.
23. Perform Prime and Cuvette Water Replacement.
24. Leave the system for 10 minutes.
25-27. Take out the syringe and connect Pure Water Supply Line
tube to the analyzer then open a valve of the purified water
4. Subtanks generator.
. Pure Water 28. Power OFF the system.
Cleaning 29. Take out the Subtanks from the analyzer and wash them with
Pure Water.
30-31. Take out the vinyl tubes, level sensors and filters from
subtanks and wash them with Pure Water.
32-35. Put back the vinyl tubes, level sensors and filters to the
Subtanks and wash them with Pure Water.
36. Install the Subtanks to the analyzer.
37. Connect Wash-1 / 2 tubes to Pure Water from C1 Solution.

38. Power ON the system.
5. Clean Up
39. Perform Cuvette Wash and Prime.
40. Put Wash-1 / 2 tubes to the original Wash Tanks.
41. Perform Cuvette Wash and Prime.
42. Put back maintenance covers.
43. Perform Cuvette Check and Auto Gain.

6-2
B. Detail description of cleaning procedure
B-1. Preparation
1. Tank with Pure Water (approx. 1L)

2. Tank with C1 Solution (approx. 2L)
3. Clean gauze or the like
4. Syringe to dispense C1 Solution to the analyzer (more than 30 mL volume)
B-2. Cleaning
1. Take off Wash-1 / 2 tubes from wash tanks and wipe out water or dirt form the tubes then put them on to the
Tank with Pure Water.
2. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and perform Prime 1 time.
3. Close a valve of purified water generator to stop supply of pure water and release pressure as follows.
Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence].

Click ON “ Sub-Tank R EV ” and “ Sub-Tank L EV ” of Pump Test section and input 5 in Time (Sec)
column. Then click Exec button.
4. Power off the analyzer and PC.

5. Remove Maintenance cover R1 on the right side of the analyzer and Maintenance cover L on the left side of
it.
Screw × 2
Screw × 2
Maintenance
co ver R1
Maintenance co ver L Wash-2 Wash-1 (Sys.Water)
Left side Right side

Figure 6.1.2-1 Figure 6.1.2-2

6-3
B-3. Cleaning Subtanks
6. Remove the connection of connectors (SUB L1,2), (SUB R1,2) of the level sensors. Open the screw lids in
upper part of the Subtank R, L and remove the tubes. (Refer to Figure 6.1.2-3.)
7. Take out the Subtank R, L from the analyzer.
8. Wipe out water and dirt from tubes with gauze and leave the tubes in the analyzer.
Connector (SUB L1, 2)
Level sensor R
(Connector SUB R1,2)
Subtank R
Level sensor L
(Connector SUB L1, 2)
Subtank L
Sub tank R, L
Figure 6.1.2-3
Connector Tube weight

(SUB L1,2) or
(SUB R1,2） Packing
Filter
A
Vinyl tube guide
Loosen Fasten
Level sensor
Tube weight
Subtank L
or Subtank R
Cleaning of Subtank
Figure 6.1.2-4

6-4
9. Open the lids in the upper part of Subtanks and remove the vinyl tubes and the level sensors.
10. Put the C1 Solution in the Subtank R, L and wash inside of them enough.
11. Put the C1 Solution to the High level in the washed Subtank R, L.
12. Install the vinyl tubes and the level sensors of the Subtank R, L and then put the lids on them.
13. Install the Subtank R, L to the analyzer and connect the connectors of the level sensors (SUB L1, 2), (SUB
R1, 2) to them.
14. Take off Wash-1 / 2 tubes from Tank with Pure Water and put them on to the Tank with C1 Solution.
B-4. Cleaning Pure Water Supply Line
15. Take off a tube of Pure Water Supply Line from the analyzer and wipe out water and dirt around the line.
16. Power ON the analyzer and the PC. Select Cancel for preparatory mode (initial start up).
17. Dispense 30 mL of C1 Solution to the syringe and connect the syringe to the analyzer instead of the Pure
Water Supply Line.
18. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and click ON “ Sub-Tank L EV ” of Pump Test section and input
10 in Time (Sec) column.
19. Click Exec button and dispense 30 mL of C1 Solution from the syringe to the analyzer in 10 seconds.
20. Dispense 30 mL of C1 Solution to the syringe again and connect the syringe to the analyzer instead of the
Pure Water Supply Line.
21. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and click ON “ Sub-Tank R EV ” of Pump Test section and input
10 in Time (Sec) column.
22. Click Exec button and dispense 30 mL of C1 Solution from the syringe to the analyzer in 10 seconds.
23. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and perform Prime 2 times then click Cuvette Water Placement button.
24. Leave the analyzer for 10 minutes.

6-5
B-5. Cleaning Subtanks with pure water
25. Remove the syringe connected to Pure Water Supply Line of the analyzer and connect the tube of Pure
Water Supply Line. Make sure that a Hose Clump of the line has been installed securely.
26. Open the valve of the purified water generator.
27. Select [Mainte (F110)] – [Sequence] and click ON “ Sub-Tank R EV ” and “ Sub-Tank EV ” of
Pump Test section.. Then input 1 in Time (Sec) column and click Exec button.
28. Power OFF the analyzer and PC.

29. Take out the Subtank R, L from the analyzer following the procedure of B-3. Cleaning Subtanks and wash
the Subtanks with pure water carefully.
30. Remove the vinyl tubes and the level sensors from the Subtanks and wipe them out with clean gauze
carefully.
31. Rotate the tube weights (A part) to the right and remove the filters and wash it (with brushes etc.) with the
pure water and then put them back together. (Refer to figure 6.1.2-4.)
Tube weight
Connector
(SUB L1,2) or
(SUB R1,2） Packing
Filter
A
Vinyl tube guide
Unfasten
Fasten
Level sensor
Tube weight
Subtank L
or Subtank R
Cleaning of Subtank
Figure 6.1.2-4

6-6
32. Put pure water to the Low level in the Subtank L, R and put the vinyl tube guides and the level sensors in
the Subtank R, L. (Refer to figure 6.1.2-4.)
33. Put the tubes in the Subtank R, L and wash them enough.
34. Open the lids of the Subtank R, L and remove the tubes and the weights and then dispose the pure water.
(Refer to figure 6.1.2-4.)
35. Install the tubes and the weights in the washed Subtank R, L and put the lids on them.
36. Install the Subtank R, L in the analyzer and connect connectors (SUB L1,2) (SUB R1,2) of the level sensors
to them.
B-6. After treatment
37. Take out the tubes of Wash-1 / 2 line placed in the Tank with C1 Solution and wipe out water and dirt from
the tube with gauze then put them in the Tank with Pure Water.
38. Power ON the analyzer and the PC. Select Cancel for preparatory mode (initial start up).
39. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and perform Cuvette Wash and Prime 1 time for each.
40. Take out the tubes of Wash-1 / 2 line placed in the Tank with Pure Water and wipe out water and dirt from
the tube with gauze then put them in the original Wash-1 / 2 tank.
41. Select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and perform Cuvette Wash and Prime 1 time for each.
42. Put the removed maintenance cover R1, L on right and left side of the analyzer back in place.
43. Over 20 minutes from Power ON, select [Mainte (F10)] – [Sequence] and perform Cuvette Chekck then
select [Mainte (F10)] – [Perform] and perform Automatic. Check that the results should be within
specifications.

6-7
C. Frequency of cleaning
Perform cleaning with “Furunoclean C-1” every three months for average use (approx. four hours per day).
CAUTION: Usually the cleaning interval is every three months. If the cleaning interval becomes long,
diatomaceous attachment develops in the tubes. When washing, the filters may be clogged with the
removed attachments and the life of the filters become short. Therefore, do not lengthen the
cleaning interval extremely.
D. Storage of Concentrate Solution “Furunoclean C-1”
The storage life of concentrate solution “Furunoclean C-1” (commercial product) is 24 months. Concentrate solution
can be stored for 24 months as long as the cap is closed tightly even after first opening the cap. Since diluted solution
is not preservable, make fresh diluted solution for every use.
E. Precautions for use of Concentrate Solution “Furunoclean C-1”
The following are chiefly precautions for cleaning of the analyzer. For other general precautions, obey the
instructions given on the label of the “Furunoclean C-1” container.
(1) Use this product after diluting in accordance with the above mentioned instructions.
(2) Make sure to use pure water (ion-exchanged water) to dilute the product. Do not use tap water to dilute it. If you
dilute it with tap water and leave the diluted solution for several days, brown deposits (corroded iron) or white
deposits (calcium chloride) may be generated.
(3) If the product expires (storage life: 24 months), sodium hypochlorite contained in the product is decomposed
and effective chlorine is reduced. Therefore, dispose of an expired product in an appropriate manner. (Before
disposal, neutralize it and dilute it with a large amount of water.)
(4) Do not mix the product with acid material.
(5) Do not make the product contact with zinc plating or metals including iron, ferric oxide, copper, copper alloy,
etc. to prevent corrosion of them.
(6) Before putting the product into another container, completely clean the container by rinsing it with pure water
and completely dry it.

6-8
6.1.3 Pipettes (for RPT1/RPT2/SPT)

WARNING: Be sure to turn off the main analyzer before starting the work.
Wear medical rubber gloves so that the liquid does not adhere
directly to the skin.
(1) Moisten gauze with ethanol.
(2) Lift up the nozzle assembly by hand.
(3) Wipe the whole pipette with the moistened gauze. Wipe the pipette from the upper part of it to the
direction of the point of it, as shown in Figure 6.1-3-1.
WARNING: When wiping the nozzle, do not apply extra force to it. It is very important that the nozzle is
vertically set so that the analyzer can function correctly. Improper alignment can cause the
damages of the pipette and / or incorrect analysis results.
Pipette Nozzle
Direction of insert
SPT/RPT
Nozzle
Cleaning Jig Cleaning Pointer
Cleaning of Pipette
Figure 6.1.3-1
(4) Insert the cleaning pointer of the SPT / RPT nozzle cleaning jig into the point of the nozzle in order to
clean the inside of the nozzle. (Refer to Figure 6.1-3-1.)
Note that the cleaning pointer for SPT is thinner than the pointer for RPT.
(5) Wipe SPT / RPT1 / RPT2 with gauze or paper towel moistened with neutral detergent.
(6) After cleaning the inside of the nozzle, clean the nozzle with pure water according to the following
procedure.
By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Sequence] screen.
And click ON of SPT, RPT1 or RPT2 on Wash section and click 1Exec1 button to start washing.
6-1 Cleaning
6.1.3 Pipettes (for RPT1/RPT2/SPT)
6-9
6.1.4 WU Nozzles
Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent direct contact with
nozzles or liquid.
(1) Hold up the knob of the WU unit (direction of the arrow).
WU
Cover
Knob
WU nozzle
WU UNIT
Figure 6.1.4-1
(2) Wipe the nozzles (six supply nozzles and seven drain nozzles) using gauze moistened with ethanol.
Make sure not to bend the nozzles.
(3) Wipe the WU cover with gauze or paper towel moistened with neutral detergent.
6.1.5 Stirrers (for MIX1/MIX2)
nozzles or liquid.
There are two stirrers.

The MIX1 stirrer is located at the right rear of the SPT and the MIX2 stirrer is located at the right rear of the
RPT2.
(1) Moisten gauze with ethanol.
(2) Lift up the stirrer by holding its arm cover.
(3) Wipe the whole stirrer with the gauze moistened with ethanol. Be careful not to bend the paddle.
(4) Wipe the cover of MIX1 / MIX2 with gauze or paper towel moistened with neutral detergent.
6-1 Cleaning
6.1.4 WU Nozzles / 6.1.5 Stirrers (for MIX1/MIX2)
6-10

Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent direct contact
with nozzles or liquid.
(1) Make sure that the SPT nozzle is not above or in the Auto Sampler Unit (ASP). If it is, remove it by hand.
(2) Take out the ASP tray (inner circumference, outer circumference).
(3) Wipe the frame of the barcode reader window (without glass) with gauze moistened with ethanol.
Barcode reader window
Barcode reader
Auto Sampler Unit

Figure 6.1.6-1
(4) Wipe the inner surface of the Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) with gauze or paper towel as illustrated above.
Make sure that water drops are wiped off completely.
(5) Install the ASP tray (inner circumference, outer circumference) and the lid as before.
6-1 Cleaning
6-11

(1) Make sure that the RPT nozzle is not in the Reagent Container Unit (RCU). If it is, remove the nozzle by
hand.
(2) Take out the RCU tray.
(3) Wipe the barcode reader window with gauze moistened with ethanol or glass cleaner. Then, be careful not
to damage the window surface.
Barcode reader window

Barcode reader
Reagent Container Unit

Figure 6.1.7-1
(4) Wipe the inner surface of the Reagent Container Unit (RCU) with gauze or paper towel as illustrated
above. Make sure that water drops are wiped off completely.
(5) Install the RCU tray and the lid as before.
6-1 Cleaning
6-12
6.1.8 Worktable
(1) Wipe the surface of the mosaic plates with gauze or paper towel moistened with neutral detergent.
Mosaic plates
Mo saic Plates
Figure 6.1.8-1
6-1 Cleaning
6.1.8 Worktable
6-13
6.2 Part Replacement

As part replacement procedures, only dismounting procedures are explained here. Mounting procedures are
omitted because they are simply the reverse of the dismounting procedures. Exceptionally, mounting
procedures or remarks are given in cases where adjustment or special care is required.
The following items are required for Part Replacement.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND MATERIALS
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Liquid Gasket (1212) Required for WU wipe tip replacement.
Silicon Grease Required for syringe tip.
(KF-96H-50000CS)
Jig: (accessories) Syringe tip insertion jig
Screwdriver: (accessories) Required types:
+ Screwdrivers No.1 and No.2
Hex Wrench: (accessories) Required sizes:
1.5 mm (for PT Nozzle), 3 mm (for syringe)
Spanner Required sizes (for PT Nozzle):
5.5 mm
CAUTION: Contact the suppliers about the details regarding Liquid Gasket (1212), and Silicon Grease
(KF-96H-50000CS)
6 2 Part Replacement
6-14
6.2.1 Syringe Tips (for SPP/RPP/WPP)
This section explains syringe plunger tip replacement procedures which can apply to all the syringe pumps
used in the analyzer. Replace syringe tips at the provided cycle according to the following procedures.
Procedure
(1) Turn "OFF" the analyzer and Operational PC
(2) Open the maintenance covers on the sides. (Refer to Figure 6.2.1-1 and Figure 6.2.1-4.)
WPP1 - WPP6
SPP (Wash)
Maintenance cover R2
Screw × 1
Screw × 2
SPP (Sample)
Maintenance co ver R1
Right side Maintenance cover (R1,R2) WPP, SPP Syringe p ump s placement
Screw × 2
RPP1W
RPP2W
RPP1R
RPP2R Maintenance co ver L
RPP Syr inge p ump s placement Left side Maintenance co ver L

6-15
(3) Remove the plunger block by removing one screw (M4×22).
(4) Pull down the plunger and remove it.
Plunger Block
Screw
(M4×22 with Hex socket head)
Plunger
Removing plunger
Figure 6.2.1-5
(5) As shown by the Figure below, remove the syringe tip by using pliers (long-nose pliers).
Syringe Tip
Removing syringe tip

Figure 6.2.1-6
6-16
(6) Insert a new syringe tip in the hole on the syringe tip insert jig.
Gaskets will be replaced at the same time for Type TEF050 and TEF 250 and need to be installed to a
plunger beforehand.
gasket
TYPE T-0510 TEF050 TEF250
NAME (S1.4) (3.26) (7.29)
SPPS
SPPW
RPP1R
plunger
RPP1W
RPP2R
RPP2W
WPP(1-6)
Syringe tip Table Syringe tip Table

(7) Hold the plunger vertically by hand, and insert it vertically into the hole of the syringe tip.
(8) Apply silicone grease (Shin-Etsu Silicones, KF-96H-50,000cs) to the plunger with the attached tip, then
insert this plunger into the syringe and slowly push it upward.
Plunger Plunger Syringe Tip

tip
Grease Application Range
Syringe Tip Insert Jig
Inserting syringe tip by Jig Grease Applicatio n Range

(9) Install the plunger to the syringe pump by the reverse procedure to Procedure (1) and (2).
(10) Turn on Operational PC and the main analyzer.
(11) Lastly, by the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Work Hour] screen,
and to clear the used hours of RPP(1, 2), RPP(1W, 2W) , SPP, SPPW , WPP (1-6) that correspond to the
exchanged syringes on Microsyringe Tip section, click RESET button.
6-17
6.2.2 Wipe Tip (in WU)

Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent the contaminant from
infiltrating.
Procedure
(1) Hold up the knob of the WU unit. (Refer to Figure 6.1.4-1.)
(2) While holding the wipe nozzle by fingers, pull out the wipe tip downward.
(3) Apply liquid gasket to all circumferences of the wipe nozzle so that applied liquid gasket width becomes
2 to 3 mm and the applied area is in the range of 5 to 10 mm from the tip of the wipe nozzle. (Refer to
Figure 6.2.2-1.)
(4) Insert a new wipe tip into the wipe nozzle until it hits the bottom.
Wipe
Liquid Gasket Application Range
Nozzle
2- 3m m
10m m
5mm
Wipe Tip
Ap p ling Liq uid Gasket and Mo unting wip e tip

Figure 6.2.2-1

By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Sequence] screen,
and click Initialization button.
(6) Hold the knob of the WU unit and lower it below. Put the wipe nozzle in the cuvette (IRU) and adjusts it
while rotating the wipe tip so that the interspaces between the cuvette and the wipe tip ((A , A”) , (B ,
B”)) becomes even. (Refer to Figure 6.2.2-2.)
Wipe Nozzle
(Wipe Tip)
Ｂ
A
A"
B"
Cuvette
Ad j usting Wipe T ip
Figure 6.2.2-2
6-18
(7) When you normally install the wipe tip, the length between the lowest end of the wipe base and the top
end of the wipe tip is 69.1±0.2mm. (Refer to Reference figure 6.2.2-3 “Wipe Nozzle Dimension”.)
Wipe Base
Wipe Nozzle
69.1 ±0.2mm
Wipe Tip
Wipe Nozzle Dimension

Reference Figure 6.2.2-3
6-19
6.2.3 Pipette (for SPT/RPT)
Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent the contaminant from
infiltrating
The replacement procedures of SPT and procedures of RPT are common. Replace them according to the
following procedures.
Procedure
(1) Turn "OFF" the analyzer and Operational PC.
(2) Remove the SPT / RPT arm cover. (The arm cover has tabs on its internal surface and these tabs fix the
cover to the SPT/RPT arm base.)
(3) Remove the connector (J2).
PT Arm Cover
Connector (J2)
SPT/RPT Arm Base
Removing PT arm cover

Figure 6.2.3-1
(4) While holding the nozzle side (on the joint S/R side) by using spanner (5.5 mm), turn the PT Nozzle
joint (the tube side) by hand to remove the joint S/R. Use tissue paper, etc. to prevent drops of liquid
from falling out of the removed tube and the removed nozzle.
PT Nozzle joint
Spanner
(5.5mm)
Tube
CAUTION: Do not turn the Spanner.
Joint S/R
(Nozzle side)
Removing Joint S/R

Figure 6.2.3-2
6-20
(5) Loosen the screw (M3×5 with hex socket head, lower one), which fixes the nozzle. Lift up the nozzle
and remove it.
Connector (J2)
CAUTION: Do not turn this screw

with hex socket head.
Nozzle assembly
(SPT, RPT)
CLOSEUP
Hex Wrench
(1.5mm)
PT Arm Base
Removing S/R nozzle assembly

Figure 6.2.2-3
6-21
(6) Install new pipette nozzle. Do the assembling work in the reverse way of the Procedure (3) to Procedure
(5).
(7) Confirm the installation state of the pipette nozzle.
● Make sure that the pipette nozzle is not bent.
● Make sure that the pipette nozzle is installed parallel to the PT arm base.
● Make sure that the pipette nozzle does not contact with the sensor.
(8) When you normally install the pipette, the length between the lowest end of the pipette nozzle and the
PT arm base is 130.5mm. (Refer to figure 6.2.2-4.)
(9) Have the pipette nozzle by the hand and make sure that it can move smoothly up and down (direction of
the arrow).
Nozzle assembly
(SPT,RPT)
PT Arm Base
130.5m m
Confirm the smooth vertical movement

(direction of the arrow).
Installation confirmation of pipette nozzle

Figure 6.2.2-4
(10) Return the pipette arm to the trough position by holding it up.
6-22
6.2.4 Halogen Lamp

WARNING: The lamp case may be very hot. Before starting halogen lamp
replacement, turn off power and leave it for at least 30
minutes.
CAUTION: When installing a new halogen lamp, do not touch the glass of the halogen lamp by bare
hands.
Grease from hands may cause malfunction.
Procedure
(1) Pick up the Pipette of the reagent or sample, and move it to the place where you work easily.
(2) Remove the DTR cover by removing one screw (M3) and one plastic clip.
DTR
Plastic Clip
Screw (M3)
Mosaic plate for halogen lamp replacement

Figure 6.2.4-1
(3) Remove the lamp case by unplugging the connector of the halogen lamp and removing one screw
(M3×35).
(4) Hold the handle (blue part) and hold up the lamp case.
(5) As shown by the Figure below, slacken two screws (M3×6) that are attached to the halogen lamp and
take out the halogen lamp.
Screw (M3×35)
Screw (M3×6) × 2
Connector
Halogen Lamp
Removing Halogen lamp

Figure 6.2.4-2
6.2.4 Halogen Lamp
6-23
(6) Install a new halogen lamp.

(7) In the reverse way of the installation procedure, install a new halogen lamp, connect the connector plug,
and install the mosaic plate. Return the moved pipette to the trough position.
(9) Lastly, by the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Work Hour] screen
and click RESET button of Halogen Lamp on Work Hour Counters section to clear the used hours.
6.2.4 Halogen Lamp
6-24
6.2.5 Cuvettes (in IRU)

nozzles or liquid.
The condition of cuvettes can be checked according to the following procedure.
By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [W Blank] screen
and check the condition of cuvettes by the cuvette check of Water Blank.
(Refer to Chapter 3 6 1”The result of water blank”.)
Procedure
(1) Pick up the Pipette of the reagent or sample, and move it to the place where you work easily.
(2) Slacken the two screws and remove the Mosaic 3.
Mosaic 3
Screw × 2
Mosaic 3
Figure 6.2.5-1
(3) Rotate IRU (in the direction of arrow A or B) and take out cuvettes to replace.
CAUTION: When you rotate the IRU, make sure that there is not the nozzle and the stirrer in the
cuvette.
Cuvette CAUTION: Replace the cuvette by holding

(Closeup) the upper side of it (refer to
Arrow).
1A1 1B1
IRU
Removing Cuvette
Figure 6.2.5-2
(4) Install the new cuvette. As shown by the above the Figure, replace the cuvette by holding the upper side
of it.
(5) Install the Mosaic plate removed by Procedure (2), and return the moved pipette to the trough position.
6.2.5 Cuvettes (in IRU)
6-25
6.2.6 Mesh Filter

nozzles or liquid.
Procedure
(1) Turn "OFF" the analyzer and Operational PC.
(2) Open the Maintenance cove R1 on the right side of the analyzer. (Refer to Figure of Right side 6.2.6-1.)
Mesh Filter 1-7
Screw × 2
Closeup
Maintenance Co ve R1
Maintenance Cove R1(right side) Remo ving Mesh Filter

(3) Remove the tube connected to the Mesh filter.

CAUTION: Seven Mesh filters in total are used. Replace the Mesh filters one by one to avoid
wrong insertion.
(4) Insert the tube to the bottom of the Mesh filter.

CAUTION: The arrow is drawn in the Mesh filters. Before installing, make sure that the direction
of the arrow is downward.
6.2.6 Mesh Filter (or Inline Filter)
6-26
6.2.7 Air Filter

The side of this main Analyzer has five air filters as shown by the Figure below.
Clean the filters if necessary. When the filters is damaged or is awfully dirty, replace them.
SIDE Panel LU Maintenance Cove R2

Screw × 3 Screw × 1
Detaching order: 1 11Air filter 12
1Air filter 31
11Air filter 51 11Air filter 41 11Air filter 21

Maintenance Cove L SIDE Panel LD Maintenance Cove R1
Screw × 2 Screw × 2 Screw × 2
Detaching order: 2
Air filter placemen on the left side Air filter placemen on the right side
The air filter is fixed with hook and loop fasteners and it can be easily mounted and dismounted by hand.
(Refer to Figure 6.2.7-1 and Figure 6.2.7-2 for the installation place.)
Mo unting/Dismo unting Air filter

Figure 6.2.7-3
6.2.7 Air Filter
6-27
6.2.8 Electrode (in ISE)

WARNING: Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent direct contact with nozzles or liquid.
Procedure
(1) Work on the preparation of electrode exchange according to the following procedures.
(a) By the screen operation, click 1SHUT DOWN1 button in the upper right of the screen of Operational
PC and the pop-up screen is displayed. Click 11Power Off11 button for end.
Click this “SHUT DOWN”

button.
Preparation for Replacing Electrodes

Figure 6.2.8-1
(b) Confirm that the UI screen on Operational PC is closed and ended, and turn OFF the main analyzer.
(2) Remove the Maintenance Cover R1. (Refer to Figure 6.2.7-2 and Figure 6.2.8-2)
inside Maintenance Cover R1

Figure 6.2.8-2
6-28
(3) Depress the compression plate and pull out an electrode while holding the handle of it.
ISE Module
Electrodes
Gasket
Electrode handle
Compression Plate
Replacing Electrodes
Figure 6.2.8-3
CAUTION:
1. Take off Electrodes (Na, K, Cl and Ref) one by one in order easily.
2. Take off a protection tube of a new Ref Electrode.
3. Make sure that no dirt or crystals can be observed on Compression Plate and ISE Module. Wipe out
dirt or crystals if there.
4. Make sure that no dirt or crystals can be observed on Electrodes you are about to install. Wipe out
dirt or crystals if there.
5. Make sure that Gaskets are installed upon Electrodes.
CAUTION: When you open a new electrode package for use and remove a brown tube from a Ref
electrode.
(4) Install Electrodes (Ref, Cl, K and Na) one by one in order securely.
(5) Turn ON the analyzer and PC then perform ISE Prime 5 times. Make sure that solution are pumped
correctly and no leakage can observed. If you find something suspicious, follow procedure form (1)
through (4) again.
(6) Install Maintenance Cover R1.
(7) Perform ISE Calibration and confirm results are within specifications.
6-29
6.2.9 Pump Cassette (for ISE)
Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent direct contact with nozzles or liquid.
Reference: To ensure the proper liquid supply/drain operation of the ISE, it is required to replace pump
cassettes on a regular basis. You can check the used hours according to the following procedure.
By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [W Blank] screen
and check the used hours by Water Blank on the screen.
Procedure
(1) Remove the ISE cover by removing the two plastic clips. (Refer to figure 6.2.10-1.)
(2) Remove the tube from the Calibrant A bag. (Refer to figure 6.2.10-1.)
(3) Be sure that the cap is set to the Calibrant A bag during work.
(4) By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Sequence] screen and input 5 (Number of times of
execution) in ISE Prime 11 then click ISE Prime button to perform ISE Prime and discharge the liquid
from the tube.
(5) Turn OFF the operational PC and the main analyzer.
(6) Remove the maintenance cove R1. (Refer to Figure 6.2.7-2.)
(7) Pull and remove the four tubes from the pump cassettes (two tubes / pump cassette). (Refer to Figure
6.2.9-1.)
(8) Remove the pump cassettes from the motor shaft by pressing the stoppers on both sides of the cassette.
Do not pull out and remove the metal pipe for

connection from side of the transparent tube.
Motor Shaft
Pump Cassette
When removing the pump cassette, press the

stoppers on the both sides and pull it forward.
When installing the pump cassette, make sure to
insert the pump cassette into the shaft properly until
a click sound is heard.
Replacing ISE pump cassette

Figure 6.2.9-1
6-30
(9) Install new pump cassette to the motor. (Refer to Figure 6.2.9-1.)
(10) Insert the four tubes into the new two pump cassettes. Since the new pump cassettes have no tube
maker (instruction), carefully connect the tubes to the cassettes in accordance with the tube maker
(instruction) marked on the piping tube of the side of the analyzer.
High Conc. Waste ISE Unit Sample Port
1
ISE Unit Bottom Port 3 2
4
Calibrant A bag
Drain Pump Supply Pump
Tube Marker Location

1 : Supply Pump (Output side)
(Connected to ISE Unit Sample Port)
2 : Supply Pump (Input side)
(Connected to Calibrant A bag)
23 : Drain Pump (Output side)
(Connected to High Conc. Waste)
4 : Drain Pump (Input side)
(Connected to ISE Unit Bottom Port)
Mounting cassette pump

Figure 6.2.9-2
(11) Turn on the operational PC and the main analyzer.
(12) Perform ISE Prime 99 times.
(13) Connect the tube to the Calibrant A bag and perform ISE Prime 10 times.
At this time, check that the liquid is correctly pumped and there is no liquid leakage at the junctions.
(14) Install the maintenance cove R1 of the right side. (Refer to Figure 6.2.7-2.) and the ISE cover. (Refer to
Figure 6.2.10-1.)
(15) Lastly, by the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Work Hour] screen and click RESET button of
Pump Cassette on Work Hour of ISE section to clear the used hours.
(16) Perform ISE Calibration and confirm results are within specifications.
6-31
6.2.10 CAL-A bag (in ISE)
WARNING: Wear medical rubber gloves to prevent direct contact with nozzles or liquid.
Procedure
(1) Remove the ISE cover by pulling up the two plastic clips. (Refer to Figure 6.2.10-1.)
(2) Pull out the tube from the Calibrant A bag and remove the Calibrant A bag. (Refer to Figure 6.2.10-1.)
ISE cover
Plastic clip × 2
Tube
Calibrant A bag
Replacing Calibrant A bag

Figure 6.2.10-1
(3) Pull out the connection tube on the point of the Calibrant A bag and takeout the used Calibrant A bag.
(4) Install a new Calibrant A bag in the predefined position and connect the tube to the Calibrant A bag by
the connection tube that belongs to the Calibrant A bag.
CAUTION: Be sure to hold the lower part of the opening of the bag for inserting the tube.
Insert the connection tube to the lower part of the opening of the bag.
(5) Install the SE cover.

By the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Sequence] screen
and input 10 (Number of times of execution) to ISE Prime .
and click ISE Prime button to perform ISE Prime.
(6) Lastly, by the screen operation, [Mainte (F10)] → [Work Hour] screen
and click RESET button of Calibrant A on Work Hour of ISE section to clear the used hours.
6.2.10 CAL-A bag (in ISE)
6-32

Furuno CA 400

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Furuno CA 400

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Original issue : Mar / 2008

Public ation No. O M- E 7219- 1D

(1) Failure/damage caused by the result of misuse.

FFFT P is fr eewar e, and its co p yr ight b elo ngs to Mr. So ta.

COPYRIGHT OF THIS MANUAL

Warranty / Trademark / Copyright of This Manual

REV DATE REVISION HIGHLIGHT

1D Aug. 2009 Modified [Foreword].

Chapter 2 Measurement Procedures

2.4 Placement for Reagent Bottles (RCU) ......................................... 2-33

2.7 Test Selection Setting ....................................................................2-42

2.8 Sample placement (ASP) ..............................................................2-74

2.11 Sample Addition ........................................................................... 2-81

Chapter 3 Explanation of Menus

3.4 QC (F8) ..........................................................................................3-57

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

9-52, Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya-City, 662-8580 Japan

Molenstraat 15 2513 BH, The Hague The Netherlands

<Precaution for Use and Installation Environment>

Prevention of electric shock

To ensure the accuracy of measurement data

Handling of test reagents

Prevention of affect on other facility/equipment

2. Precautions for Use

5. Reagent interference of assay method-to-method

12. Maintenance checks and periodical parts replacement

General Precautions for Use of Medical Electrical Equipment

1. Only qualified personnel shall use the analyzer.

5. The following precautions shall be taken after use of the analyzer.

<space for exhaust 150 and up

300 PC 300 300

Power supply and grounding

Refer power outlet installation to qualified personnel only.

Ground Ground Terminal

Water supply and drainage

Type of Water supply and drainage Type of connection tube Remarks

(1) Water supply system (purified water generator)

(2) Drainage system

Action to be taken as directed by the “OPERATOR’S

WARNING LABEL WARNING ABOUT PLACE

Risk of electric shock Power supply inlet

Mosaic plate (Mosaic

HOT SURFACE DTR

IRU heat insulation

9-1 IRU (Incubation Reaction Unit)

9-3 ASP (Auto Sampler Unit)

9-4 SPT(Sample Pipette Unit) / SPP(Sampling Pump Unit)

9-5 RCU (Reagent Container Unit)

9-6 RPT1/2 (Reagent Pipette Unit) / RPP1/2(Reagent Pump Unit)

9-7 DTR (Detector Unit)

9-8 MIX1/2 (Mixing Stirrer Unit)

9-9 SWU (Supply Water Unit)

9-10 PT Trough 3 PT Troughs (SRT Trough, RPT1 Trough, PRT2 Trough)

9-12 WPP (Water Pump Unit)

9-13 WU (Wash Unit)

9-14 Power Supply Unit

10. Other Functions - Auto start / shutoff,

11. Environment (under operation)

13. Connectors to main analyzer

15. Transient overvoltage Overvoltage category II

16. Rated pollution degree Pollution degree 2

17. The rating and characteristics of fuses